CxOnlineHelp Verzeichnis

Verfügbare Hilfeseiten für Produkt CodX PostOffice und Version V2022.4 und en

    • HELP_BV_BEZIRKADDMULTISELECT_DLG

    • HELP_COMMONTOOLS_DEPOTHUBSELECTOR_DLG

    • HELP_COMMONTOOLS_ZUSTELLORGANISATIONSEARCH_DLG

  • <Engine> Edit Report Data

    • HELP_CXREPORT_EDITREPORT

    In this dialog the report data can be edited. Report name Enter a language-independent internal name as the report name. Designation Enter the visible name for the report in the Name field. The name will be displayed later on the 'Print' button. The name can be defined for each language. If no name is entered, the report name will be displayed on the 'Print' button...

  • 2-factor authentication

    • HELP_CXSEC_2FACTOR

    #2FA

    For each user login an individual 2-factor authentication (#2FA) can be set up individually for each user login. If no 2-factor authentication, the ...create dialog is displayed, otherwise the ..edit dialog is displayed. The logged in user can create his own 2-factor authentication at any time. The logged in user can edit his own Edit 2-factor authentication, deactivate or delete it. Users with administrator privileges can 2-factor authentication of other users. deactivate or delete. When setting up the 2-factor authentication, follow the individual steps according to the dialog. must be followed.

  • Access authorization users/roles

    • HELP_CXSEC_SETUP_USER

    Note: In order to edit the access rights, you must have the necessary administrator rights. In a new installation you can do this with the predefined user Administrator (default with password: admin), which is permanently assigned to the role Administrator. The role Administrator in turn is fixed to the root function with the right Administrator. This assignment is not visible and cannot be deleted. We recommend the user Administrator, which cannot be deleted, exclusively for the administration of the user rights. As soon as you are familiar with this module, change the password of the user Administrator to a secure password. NoteThese roles and users are then assigned rights to the functions. We recommend that you to assign rights exclusively to roles in order to increase clarity. If you assign the rights directly to the users, you must always update the personnel mutations, you must also always update the rights assignment. It is much easier to assign a new user only to the desired role...

  • access denied

    • HELP_CXFRAME_DENYWND

    The current user has no right to see this to see this module. Switch to a module which you are allowed to use. If you want to change the access authorization for the application contact an employee who has the access data of a access data of a user with administrator authorization, and log on with this user. Then configure the Permissions in the corresponding settings page: Settings / General / Access authorization Settings / General...

  • Access rights for electronic safe deposit systems

    • HELP_MAILBOXSYSTEM_BIN_RIGHTS

    The Access rights for compartments of electronic safe deposit systems can be assigned very flexibly. Each access right applies to a specific person and a time range. If no explicit rights are assigned to the person, access rights can also be "inherited" indirectly via the customer/cost center of the person. "inherited". The deputies of a person "inherit" the access rights of the deputy for the period of the deputization if routing continues to the deputy (original recipient). deputy (original recipient). If the transmissions are diverted to the deputy during the deputization, the deputy's own rights apply. rights of the deputy apply. The rights of the deputy are applied recursively (deputy of the deputy, etc.)...

  • Access rights for electronic safe deposit systems

    • HELP_MAILBOXSYSTEM_YHM

    The notification by eMail is used for dynamic as well as static as well as static tray assignment. This way the recipient knows that mail is available for him. The eMail dispatch can be quite complex depending on its use and characteristics. Here is the description how to create the eMail-Avis. All consignments are determined which are assigned to a compartment. For this purpose, the persons and the customers/cost centres are determined which are connected to the compartment on the basis of the compartment to which the consignment is assigned. For all persons found, the substitute is determined. All persons (grouped) and all deputies (grouped) result in the amount of messages that are sent. If template is of type HTML, emails will be sent, otherwise SMS If it is a test system, all emails go to the set test email address, otherwise: All templates used to send a message (SMS or email) are determined using hirachic settings for all persons and their deputies: Person (or deputy) -> Messages -> Template Default. All consignments are determined which are assigned to a compartment. For this purpose, the persons and the customers/cost centres are determined which are connected to the compartment on the basis of the compartment to which the consignment is assigned. For all persons found, the substitute is determined...

  • Access rights Rights

    • HELP_CXSEC_SETUP_RIGHT

    NoteIn order to be able to edit the access authorization, you must have the necessary administrator rights. In a new installation you can do this with the predefined user <product> Administrator (default with password: admin), which is permanently assigned to the role Administrator. The role Administrator is in turn permanently associated with the root functions <Product> with the right Administrator. This assignment is not visible and cannot be deleted. The individual parts for which the authorization can be set individually are referred to as functions. The functions are fixed. However, they can change from version to version. The existence of the functions also depends on the product and its licensing. and its licensing. The structure of the functions corresponds to a large extent to the modules and its registers. In some cases these contain additional special functions. In addition to the modules, there are also some general functions such as the access authorization itself or the settings. A separate function are also all reports, which are again structured like the print buttonsavailable in the program. The rights of the roles and users are defined in the function tree. With a right click on a function or by clicking on the Edit button the permission edit dialog is displayed...

  • Acquisition power

    • HELP_CAPTURESTATISTICS_CONTROL

    CodX PostOffice calculates cyclically in the background the capture performance per user/sorter and performance. This statistical data is stored in the database and can be evaluated by means of a report. The displayed UI component shows, depending on the selection, the performance for the currently logged on user and selected sorter per interval or since the last logon. This data is refreshed in the defined cycle. A value captured in a Custfield defines the cycle in which the capture performance is measured and stored as a Statistical Value in the database as a statistical value. For example, if the cycle is 5 minutes (which is the default and minimum time), then every 5 minutes a summary of all captured items per user, sorter and performance for that cycle will be created every 5 minutes. Example: The interval is set to 5 minutes, the UPOC of the logged in employee is "1000000003" and the UPOC of the sorter is. "0700000300" and the selected service is "05000018" once and "0500000223" once. Interval time...

  • Add persons or logistics unit

    • HELP_COMMONTOOLS_PERSONSGROUPSEARCHDLG

    Enter a search term for the search. The inactive groups of persons are also taken into account in the search. In a list the groups of persons found are displayed in a list. (Maximum 2000) The inactive persons are written inlight grey. You can also not enter a search term, so that all groups of persons are displayed. With a double click or the button[Apply] the person group is group of persons is selected.

  • Additional insurance

    • HELP_DIEPOST_POSTPAC_INTERNATIONAL_ZUSATZVERSICHERUNG

    Liability up to a maximum of CHF 1000.00 is included in the price. included in the price. With the additional insurance the liability is valid up to CHF 3000.00.

  • Additional service

    • HELP_TARIFMODELL_SETUP_ZUSATZLEISTUNG

    When entering shipments, it is possible to select further services in addition to the actual service (we are talking about the main service here). services, the so-called additional services. Which additional services are available for selection can be defined here. The additional services are only used for additional charging of shipments. For the determination of the article the associated consignment data (weight, format, district). Definition of fringe benefits With Add you get a new list entry, where you can create the connection from the main service to the additional service or from the additional service to another additional service. additional service to another additional service. However, a connection from the main service to an additional service is mandatory. With the Exclude checkbox you can model that if one additional service is selected, the other additional service cannot be selected. cannot be selected. This makes no sense for a connection to the main service. The data is only saved when the service detail dialog is exited with OK. Example The following entries were created:...

  • Additional service quantity / price

    • HELP_POLIBRARY_EXTRA_SERVICE_AMOUNT_PRICE_DLG

    On the additional service, you can define whether a quantity and a price are to be a quantity and a price can be entered when entering the additional service. can be entered. If this is the case, the quantity and price are stored for the service are saved and later transferred to the order data. later. If a price has been entered here (not equal to 0.0), it will be later transferred to the order data. The price of such an of such an order item is transferred to the invoice in exactly the same way in the invoice when the invoice is created. (The current price is no longer fetched from the tariff model). If no price has been entered (equal to 0.0), it is taken from the is copied from the rate model when the order data is created. Reset Reset sets the corresponding value back to the original value. to the original value...

  • Address detail

    • HELP_MSOS_ADRESSDETAIL

    This dialog shows an overview of the automatic corrections and whether or why an address label will be printed. The OCR Address field displays the address as it was read by the OCR. In the field Corrected address this is displayed after the correction by CodX PostOffice . Here you can see in direct comparison, which changes have been made automatically. The lower half shows how well each value was detected. The percentages in the column Recognition Address (%) correspond to the recognition rate. 100% corresponds to a complete correct recognition of the corresponding value. The 3 column Set value address label (%) shows from which value (undershoot) an address label would be would be printed. These values are defined in the restrictions Global entry, per sorter, per customer/cost center or per service. defined. Instructions can be found in the AdminDoc in the chapter Setting acquisition restrictions.

  • Address fixation

    • HELP_MSAZD_MSCONFIGPARAMDLG

    It is configurable up to which field of the recipient address the values are not deleted after saving the transmission. Country (focus on filled postal code) The country is retained from the previously entered shipment. All other fields are cleared. The cursor is in the Postcode field, which is filled with the last filled with the last entered postcode. This is already marked. Thus this can be taken over either directly, or a deviating one can be entered directly. Country/PLZ [city] (focus on empty street) The country, postcode and city are retained from the previously entered shipment. The cursor sits in the (empty) Street field. Country/PLZ/City/Street (focus on empty house number) Country, postcode, city and will be kept from the previously entered shipment. The cursor sits in the (empty) field house number. Country/Postcode/City Fixed default) Country, postal code and city are predefined. These specifications can be made in the fields below.

  • Address type settings

    • HELP_KV_SETUP_ADDRESSTYPE_DETAIL_CF

    Enter the settings for the selected address type here. Setting Possible values Description / Function 001: Use address type for IHS server 'Check recipient address' function...

  • Advance directive

    • HELP_KV_DIALOG_VORAUSVERFUEGUNG

    Variant By entering the variant, you define what should happen to an undeliverable shipment. For each variant, further attributes can be entered for each variant, which control the behavior of the undeliverable items in detail. In the case of "Undeliverable item handed over to yellow post", you can specify the rate at which this item will be charged, whether with the yellow post tariff or with your own tariff. For the advance directive "Return to sender" you can define whether a customer return label is to be printed and whether the forwarding address is to be is to be determined. Transfer to partner LOCK (partner lock)...

  • Advanced Shipment Attributes Detail

    • HELP_CONFIGSERVER_SETUP_SBBCUSTFIELDMANAGEMENT_DETAIL

    This dialog is used to enter and edit existing and edit existing extended shipment attributes. must be entered correctly: Name Enter or change the name of the Extended shipment attribute. This name can be a technical or descriptive name. By means of the button (country flag) behind the input field, you have the option language-dependent descriptions for this attribute, which is then which is then displayed to the user. The name can be a maximum of 254 characters long. Field type The field type describes the type of input and data behind an extended shipment attribute, the selection is self-describing. Please note that the input type of an extended shipment attribute that has already been entered can no longer be can be changed if data for this attribute has already been has already been entered for shipments. Values selection field If the input type is a selection field, a selection list with the values entered here is a selection list is displayed with the values entered here. is displayed. With the two buttons "Add" and "Delete" buttons next to the list of selection field values, these values can be entered and deleted again. They are edited by clicking on the corresponding entry in the list. in the list. Depending on the selection field type, both values (selection field integer) in the list or only the text value (selection field Text) must be entered. Alternate code If this radio button is activated, this means that the value value on a shipment will be used as an additional alternate code. alternative code...

  • Alias

    • HELP_ALIAS_DLG

    Here aliases can be entered, deleted or edited. All existing aliases are displayed in the list.

  • Analysis IHS Search

    • HELP_POLIBRARY_SHOW_IHS_ANALYSIS_DLG

    This dialog shows detailed information about a search result of the IHS cache. An analysis is performed if the checkbox Perform analysis is activated in MS- or OS-IHS. Valuable additional information is also recorded in the CxDataLogger. In particular, this information helps to investigate the reason for unwanted search results and to avoid them by appropriate IHS server settings. ATTENTION: Activating the analysis causes a significant slowdown of the IHS search! The function should only be used to analyze the search process and to optimize the IHS settings! Title bar The title bar displays the type (Person/Customer/LogisticUnit), the UPOC and the name/identifier of the hit (entity found). are displayed...

  • Application language

    • HELP_CXFRAME_LANGUAGE

    In addition to German (default language), the application can also be displayed in French or Italian. Select the the desired language and press OK. In order to change the system language, the application must be restarted. You can do this do this immediately or at a later time, the language will then only be loaded the next time the application is started. Reporting language You have the option of defining the language for the report output independently of the system language. To do this, set the Reporting Language switch and select the required language from the list. You do not have to restart the application to do this. The change takes effect immediately the next time you start a report.

  • Application language

    • HELP_CXWATCHDOG_SETUP

    This component monitors other components and gives them the possibility to channels to sound the alarm. The module also offers the possibility to monitor systems decentrally. The following monitoring can be added can be added: Echo Ping (ICMP) Drive Space The local or the drives of other computers can be monitored. can be monitored. Drive: c:\ or \cx11\CxPool...

  • Area restriction

    • HELP_MSAZD_RESTRICTGEBIETDLG

    As the items are presorted according to delivery district or depot in the case of late entry, it can be useful to restrict the delivery area in order to simplify entry. delivery area can be useful to simplify the entry. This restriction can be made in this dialog. You can restrict the area to a district group or a depot. To do so, select the corresponding option, search for the required unit and confirm your selection. Impact After restriction to an area, it is no longer necessary to specify postcodes or towns when entering consignments. The entry of the street and possibly the house number (as well as the district if necessary) is sufficient to be able to allocate the consignment. Cancellation...

  • Area restriction for coverage

    • HELP_LOGISTIK_PRODUCTIONSITE_AREA_RESTRICTION

    For each production site, areas can be recorded here that are which are supported in the recording. If no area has been selected, no restriction applies to this production site. production site, no restriction applies. Add In the Area Search dialog you can search for a specific area can be searched for. Delete...

  • Article assignment

    • HELP_TM_SETUP_TAB_ARTIKELMAPPING

    This is where the mapping of external article identifications to the articles defined in CodX PostOffice defined in CodX PostOffice. This mapping is used if a specific article has to be assigned to the mailings during a data import (e.g. mail import of the mail allicance SEM interface). article must be assigned to the items. The easiest way to create assignments is to use the supplied file xMailAllianceProducts.xml and then assign the CodX PostOffice articles. Article Assignment for MailAlliance SEM Interface Select the MailAlliance SEM Interface module in the combo box. The list shows the existing mappings of the SEM product ID to the CodX PostOffice articles. For more information about the products supported by the SEM interface, please contact mail alliance. Importing the MailAlliance SEM products The product list is delivered with the file CxMailAllianceProducts.xml and is located in the installation directory of CodX PostOffice. If there are new products, the product list can be supplemented or replaced. The easiest way to get an overview of what has changed is to import this product list. Afterwards you complete the data with the article assignments and save it...

  • Assign person group

    • HELP_PERSON_PERSONSGROUP_ASSIGNMENT_DLG

    Here you can assign groups of people to a person and vice versa. When entering assignments, there is no check whether such an entry already exists. Time range The area for the time specification is determined on the basis of the existing validity time areas by the person as well as by the person group set. If an existing assignment date is outside the range, it is changed so that it lies within the range for the time specification. If you change the group of people or the person, the range for the time specification is also adjusted if necessary...

  • Assign UPOCs

    • HELP_UPOCCENTER_UPOC_ZUWEISEN_DLG

    You can determine if you want to assign all UPOC's or if you only want to assign a part e.g. 500 pieces. To do this, simply enter the first and the last UPOC of this series. By clicking on "Assign" these UPOC's will be automatically assigned to the selected customer and moved to the lower window. window. Important: The block to be allocated may be smaller than the block produced. However, the block to be assigned must not overlap the produced block. overlap the produced block. If an invalid entry is made (red blocks), the allocation of the block is refused. There will be NO allocation according to the intersection of red and blue blocks. After a UPOC has been assigned, the assignment date is stored. This means that it is always possible to see when this UPOC or entire UPOC blocks were were assigned.

  • Backup/Restore district structure

    • HELP_BV_BACKUP

    With the function Backup and Restore in the district management of CodX PostOffice you have the possibility to create a backup of a complete district structure. The backups are saved directly in the CodX PostOffice database. You can create as many backups as you like. Backup district structures can be deleted at any time. From a backup district structure, any entry can be restored to an active district structure. Backup district data is ignored in all CodX PostOffice applications. They are neither available for selection nor can they be edited in the district management. They serve only as a backup. Please note that each backup district structure generates data in the database accordingly. generates data in the database and, in the case of large district administrations can put a strain on the system. Functional description All functions which concern the backup/restore, can only be executed via the context menu. To do this, press the right mouse button on a selected entry in the district administration. Depending on the entry, different functions are displayed in the context menu, as not all are available everywhere. are available. District structure Backup...

  • Boxing

    • HELP_BX

    Now you can find the manual of this module online on our webserver. This has the advantage that we can incorporate additions and changes more quickly and easily. Link to the manual of your version (PDF file)...

  • Broadcast research

    • HELP_SV

    The module 'Broadcast research' is used to research broadcasts. Search for shipments Basically, you have the possibility to search in the online database or in the archive, provided that the corresponding license is available. The search for broadcasts can be carried out with extensive filters. The filters are divided into individual tabs. If a search term is stored in a filter, a binoculars symbol is displayed on the corresponding filter. You can reset all filters by pressing the 'Reset' button...

  • Bug reports

    • HELP_CXCRASHRPT

    This help describes the handling of error reports (crash dumps). In this view, you have an overview of and access to all crash reports that have taken place recently. Old crash reports are automatically deleted after a certain time. Procedure If a software crash occurs on a CodX PostOffice workstation, the next time CodX PostOffice is launched on the same workstation a crash report will be stored in the CodX PostOffice database. Export the crash report to a file under 'Error reports'. This can be done from any CodX PostOffice workstation, as long as you have administrator rights. Open a support ticket at https://codx.zendesk.com/hc/de/requests/new and send the file. Our specialists can use it to analyze the error. Operation...

  • Bulky goods

    • HELP_DIEPOST_POSTPAC_INTERNATIONAL_SPERRGUT

    Bulky goods are items that exceed the maximum dimensions for standard parcels for standard parcels (100 x 60 x 60 cm), consignments with a address, as well as unpackaged items and rolls that are longer than than 1 m.

  • BV - Area Country

    • HELP_BV_TAB_STRASSEDLG_LAND

    This embedded detail dialog shows all available attributes of a country. The attributes Master, Key and aliases are described in the help for BV - Territory Management because they are available in almost every detail dialog. are available. Please note that depending on the available license and depending on the operating mode (IHS or AZD), different views exist and attributes may be available or deactivated. can be available or deactivated. This help always describes all possible views and views and attributes are always described. Operation The Attriubut country does not have to be unique, but helps but helps later when entering addresses. It is now possible to maintain the two ISO codes 2 and 3 can be maintained on the entity country, which are also used for the recognition of the country during import. In addition, it is displayed whether the actively selected country is the default country. This can be changed by activating the checkbox on a country is activated. This option is only available if you have administrator rights...

  • BV - Area House

    • HELP_BV_TAB_STRASSEDLG_HAUS

    This embedded detail dialog shows all available attributes of a house. The attributes Master, Key and Aliases are described in detail in the Help forBV - Territory Management, because they are available in almost every detail dialog. Please note that depending on the available license and the operating mode (IHS or AZD), different views may exist and attributes may be available or disabled. This help always describes all possible views and attributes. Operation Attribute Description...

  • BV - Area Location

    • HELP_BV_TAB_STRASSEDLG_ORT

    This embedded detail dialog shows all available attributes of a location. The attributes Master, Key and aliases are described in the help for BV - Territory Management because they are available in almost every detail dialog. are available. Please note that depending on the available license and depending on the operating mode (IHS or AZD), different views exist and attributes may be available or deactivated. can be available or deactivated. This help always describes all possible views and views and attributes are always described. Operation Attribute Description...

  • BV - Carrier route attributes

    • HELP_BV_TAB_BEZIRKDLG_ZUSTELLUNG

    Different default values can be can be stored for each carrier route. The standard values are maintained in carrier route management for the "carrier route". (The BVpro license must be available). View On the left side of the screen you will find valid for all entities, the carrier route tree with the complete carrier route structure. On the right side of the screen are the available attributes of the carrier route tree level. Within these attributes you will find a further tab with the 3 possible detail dialogs Capacity limits, home delivery attributes and sequencing. Please note that depending on depending on the AZD or IHS operation mode and the license model. attributes can be displayed. In this help always describes all possible attributes. Operation Please note that the following attributes can only be edited if the carrier route belonging to them has been set to editing beforehand. To use the functions in the carrier route tree, please read the help Carrier routesand routing...

  • BV - Delivery Info

    • HELP_BV_TAB_ZUSTELLINFODLG

    In the "Delivery info" tab, the delivery info can be delivery information can be edited. With certain rights only the only the delivery info for the districts and areas can be edited. can be edited. To edit the carrier route and to you need your own rights. View The upper part of the dialog contains the filter settings, with which area and district restrictions can be made. can be made. For this you can define by means of a selection whether to search for consignments, districts or area data. should be searched. In the lower part you will find on the right side the the district structure if one was found, or on the left side the area structure left side the area structure if one was found. Under the respective structure views are the buttons with the available functions. Operation Filter/Search...

  • BV - Delivery route planning tour

    • HELP_BV_AUSLIEFERTOUR_TOUR

    With this detail dialog you manage your delivery rounds, create new ones or edit existing ones. For each tour you can define a start time. For each unloading point an arrival time can also be entered. This makes the chronological of the tour can be seen. By default the following is used for all times 00:00:00 is used for all times. View The upper part of the screen contains all the attributes that you can you can edit for a delivery round. In the lower part of the detail dialog box is a list of all unloading points assigned to this unloading points assigned to this delivery tour and their sequence within the tour. within the tour. Operation Next to the list of unloading points you will find the following function buttons:...

  • BV - Delivery Scheduling Group

    • HELP_BV_TAB_AUSLIEFERTOURDLG_GRP

    Enter or edit a delivery source group. The UPOC is assigned automatically during new entry. It can no longer be changed during processing. View The dialog contains all attributes that are available to the delivery source group. Operation The following functions are available:...

  • BV - District

    • HELP_BV_TAB_BEZIRKDLG_BEZIRK

    The entity carrier route is located below the carrier route group entity. It is the most important and most extensive entity within the carrier route tree. A carrier route represents a geographical area that has been defined for the delivery of items. A carrier route includes all entities from carrier route up to and including carrier route IHS or carrier route number range, depending on the license and application mode. Carrier routes are versioned, which means that a carrier route that is being edited is a copy of the current carrier route. If this is activated, the copy will be used as the current district and the previous version is saved as the old carrier route version. Thus existing items always refer to the correct carrier route, even if the has been changed or deleted in the meantime. View On the left side of the screen you will find valid for all entities, the carrier route tree with the complete carrier route structure. On the right side of the screen are the available attributes of the carrier route tree level. Within these attributes you will find a further tab with the 3 possible detail dialogs Capacity limits, home delivery attributes and sequencing. Please note that depending on depending on the AZD or IHS operation mode and the license model. attributes can be displayed. In this help always describes all possible attributes. The different entities of a district are each with a small picture in front of the name. For a normal active carrier route these are colored, with a carrier route in they are green, and for a carrier route that has been marked for marked for activation, they are red. Districts that are to be deleted have grey images and are only displayed down to the district level. level. Operation...

  • BV - District Capacity limits

    • HELP_BV_TAB_BEZIRKDLG_UEBERLAUF

    The capacity limits are used for production planning and control. These are automatically set when entering consignments via various modules on the basis of the set capacity limits. ATTENTION: The Maximum shipment quantity bulk is a subset of Maximum shipment quantity total! View On the left side of the screen you will find valid for all entities, the carrier route tree with the complete carrier route structure. On the right side of the screen are the available attributes of the carrier route tree level. Within these attributes you will find a further tab with the 3 possible detail dialogs Capacity limits, home delivery attributes and sequencing. Please note that depending on depending on the AZD or IHS operation mode and the license model. attributes can be displayed. In this help always describes all possible attributes. Operation...

  • BV - District Country

    • HELP_BV_TAB_BEZIRKDLG_BEZIRKLAND

    The district land is the next subset of counties. A district can contain any number of district countries, even the same country more than once. It is the first level within a county that defines the geography. View On the left side of the screen you will find valid for all entities, the carrier route tree with the complete carrier route structure. On the right side of the screen are the available attributes of the tree level carrier route country. Please note that depending on depending on the operation mode AZD or IHS and the license model, more or attributes can be displayed. In this help always describes all possible attributes. Operation For the operation of the functions in the district tree the help BV - district administration...

  • BV - District District Group

    • HELP_BV_TAB_BEZIRKDLG_BEZIRKGRUPPE

    A district group is a subgroup of the carrier route structure. You can use it to divide carrier routes into groups in order to simplify the overview and maintainability. You can enter as many many carrier route groups within a carrier route structure. View On the left side of the screen you will find valid for all entities, the carrier route tree with the complete carrier route structure. On the right side are the available attributes of the tree level carrier route group. Please note that depending on depending on the AZD or IHS operation mode and the license model, more or attributes can be displayed. In this help always describes all possible attributes. Operation For the operation of the functions in the district tree the help BV - district administration...

  • BV - District District number range

    • HELP_BV_TAB_BEZIRKDLG_NRBEREICH

    #District #SSI

    The district number ranges (#District) are the subdivision of a district street into house number ranges. You can make as many subdivisions as you like, but they should not overlap. The areas are subdivisible by house numbers, by house number suffix, and by division into even, odd, and all house numbers. This entity is only visible in AZD mode. View On the left side of the screen, as is valid for all entities, is the carrier route tree with the complete carrier route structure. On the right side are the available attributes of the tree level carrier route number range. Please note that depending on the operation mode AZD or IHS and depending on the license model, more or less attributes can be displayed. All possible attributes are always described in this help. Operation Please note that the following attributes can only be edited if the associated carrier route has been set to edit beforehand. For the operation of the functions in the carrier route tree please read the help carrierroutes and routing...

  • BV - District District structure

    • HELP_BV_TAB_BEZIRKDLG_ROOT

    The carrier route structure is the first entity in the carrier route tree. Below a carrier route structure there is a complete carrier route administration. You can enter any number of carrier route structures, which can be restricted by a validity date. can be restricted. View On the left side of the screen you will find valid for all entities, the carrier route tree with the complete carrier route structure. On the right side are the available attributes of the tree level carrier route structure. Please note that depending on depending on the operation mode AZD or IHS and the license model, more or attributes can be displayed. In this help always describes all possible attributes. The default district structure is displayed with a light green background. Operation For the operation of the functions in the district tree the help BV - district administration...

  • BV - District IHS

    • HELP_BV_TAB_BEZIRKDLG_IHS

    The IHS district defines a house or Logistics unit under the district road. Only the existing house and logistics units of the corresponding street can be selected. This entity is only visible in IHS mode. View On the left side of the screen you will find valid for all entities, the carrier route tree with the complete carrier route structure. On the right side of the screen are the available attributes of the carrier route IHS tree level. Please note, that depending on the operation mode AZD or IHS and depending on the license model more or fewer attributes can be displayed. In this help always describes all possible attributes. Operation Please note that the following attributes can only be edited if the carrier route belonging to them has been set to editing beforehand. To use the functions in the carrier route tree, please read the help Carrier routesand routing...

  • BV - District Location

    • HELP_BV_TAB_BEZIRKDLG_BEZIRKORT

    District towns are the next level below the district countries. You can select all locations belonging to the corresponding can be selected. A place can only occur once within a county country. View On the left side of the screen you will find valid for all entities, the carrier route tree with the complete carrier route structure. On the right side of the screen are the available attributes of the tree level carrier route city. Please note that depending on the AZD or IHS operation mode and depending on the license model, more or fewer attributes can be displayed. This help always describes all possible attributes are always described. Operation Please note that the following attributes can only be edited if the carrier route belonging to them has been set to editing beforehand. To use the functions in the carrier route tree, please read the help Carrier routesand routing...

  • BV - District Street

    • HELP_BV_TAB_BEZIRKDLG_BEZIRKSTRASSE

    District roads are the next level below district places. All streets belonging to the corresponding district can be selected. A street can only occur occur only once within a district city. View On the left side of the screen you will find valid for all entities, the carrier route tree with the complete carrier route structure. On the right side are the available attributes of the carrier route tree level. Please note that depending on depending on the operation mode AZD or IHS and depending on the license model. attributes can be displayed. In this help always describes all possible attributes. Operation Please note that the following attributes can only be edited if the carrier route belonging to them has been set to editing beforehand. To use the functions in the carrier route tree, please read the help Carrier routesand routing...

  • BV - Logistics unit area

    • HELP_BV_TAB_STRASSEDLG_LOGISTICUNIT

    This embedded detail dialog shows all available attributes of a logistics unit. The attributes Master, Key and aliases are described in the help for BV - Territory Management because they are available in almost every detail dialog. are available. If, when saving the logistics unit, the error message error message that the UPOC already exists, the ID in the table IDgen for the lType=50 must be corrected. This must be done be done by the administrator or by CodX Support. Please note that depending on the available license and depending on the operating mode (IHS or AZD), different views exist and attributes may be available or deactivated. can be available or deactivated. This help always describes all possible views and views and attributes are always described. Operation Attribute...

  • BV - Search in district

    • HELP_BV_GEBIET_BEZIRK_SEARCH_DLG

  • BV - Street area

    • HELP_BV_TAB_STRASSEDLG_STRASSE

    This embedded detail dialog shows all available attributes of a street. The attributes Master, Key and Aliases are described in detail in the Help forBV - Territory Management, because they are available in almost every detail dialog. Please note that depending on the available license and the operating mode (IHS or AZD), different views may exist and attributes may be available or disabled. This help always describes all possible views and attributes. Operation Attribute Description...

  • BV - Territory Management

    • HELP_BV_TAB_STRASSEDLG_ROOT

    By area we mean the address data that can be used as recipient addresses. The area can be defined as deep as you like on the following four levels: Country Postcode / City Street House Logistics Unit Postcode / City Street House Logistics Unit...

  • BV Settings

    • HELP_BV_SETUP_UNLOCKDISTRICT

    This settings dialog is used to unlock Locked carrier routes. The districts are locked and unlocked by the program when user by the program and unlocked again. This is done automatically and the user does not have to take care of it. However, it can happen, however, that when the user is in edit mode, the program is terminated or closed improperly, for example. a lock remains active. This can usually be removed by the same by the same user on the same workstation, by editing the same district again and and closing the processing mode correctly. However, as soon as another user user wants to edit this carrier route, this is not possible because the system system considers the carrier route to be locked by another user. by another user. It can therefore happen that carrier routes can no longer be can be edited. In order to prevent this case, this dialog has been implemented with which it is possible to remove such locks on the database. !!! Please note the following: Improper use of this function can cause the software can cause the software to misbehave, mainly in such a way that a district that is unlocked is actually still being processed by a user. in progress. After that, other users could also edit this and invalidate changes made by the first user, or lead to or lead to inconsistency of the district data. You should therefore be be careful when unlocking carrier routes. View...

  • Camera profile

    • HELP_SETUP_CAMREA_PROFILE_DLG

    #HDR

    Before commissioning, the cameras must be recorded and configured. Define the individual camera settings for a camera profile here. Name: Name of the profile. This is displayed in the selection of the camera profile in the modules OS-AZD and OS-IHS modules. Comment: Comment on the profile Camera assignment...

  • Camera settings

    • HELP_OS_SETUP_CAMERA

    In this dialog, the cameras and the camera profiles are recorded and configured. Further technical details on the installation of cameras and drivers are described in the AdminDoc. The camera settings can basically be made on three levels. If a setting is not defined on one level, the setting on the next lower level is used. Hierarchy: Profile Workplace System Profile...

  • Camera settings per roll

    • HELP_CAMERA_SETUP_ROLE_DLG

    Before commissioning, the cameras must be recorded and configured. Define the individual camera settings for a camera profile here. One tab is displayed per assigned role (function). The appropriate settings can be made for the selected role. For combo cameras (OCR Station-V5/V6) only one tab is displayed, the settings apply to all roles of the camera...

  • Capture / Delivery

    • HELP_PV_ZUSTELLUNG

    In the tab Entry / Delivery you can information about the delivery, as well as the availability at the different different entry modules can be stored. The setting for the Info can be made from a predefined selection and on the other hand you also have the possibility to enter your own text at Delivery Info to enter your own text. The setting for the Routing you can from a predefined selection. At Capture with you can define the following: At which entry modules the person is found, in order to create a shipment for the person. Manual capture Lettershop Web - mailing form Sorting machine Courier orders - Client

  • Cash on delivery ECONOMY

    • HELP_DIEPOST_POSTPAC_INTERNATIONAL_NACHNAHME_ECONOMY

    Credit to postal account in Switzerland (only with contract). contract).

  • CentoMail

    • HELP_CENTORMAIL_SETUPDLG

    The Scanner commands for format and weight button opens a dialog in which the scanner commands for the format and weight settings can be configured. format and weight setting can be configured. See also: Link to the manual of your version (PDF file)

  • centormail

    • HELP_Centormail

    Now you can find the manual of this module online on our webserver. This has the advantage that we can incorporate additions and changes more quickly and easily. Link to the manual of your version (PDF file)...

  • CentorMail

    • HELP_CENTORMAIL_CENTORMAILDLG

    If the Centormail is in the weighing mode "Static Weighing" or "Never Weighing" then a format MUST be manually selected in the field Format field. If scanner commands are stored in the settings (Automatic production\Centormail) for the format input, a desired format can be set by scanning the barcode. by scanning the barcode. If the Centormail is in weighing mode "Never weigh" a weight MUST be entered manually in the field Weight:. If scanner commands are stored in the settings (Automatic production\Centormail) for the weight input, a desired weight can be set by scanning the barcode. by scanning the barcode. See also: Link to the manual of your version (PDF file)

  • CEP dispatch optimisation

    • HELP_KEP_SHIPPING_OPTIMIZATION_DLG

    In this dialog, all CEP service providers available for the entered recipient address are displayed with the respective services and articles. articles are displayed. The list is sorted in ascending order by item price (cheapest item atobest). Select a line (OK or double-click), the service provider and the service are transferred to the entry module. Requirements/restrictions - There is NO online query of the articles/prices, but the articles/prices from the tariff model are used. are used...

  • CEP multiple shipment

    • HELP_KEP_MULTI_ITEM_CAPTURE

    Data per sub-broadcast For each sub-shipment, the weight and, if necessary, other attributes (depending on the CEP service provider, service and additional service) must be recorded. The attributes to be entered can be edited in the user interface, all others are locked. The extended shipment attributes for the dimensions (length, width, height) are taken from the previous shipment if the weight or format is fixed. weight or format is fixed, otherwise they are set to 0. Process...

  • CEP Processing

    • HELP_KEP_PROCESSING

    CEP service provider (Courier/Express/Parcel) are external service providers who deliver/process shipments and offer shipment tracking (track and trace). Requirements Account with CEP service provider available Corresponding license in CodX PostOffice Setup of the corresponding account in CodX PostOffice (see Settings CEP DHL Parcel, Settings CEP DHLExpress, Settings CEPUPS, Settings CEPFedEx, Settings KEPDPD, Settings KEPTNT Express)...

  • CEP return shipment

    • HELP_KEP_RETOUREN_SEDUNG

    Process In the outgoing mail (module MS/OS-AZD) a shipment is entered for a CEP service provider and in addition the option Returns shipment option is also activated. The main consignment is processed normally by the CEP service provider's web service and a corresponding label / shipping and a corresponding label / dispatch note is created. After saving this consignment, the entry of the corresponding return consignment is started automatically. For this purpose, the main shipment is copied, provided with a new shipment UPOC and opened for processing. In the process the text Ready for entry of return shipment is displayed in the status line. The following data of the main consignment are automatically changed / adjusted: Sender / recipient address are exchanged and transferred to the return as recipient / sender address. The performance of the return shipment is set according to the setting of the CEP service provider. Order date and planned delivery date are set to "infinite" and cannot be edited...

  • CEP sender data

    • HELP_KEP_ABSENDER_DATA

    The ISO code is determined from the country even if it is entered in plain text, e.g. "Switzerland" becomes CH. DHL Express The setting"Sender company name" will NOT be replaced replaced by data from the sender address! Field in setting...

  • CityMail SAP Export Basic Data

    • HELP_CITYMAIL_SAP_INTERFACE_GRUNDDATEN_TAB

    General The following basic data must be maintained here: Allocation of the carrier routes to the delivery types Allocation of the city districts to the categories Price and quantity scale for the individual categories and delivery types...

  • CityMail SAP Export Settings

    • HELP_CITYMAIL_SAP_INTERFACE_SETUP_TAB

    General All shipment data is stored in CodX PostOffice. This data is used to create the delivery data. The delivery data is generated daily from the item data. The delivery data is a CityMail extension. Delivery data Based on the shipment data and the basic data, the delivery data is compiled. The action can be started at any time (time of day). This generation takes place daily so that shipments with multiple deliveries are also calculated multiple times (employee for 1st delivery and employee for the 2nd home delivery). Accounting data...

  • CityMail SAP-Export Delivery Data

    • HELP_CITYMAIL_SAP_INTERFACE_ZUSTELLDATEN_TAB

    General All shipment data is stored in CodX PostOffice. This data is used to create the delivery data. The delivery data is generated daily from the shipment data. This delivery data can be viewed and modified here. List All delivery data are displayed in a tree view. Double-click on the entry to obtain further information. The structure is as follows:...

  • Cleaning lockers

    • HELP_MAILBOXSYSTEM_CLEANING

    To clean lockers, the authorised employees must be defined as operators with the Cleaning function. You do this under Compartment systems configuration or Management. Cleaning can also be carried out outside operating hours. Only trays that are not permanently assigned are cleaned. (Not statically assigned) After the tray has been cleaned, the tray should be closed again. Procedure The cleaning staff logs on to the compartment system with the service card. The procedure for cleaning the compartment can be selected on the screen...

  • CleanUp

    • HELP_CLEANUP_SETUPDLG

    Archiving / deleting shipments Activate the checkbox to enable archiving or deletion of captured shipments. Minimum life of shipments [3..360 days] In this field you can enter the minimum number of days a shipment should remain in the system (possible values: 3-360 days). days). Standard lifetime of shipments [3..360 days]...

  • Cliché import

    • HELP_LABELDEF_KLISCHEIMPORT

    For the import, a smartcard reader must be connected correctly and a card must be inserted.

  • Client: Settings

    • HELP_CONFIGSERVER_SETUP_MANDANT_CUSTFIELD

    In this dialog the Custfields Definitions for the client. Please note that the settings can be different for each client. For further help on edit custfields, please refer to the corresponding help. Available options Designation (Custfieldname) Value (table ID: 2041, lID = ID from the table client)...

  • Climate neutral shipping

    • HELP_DIEPOST_POSTPAC_INTERNATIONAL_KLIMANEUTRAL_VERSAND

    Every transport service pollutes the environment with CO2 emissions. Thanks to "pro clima" shipping, you can do something good for the climate for just a few centimes per item. Swiss Post invests your contribution in high-quality climate protection projects at home and and abroad. greenhouse gases are reduced and the sustainable development of the development of the project region. This offsets the CO2 emissions from the transport of your shipment are offset. The CO2 reduction achieved through "pro clima" surcharges can be integrated into your as an image-enhancing message in your communication measures. integrate.

  • Close Codx PostOffice

    • HELP_POSTATUSVIEW_SHUTDWON_ACTION_DLG

    If CodX PostOffice is set as shell, then one of the following actions will be performed automatically: 'Shut down PC', 'Restart PC', 'User log off' or 'start normal shell'. This setting is configurable and is described in the AdminDoc. If you are logged on as an administrator, you can you can select the action manually. The action 'Start normal shell' starts the Windows Explorer. See also...

  • CodeParser Testing

    • HELP_COMMONTOOLS_CODEPARSER_TEST

    You can enter any code here to analyze. After pressing Test we will show you the search result will be displayed. The parsing result gives you a general information. Under CodeRule you will find the details of the found CodeRule(Order: Match; Description) The result list shows the individual values that were extracted with the ParsingRule. When you exit the dialog, the code to be parsed is stored to be parsed is stored in the registry. This will be displayed again the next time displayed.

  • CodeRule

    • HELP_CONFIGSERVER_SETUP_CODERULE

    Here the definitions for a CodeRule can be edited. Active A CodeRule is only considered if it is is also active. Rule type The following rule types are available:...

  • CodX PostOffice

    • HELP_MDE-X

    Hint: To use this app, you need basic knowledge in the operation of Android or iOS (buttons, input fields, (context) menus, lists, ...). This is not the content of this online help. Login/User rights During the first configuration no login is necessary, but after the first successful synchronization you have to log in with User/Password to log in. Click on the "CodX PostOffice" icon on the MDE app list. This will start the app and the login form will appear. As the user, enter their employee UPOC and personal password, confirm with <Log in>...

  • Collection calendar

    • HELP_TAB_ABHOLKALENDER

    General The mail service provider collects the mail from the customer and brings it to the sorting centre. The collection usually takes place regularly. The collection rounds module now provides the user with an instrument to plan the collection tours of his customers and to give the collection driver a list of all list with all customers to be picked up. Regular pick-up tours, so-called standard pick-up tours, can be managed, can be managed, as well as short-term changes can be recorded. A server component generates the daily pick-up tour instances from the standard pick-up tours. pickup tour instances that can be found in the pickup calendar. In order to process pick-up tours, an FA license is is required. In order to use this module, you need the appropriate access rights. (User right pick-up tours / pick-up calendar )...

  • Compartment system configuration

    • HELP_MAILBOXSYSTEM_CONFIGURATION

    The following settings are necessary to put a compartment system into operation: Add logistics unit (only for mailbox systems) In the module 'BV-District Management' the desired logistics unit is added at the corresponding address. A logistics unit is to be used exclusively for a P.O. box facility. No other persons or cost centres are to be assigned to this logistics unit. Also set the desired sorting information. Add a compartment system In the module 'Compartment systems configuration' a new compartment system is added...

  • Complaint

    • HELP_RM

    Now you can find the manual of this module online on our webserver. This has the advantage that we can incorporate additions and changes more quickly and easily. Link to the manual of your version (PDF file)...

  • Complaint Settings Locks

    • HELP_RM_SETUP_UNLOCKRM

    This settings dialog is used to unlock Locked complaints. The complaints are locked and unlocked by the user by the program and unlocked again. This is done automatically and the user does not have to take care of it. However, it can happen, however, that when the user is in edit mode, the program is terminated or closed improperly, for example. a lock remains active. This can usually be removed by the same removed by the same user on the same workstation, by processing the same complaint again and correctly closing the processing mode correctly. However, as soon as another user wants to process this complaint, this is not possible because the system considers the complaint to be locked by another user. by another user. This means that complaints can no longer be processed. can be processed. In order to prevent this case, this dialog has been implemented with which it is possible to remove such locks on the database. !!! Please note the following: Improper use of this function may cause the software can lead to misbehaviour of the software, mainly in such a way that a complaint that is unlocked is actually still being processed by a user. in processing. After that, other users could also use this claim and invalidate changes made by the first user, or lead to or lead to inconsistencies in the complaint data. You should therefore be be careful with unlocking complaints. View...

  • Confidential mailings IHS

    • HELP_CONFIDENTIAL_LEVEL_PROCESS

    CodX PostOffice supports the handling of confidential mail. Confidential mailings are: a) Items for which the corresponding keywords (e.g. confidential, personal, registered mail, etc.) are present in the recipient's address. are present. This option works for personal names, customer names, cost center names, and logistics units. Examples (the relevant components of the address are shown in italics): Confidential CodX Software AG Peter Meier Sinserstrasse 47 6330 Cham Switzerland CodX Software AG Personal Peter Meier Sinserstrasse 47 6330 Cham Switzerland b) Items where the recipient's name is written above the company name in the recipient's address. This option only works with personal names (recipient is a person)! Examples (the relevant components of the address are shown in italics):...

  • Confidentiality level Detail

    • HELP_CONFIDENTIAL_LEVEL_SETUP_DETAIL_DLG

    With this detail dialog, you can either enter a new confidentiality level or edit an existing confidentiality level. Data fields Name Each level of confidentiality is identified by a name Comment Comment on the level of confidentiality Master output The confidentiality level is used for the recording of consignments on the master service...

  • Configuration Synchronization

    • HELP_CXSYNC_CONFIG

    This help describes the configuration for data synchronization via CxSync-Gateway as well as the process flow of a synchronization. This configuration is used to the data synchronization between the PC program and the mobile devices (MDE with Windows Mobile 6.5) is configured. There is therefore no direct data communication from one MDE to another MDE device or from a or from a PC to a MDE device. Please note that the different modules must be licensed, otherwise the corresponding data will be ignored. the corresponding data will be ignored. The synchronization process always includes all data of all modules, which are able to exchange data via CxSync-Gateway. Each partner corresponds to an MDE device, but this application itself is a separate partner. Each partner is both data producer as well as data consumer. Access data per configuration CxSync-Gateway URL cxsynch.codx.ch Address of the CxSync-Gateway which is to be used for data synchronisation. should take place. If you operate the CxSync gateway yourself, you must enter the corresponding URL here. Port : 80 IP port of the Http connection MandateUnique identification of the own mandate. Create a new unique identifier for this configuration once unique identification for this configuration. Do not change this identification afterwards! Otherwise it has to be changed for all connected partners. must also be changed...

  • Configure reports

    • HELP_CXREPORT_SETUP

    In this module you can configure and manage the different reports of CodX PostOffice. and manage them. The reports are grouped by processes or topics to ensure clarity. Only the reports for which you have read (write) permissions are displayed. (write) rights. If you select a report, you will find a short help on the corresponding report in the Description area. Please pay particular attention to the data masters and filters used. These are important for understanding the report. You can find a list of all available reports in the index. With the corresponding rights (reports), which are configured which are configured via the access authorization, various functions are available. See also 'AdminDoc.pdf...

  • Connection settings

    • HELP_KO_SETUP_EDITKOPDLG

    The FTP/FTPS/SFTP servers must be directly accessible via the Internet or via "real" FTP/FTPS/SFTP proxies (no HTTP). The FTP/FTPS/SFTP proxies used must support logins of type UserID = userid@site or UserID = userid@site:port . Enter the following settings for both data input and data output: Username Username of the FTP/FTPS/SFTP account Password Password to the user name Server Name or IP number of the FTP/FTPS/SFTP server...

  • Copy delivery blocks

    • HELP_ABO_COPYDELIVERYBLOCK

    Select one or more desired subscriptions to transfer the current delivery block to them. Only subscriptions from the same person appear in the list. Any overlaps in the date ranges that could occur with existing locks are not cleaned up.

  • Copy power

    • HELP_TARIFMODELL_SETUP_LEISTUNG_COPY

    In this dialog, the validity area of the new service to be created is entered and, unless otherwise requested, the original service. Further a prefix must be selected, with which the new service and article description are provided (leading blanks are not considered). spaces are not taken into account). Finally, a desired VAT change can be set. Important Notice: The following must be observed and necessary adjustments must be carried out manually: The new benefit has no associated benefits...

  • Correct shipments without districts and without articles

    • HELP_SVSERVER_SETUP_BEZIRK_KORREKTUR_DETAIL_DLG

    In this dialog detailed filter settings can be made for shipments without district and without article (which are to be corrected). can be made. It is possible to limit the consignments to be corrected by the following filters: Filter attribute Filter attribute Description Description...

  • Courier order (you have mail statistics)

    • HELP_COURIERSYSTEM_ORDER_YHMSTATISTIC

    If you have a license for the module 'you have mail' module, this dialog will display all status changes of a courier order, plus the corresponding status and messages from you have mail'. If a message was sent using a template from 'you have mail', you can view this in a separate dialog. Operation The following buttons are available: Defer With this function you can reset the selected entry so that it will be processed again by the 'you have mail' module module and a message is sent for this status is Close Closes this dialog...

  • Courier orders

    • HELP_COURIERSYSTEM_ORDER

    This dialog is an overview of all existing courier jobs, cyclic courier orders and templates. Deleted courier jobs will no longer be no longer displayed in this list. Courier orders/cyclical Courier orders/templates can be entered, edited and deleted. Thanks to multiple selection in the overview several courier orders can be edited and/or deleted at the same time. The detail dialog of a courier job is opened in such a way that CodX Postoffice still remains operable. Thus, multiple courier jobs can be opened. Should CodX Postoffice be closed and and there are still courier jobs open, you will be asked if you want to save them. After that they will be closed. View The dialog shows a list with all entered courier orders. On the right side there are the buttons with the available functions. In the upper part are the filter settings to to filter the list of courier orders according to your own criteria. Operation Please note that a lock is used to edit and/or delete courier orders. That means, if another user other user edits or deletes a courier order, it is locked for all other users. In this case a message dialog appears that tells you whether a courier order is being processed or deleted. This also applies if several courier orders are processed or deleted at once. or deleted at once...

  • Courier system settings

    • HELP_COURIERSYSTEM_SETUP

    On this dialog you will find all the Custfields that are available for the are available for the Courier System module. View A list of all existing attributes is displayed for editing. The first column contains the name of the The second column contains the value of the attribute that can be edited. To edit a value click with the mouse on the corresponding column and change the value. Custfields courier system Designation (Custfieldname)...

  • Courier System Templates

    • HELP_COURIERSYSTEM_TEMPLATE

    This dialog is used to enter and select templates. templates. If a template has to be entered, the input line for the template name is active, otherwise this is is hidden and only a list with all available templates is visible. visible. View If the dialog for saving a template has been opened the input field for the name of the template is located in the upper part. of the template. Below this is a list of all existing templates. templates. On the right side there are the two buttons OK and Cancel. Operation To save a template, enter a name in the input line for the template name, enter a name which describes this template so that you can find it again later. You can also select select an existing template from the list to overwrite it. overwrite it...

  • CT - Advance directive - Undeliverability

    • HELP_KV_VORAUSVERFUEGUNG_UNZUSTELLBAR

    Variant By entering the variant, you define what should happen to an undeliverable shipment. For each variant, further attributes can be entered for each variant, which control the behavior of the undeliverable items in detail. In the case of "Undeliverable item handed over to yellow post", you can specify the rate at which this item will be charged, whether with the yellow post tariff or with your own tariff. For the advance directive "Return to sender" you can define whether a customer return label is to be printed and whether the forwarding address is to be is to be determined.

  • CT - Offer

    • HELP_KV_TAB_OFFERTE

    Now you can find the manual of this module online on our webserver. This has the advantage that we can incorporate additions and changes more quickly and easily. Link to the manual of your version (PDF file) Supplements to the manual...

  • Customer group

    • HELP_KV_SETUP_KUNDENGRUPPE

    Several customers can be combined into one customer can be grouped together. Such a customer group requires a unique name. One of the customer groups can be defined as the standard. Each newly entered customer is assigned to this assigned to this customer group. Register Billing services For each customer group a mapping from production services to billing services can be created for each customer group. Details can be found under Help in the tab...

  • Customer management

    • HELP_KV

    Now you can find the manual of this module online on our webserver. This has the advantage that we can incorporate additions and changes more quickly and easily. Link to the manual of your version (PDF file)...

  • Customer management - Collection - Collection calendar

    • HELP_KV_TAB_ABHOLKALENDER

    General The mail service provider collects the mail from the customer and brings it to the sorting centre. The collection usually takes place regularly. The collection rounds module now provides the user with an instrument to plan the collection tours of his customers and to give the collection driver a list of all list with all customers to be picked up. Regular pick-up tours, so-called standard pick-up tours, can be managed, can be managed, as well as short-term changes can be recorded. A server component generates the daily pick-up tour instances from the standard pick-up tours. pickup tour instances that can be found in the pickup calendar. In order to process pick-up tours, an FA license is is required. To edit pick-up tours here, a KV Pro license is required. is required. To use this module, you need the appropriate access rights. KV customer management / pick-up tour List...

  • Customer management - Collection - Location

    • HELP_KV_TAB_ORTE

    Here you can enter the collection locations for each cost centre, you can enter the locations for the collection.

  • Customer management - Pickup - Standard pickup tour

    • HELP_KV_TAB_STD_ABHOLTOUR

    General The mail service provider collects the mail from the customer and brings it to the sorting centre. The collection usually takes place regularly. The collection rounds module now provides the user with an instrument to plan the collection tours of his customers and to give the collection driver a list of all list with all customers to be picked up. Regular pick-up tours, so-called standard pick-up tours, can be managed, can be managed, as well as short-term changes can be recorded. A server component generates the daily pick-up tour instances from the standard pick-up tours. pickup tour instances that can be found in the pickup calendar. In order to process pick-up tours, an FA license is is required. To edit pick-up tours here, a KV Pro license is required. is required. To use this module, you need the appropriate access rights. KV customer management / pick-up tour In process...

  • Customer management Pickup calendar detail

    • HELP_KV_ABHOLKALENDER_DETAIL_DLG

    With this dialog you can create a pickup tour instance for the selected customer or edit it. If the dialog has been opened by"Add", the field for the name is a selection list with all standard pickup tours, which are valid for this day, as well as the entry <Special tour>. <Specialtour> is selected. To enter a special pickup tour, select <Special tour>, otherwise select the desired standard pick-up tour with which the customer is to be customer is to be approached. The time of collection can be defined. The employee who drives off on the tour (driver) can be be assigned. If you still have information about the collection, this can be entered under Comment can be entered...

  • Customer Management Standard Pickup Tour Detail

    • HELP_KV_STANDARD_ABHOLTOUR_DETAIL_DLG

    Here the location of the of the customer to be taken into account on the desired pick-up tour. The order of the pickup tour is determined on the basis of the "Time from". determined. Further you define on which days the collection should take place. If you still have information on the collection, this can be entered under Comment can be entered. Information The information shows who made the last change and when.

  • Customer price

    • HELP_KV_DIALOG_CUSTOMER_PRICE

    Article selection By selecting a service, the user restricts the display of articles. If no service is selected, all articles are articles are displayed. You can also select an article directly by selecting an entry with the mouse, or select the article selection list and enter a specific article number. and entering a specific article number. Quantity If there is no customer price for the selected article and the time range yet, this automatically receives the max quantity. This max quantity cannot be changed. If however for this article and time range already a customer price is created (max. quantity), then the quantity can be can be entered. If you want to change from a quantity scale "Valid from" the max value should be rescheduled first, only then the others. Price...

  • CustomerConfig

    • HELP_CONFIGSERVER_SETUP_CUSTOMER_CONFIG

    General The CustomerConfig replaces the Customer Setup customer setup. The CustomerConfig is structured in such a way that in the future all customer-specific extensions (reports, jobs, TrafoRules, scripts, AdminDoc, SysDoc etc.) can be distributed and installed. can be installed. To run the CustomerConfig, there are two jobs. 0008:0003 ConfigServer: Manual CustomerConfig Setup This job is started manually by selecting the desired installation file (CC.zip) is selected. 0008:0004 ConfigServer: Automatic CustomerConfig setup This job runs cyclically and fetches the installation file provided by the FTP server at CodX...

  • CxDataloggerViewer OnlineHelp

    • HELP_CXDATALOGGERVIEWER_HOME

    This description assumes a basic understanding of how the CxDataLogger and the associated viewer work. associated viewer. The CxDataLoggerViewer is a CxFrame independent application. The Viewer connects to the CxDataLogger via IP socket to the CxDataLogger. Several viewers can log on to the same server at the same time. Several instances of the instances of the Viewer can be running on the same computer. Viewer and server can run on any computer. By default, the IP port 6211 (6210 for the Windows service) is used. This can be changed in the Registry (Server) and on the UI (Viewer). The viewer connects to the server when it is started and disconnects when the server is stopped. when the server is stopped. The connection to the Viewer can be protected via CxSec. If the application CxSec protected (global flag in the CxF file), a user name and password must be specified. This user must be at least Read for the CxSec function "Data Logger Module" must have at least readonly rights. The user in the Viewer is independent of the user who is currently logged on to the application (server). The CxDataLoggerViewer registers (if the permissions are sufficient!) the three file extensions in the registry. Thus, the three file types can be loaded / displayed directly with a double click:...

  • CxDataloggerViewer OnlineHelp

    • HELP_CXDATALOGGERVIEWER_SHRINK

    Each executed CxFrame instance has exactly one log file (the file name contains the application ID). The log file is always in use and cannot be viewed directly. Each executed CxFrame instance can have exactly one LogArchive (the file name contains the application ID). Cyclically it is checked (at application start and then every 10h) if old messages (Registry: PurgeOlderThen [d]) must be deleted from the log file. The file is only reorganized(shrinked) if the log file would be reduced by at least 30%. Also the log file will be shrinked by 30% if it has reached its maximum size (Registry: MaxFileSize [MB, 0 = Maximum]). Reorganize:...

  • CxIO module detail

    • HELP_DISPLAYMODUL_SETUP_IOMODUL

    With this detail dialog you can see all information about a CxIO module and you can control the individual IOs. The dialog is updated several times per second, so that you can immediately detect changes in the input status. View The dialog displays a list showing all IOs available on the CxIO module. This can be a module with 21 or an extended CxIO module with 45 IOs. The list shows the number of the IO starting with 0 and the input and output status. output status are displayed. The output status can be opened or closed by clicking the activation box. Below the list is the status display. The status information available for the selected CXIO module is displayed in this field. Thereby technical information such as the software version, the existing hardware, the supply voltage and the supply voltage V+. The "Pulse" column contains a button for each IO, which can be used to is used to open the IO's by means of pulses. Operation...

  • CxLetterScan

    • HELP_CXLETTERSCAN_VIEW

    #CxLetterScanSpeedMode #CxLetterScanStatistics

    The CxLetterScan is a modular letter processing machine with the option of printing and sorting. This module is used to control and manage the machine and the various use cases. View The dialog of the module is divided into 5 elements, which control the machine and give detailed information about its status. These elements are described in more detail below: Use case The different operating cases of the machine and their settings are displayed here in a tab. The content of a so-called use case can in turn contain further tabs that group the various settings and defaults of an operating case. Please note that only the licensed use cases are visible. For each use case (except maintenance) there is a counting license, which is deducted when PostOffice is started with the CxLetterScan module. Control In this area of the dialog the actual machine is controlled, also the status information of the whole machine with which belt speed it runs is displayed...

  • CxLetterScan Camera Settings

    • HELP_CXLETTERSCAN_SETUP_CAMERA

    Here you will find all available settings for the camera module of the CxLetterScan. ATTENTION! These settings influence the correct function of the camera, the quality of the recorded images and the determination of the barcodes and texts from the images. The settings may therefore only be changed by administrators/experts! View A list with all available attributes for editing is displayed. In the first column is the name of the attribute, in the 2nd column is the value of the attribute, which can be edited. To edit a value click with the mouse on the corresponding column and change the value...

  • CxLetterScan end module settings

    • HELP_CXLETTERSCAN_SETUP_END

    Here you will find all available settings for the end module CxLetterScan. View A list of all existing attributes is displayed for editing. The first column contains the name of the The second column contains the value of the attribute that can be edited. To edit a value click with the mouse on the corresponding column and change the value. General settings Designation (Custfieldname)...

  • CxLetterScan General Settings

    • HELP_CXLETTERSCAN_SETUP_ALLGEMEIN

    Here you will find all available settings for the CxLetterScan module. These are the global settings that are valid for all modules. Among them are also the parameters for AutoSpeed (400 - 430), this is a function that is active under all use cases. With this the tape speed is controlled automatically, so that as few errors and timeouts as possible are triggered. The values are all given as a percentage, and the percentage range of the tape speed is always based on the set speed. This feature cannot be switched off. View A list with all available attributes for editing is displayed. In the first column is the name of the attribute, in the 2nd column is the value of the attribute, which can be edited. To edit a value click with the mouse on the corresponding column and change the value. General settings Designation (Custfieldname)...

  • CxLetterScan Maintenance

    • HELP_CXLETTERSCAN_MAINTENANCE

    The CxLetterScan Maintenance module shows you what maintenance work maintenance work is to be carried out on this system. If there are no maintenance tasks are listed, you must import them first. import them first.(see Import) In addition, the following is displayed: Total number of shipments: Total recorded shipments since start Total operating hours: Total hours of tape run since start List In a list all maintenance work are entered. The maintenance work is either dependent on the number of shipments recorded or the operating hours (type). With the icon in the list you can see quickly which maintenance is soon is due soon or has to be carried out immediately...

  • CxLetterScan Maintenance: Blow out deflection mirror

    • HELP_CXLETTERSCAN_MAINTENANCE_WIPE_MIRROR

    Carefully blow out the deflection mirror with compressed air.

  • CxLetterScan Maintenance: Cleaning the conveyor belt

    • HELP_CXLETTERSCAN_MAINTENANCE_CLEAN_TRANSPORT

    Clean the conveyor belt on the outside with a cleaning agent (roller cleaning agent) using a lint-free cloth. Remove tape abrasion and paper dust from the system. Use a vacuum cleaner.

  • CxLetterScan Maintenance: Cleaning the Deflection Mirror

    • HELP_CXLETTERSCAN_MAINTENANCE_CLEAN_MIRROR

    Carefully clean the deflection mirror with window cleaner and a lint-free cloth. CAUTION: Do not adjust the position of the deflecting mirror!

  • CxLetterScan Maintenance: Replacing the Separator Rubber

    • HELP_CXLETTERSCAN_MAINTENANCE_REPL_SEPARATOR

    Replace the separating rubber depending on the degree of wear. Always replace separating rubber and transparent plastic tongue! The separating rubber is removed by loosening the knurled screw on the side plate. When inserting, make sure that the transparent plastic tongue is inserted first!

  • CxLetterScan Maintenance: Replacing the transport roller rubber rings

    • HELP_CXLETTERSCAN_MAINTENANCE_REPL_TRANSPORT

    Replace all rubber rings of the transport rollers depending on the degree of wear. Always replace all rubber rings! The rubber rings can easily be pulled off or put on the transport rollers by hand.

  • CxLetterScan Module Configuration

    • HELP_CXLETTERSCAN_SETUP_CONTROL-UNIT

    This dialog contains all CxLetterScan CxLetterScan modules detected on the computer. View The dialog is filled out by a list that shows the the CxLetterScan modules connected to this computer. In the list, all information available for a module is displayed. available for a module. This includes the module type, the revision, the compartment number if it is a sort module, the technical device number the technical device number, the version of the firmware, the serial number of the serial number of the board installed in the machine, the manufacturer the manufacturer and the status of the board as well as to which virtual COM port the board is connected to. The last 3 columns inform about a possibly existing bootloader, its version and the address version and the address space in which the bootloader is present. This supports the update of the firmware via CodX PostOffice. The header of the list overview displays the currently installed version of the driver library is displayed. If the driver is not installed or is defective, this is indicated in this header. header. If an older driver is installed that CodX PostOffice does not support, this is also displayed in this header. header. On the right side you will find buttons with the available modules. If a module has an outdated firmware this module is deactivated and the machine cannot be started. be started. The entry on the list is displayed with a red background and white text color and is accompanied by a tooltip informing about the outdated firmware...

  • CxLetterScan print settings (print module)

    • HELP_CXLETTERSCAN_SETUP_PRINTER

    #CxLetterScanPrint #CxLetterScanPrintOffset #CxLetterScanPrintVerzatz #CxLetterScanSequenceNumber

    Here you will find all available settings for the print module of the CxLetterScan (#CxLetterScanPrint) Basic settings A list with all available attributes for editing is displayed. The first column contains the name of the attribute, the second column contains the value of the attribute which can be edited. To edit a value, click with the mouse on the corresponding column and change the value. General settings Designation...

  • CxLetterScan Sort Module Settings

    • HELP_CXLETTERSCAN_SETUP_SORT

    #CxLetterScan #CxLetterScanMaintenance

    Here you can find all available settings for the sort module #CxLetterScan. These are the global settings which are valid for all modules. View A list with all available attributes for editing is displayed. In the first column is the name of the attribute, in the 2nd column is the value of the attribute, which can be edited. To edit a value click with the mouse on the corresponding column and change the value. General settings Designation (Custfieldname)...

  • CxLetterScan Status

    • HELP_CXLETTERSCAN_VIEW_STATUS

    #CxLetterScanPrint #CxLetterScanFeeder

    This dialog, which is divided into tabs, contains the status displays for the entire machine and the individual connected modules. The status displays are visualized by means of an image in front of the corresponding status display. This indicates whether it is information, a warning or an error. View Machine Status: In the first display field, a short text about the current status is shown in a larger font. Below this is a display field with a detailed description of the current status, including the error number which can be looked up in the table below. This is followed by the two buttons for displaying the user log and for acknowledging an error which is valid for the entire machine. Module Status:...

  • CxLetterScan Use-Case Capture Settings Alternative Code

    • HELP_CXLETTERSCAN_CAPTURE_ALTERNATIVCODE

    The Use-Case Capture is used for the capture of shipments that go through the same process as MS-IHS. The settings of the use case are distributed over different tabs, to group them logically and to save space. This tab contains the settings for the alternative code. View In this view, you can see all the elements that belong to the the Alternative Code settings of the Capture use case. In the following is a description of the setting options. Please note that some elements are not visible if the corresponding prerequisites are not met. prerequisites are not fulfilled, for example, the selection of the selection of the print layout or the setting for an alternative print layout is not visible if no print module is available, or the IHS is available, or the IHS settings are not visible if the corresponding license is not available. The same applies to the settings which are specific for sort functions, these are only visible if a sort module is also connected. Operation If not readable If the atlernative code is not readable, you have the following options: Alternative code does not have to be determined can The shipment will still be processed. If alternative code cannot be determined: Stop The machine is stopped with the corresponding error If alternative code cannot be determined: eject into function tray 'no-alternative-code'. The consignment will still be processed, but it will be diverted to the corresponding function tray...

  • CxLetterScan Use-Case Capture Settings Cost Object

    • HELP_CXLETTERSCAN_CAPTURE_COSTUNIT

    The Use-Case Capture is used for the capture of shipments that go through the same process as MS-IHS. The settings of the use case are distributed over different tabs, to group them logically and to save space. This tab contains the settings for the cost object. View In this view, you can see all the elements that belong to the the Cost Object settings of the Capture use case. In the following is a description of the setting options. Please note that some elements are not visible if the corresponding prerequisites are not met. prerequisites are not fulfilled, for example, the selection of the selection of the print layout or the setting for an alternative print layout is not visible if no print module is available, or the IHS is available, or the IHS settings are not visible if the corresponding license is not available. The same applies to the settings which are specific for sort functions, these are only visible if a sort module is also connected. Operation Fixed cost object A predefined cost object is used for the imported shipments. shipments are used. You can specify the cost object using the search by customer/cost center or by searching for persons with assigned customers/cost centers. To do this button next to the information field for the information field for the fixed cost object...

  • CxLetterScan Use-Case Capture Settings General

    • HELP_CXLETTERSCAN_CAPTURE_ALLGEMEIN

    The Use-Case Capture is used for the capture of shipments that go through the same process as MS-IHS. The settings of the use case are distributed over different tabs, to group them logically and to save space. This tab contains the general settings. View In this view, you can see all the elements that belong to the the general settings of the Capture use case. In the following is a description of the setting options. Please please note that some elements are not visible if the corresponding prerequisites are not fulfilled, for example, the selection of the selection of the print layout or the setting for an alternative print layout is not visible in the case of read errors if no print module is is available, or the IHS settings are not visible if the corresponding license is not available. The same applies to the settings which are specific for sort functions, these are only visible if a sort module is also connected. Operation Image processingOn this tab the ImageParser rule which should be used for the scanning process. It only the ImageParser rules are listed, which are intended for the mode "Capture" mode. These rules can be set in the settings in the menu "Production" on the tab "ImageParser". can be adjusted...

  • CxLetterScan Use-Case Capture Settings Job ID

    • HELP_CXLETTERSCAN_CAPTURE_ORDERIDENTIFIER

    The Use-Case Capture is used for the capture of shipments that go through the same process as MS-IHS. The settings of the use case are distributed over different tabs, to group them logically and to save space. This tab contains the settings for the order identifier. View In this view, you can see all the elements that belong to the the settings Order ID of the use case Capture. In the following is a description of the setting options. Please please note that some elements are not visible if the corresponding prerequisites are not fulfilled, for example, the selection of the selection of the print layout or the setting for an alternative print layout is not visible in the case of read errors if no print module is is available, or the IHS settings are not visible if the corresponding license is not available. The same applies to the settings which are specific for sort functions, these are only visible if a sort module is also connected. Operation Fixed order identifier No order identifier is read from the letter, instead of this the order identifier is used, which can be entered in the adjacent input field next to it...

  • CxLetterScan Use-Case Capture Settings Miscellaneous

    • HELP_CXLETTERSCAN_CAPTURE_DIVERSE

    The Use-Case Capture is used for the capture of shipments that go through the same process as MS-IHS. The settings of the use case are distributed over different tabs, to group them logically and to save space. This tab contains the various settings. View In this view, you can see all the elements that belong to the the various settings of the Capture use case. In the following is a description of the setting options. Please please note that some elements are not visible if the corresponding prerequisites are not fulfilled, for example, the selection of the selection of the print layout or the setting for an alternative print layout is not visible in the case of read errors if no print module is is available, or the IHS settings are not visible if the corresponding license is not available. Operation County structure Select a carrier route structure here, which is used to determine the a district on the basis of the address read from the transmission. from the address read...

  • CxLetterScan Use-Case Capture Settings Receiver

    • HELP_CXLETTERSCAN_CAPTURE_RECEIVER

    The Use-Case Capture is used for the capture of shipments that go through the same process as MS-IHS. The settings of the use case are distributed over different tabs, to group them logically and to save space. This tab contains the settings for the recipient. View In this view, you can see all the elements that belong to the the Receiver settings of the Capture use case. In the following is a description of the setting options. Please note that some elements are not visible if the corresponding prerequisites are not met. prerequisites are not fulfilled, for example, the selection of the selection of the print layout or the setting for an alternative print layout is not visible if no print module is available, or the IHS is available, or the IHS settings are not visible if the corresponding license is not available. The same applies to the settings which are specific for sort functions, these are only visible if a sort module is also connected. Operation If not readable If the recipient's address is not legible, you have the following options: Recipient must not be identifiable The consignment is nevertheless processed further. If recipient cannot be determined: Stop The machine is stopped with the corresponding error If receiver cannot be determined: eject into function compartment 'No-Receiver'. The transmission will still be processed, but it will be ejected into the ejected into the corresponding function tray...

  • CxLetterScan Use-Case Sort

    • HELP_CXLETTERSCAN_USECASE_SORT

    The use case Sort is used to sort shipments that have already been entered (stored in the database). This use case is only available if a corresponding license and at least one sort module is available. Sequence/Process: The consignment UPOC and, if applicable, the alternative code of the consignment is read (via selected image processing / image parser). With the read UPOC/alternate code the consignment is searched in the database, the stored consignment data is loaded The compartment for the consignment is determined with the consignment data and the set sorting plan. The shipment is discharged into the found compartment The shipment will NOT be saved again The consignment UPOC and, if applicable, the alternative code of the consignment is read (via selected image processing / image parser). With the read UPOC/alternate code the consignment is searched in the database, the stored consignment data is loaded...

  • CxReport Designer

    • HELP_CXREPORT_CXREPORTING_DESIGNER

    CxReport Viewer is the report viewer integrated in CodX PostOffice. CodX PostOffice Report elements In the Report Designer, a report is created from controls (text labels, images, zip codes, charts, etc.) distributed across report sections called bands (various headers, footers, and content sections). Report controls...

  • CxReport viewer

    • HELP_CXREPORT_CXREPORTING_VIEWER

    CxReport Viewer is the report viewer integrated in CodX PostOffice. CodX PostOffice Menu bar File Command...

  • CxSync

    • HELP_Mobile_CxSync

    Notice: To use this app you need basic knowledge of Windows Mobile 6.5 operation (buttons, input fields, (context) menus, lists, ...). This is not the content of this online help. Content Licenses and user rights Launch App / Log In...

  • Cyclic article detail

    • HELP_TM_SETUP_ZA_DLG

    The following descriptions apply to both ZAA and ZAR. The ZAA are used for the order run and the ZAR for the invoice run. Specific differences are pointed out. Select the service and then the article which is to be charged in the defined cycle. You can select all services / articles that are not shipment-related. A program code is stored for the calculation of the cycle. If a customer has defined a quantity script for a cyclical article (ZAA), the program code of this cyclical article is started with each order run. article is started. If the program code returns the value fExecute = TRUE, an order item is created with the corresponding cyclical article and the defined quantity (quantity script). the defined quantity (quantity script). (The same applies to ZAR during the invoice run). However, other parameters of the order or invoice item can also be changed, such as dblQuantity, dblDiscount, curPrice, strArtikelBez, strLeistungBez, strBem, lFAUnitsID and dtAuftrag. That the price is taken over from the script, this must be greater than '0'. If the quantity is already determined in the cycle script (dblQuantity <> 0), the quantity script is no longer called, but the order item is created directly with the corresponding quantity. order item is created directly with the corresponding quantity. If the quantity script results in the quantity '0', no order item is created. With ZAR it behaves a little differently. If the quantity script shows the quantity '0', an invoice item with the quantity '0' is created...

  • Cyclic articles

    • HELP_FA_SETUP_ZA

    Now you can find the manual of this module online on our webserver. This has the advantage that we can incorporate additions and changes more quickly and easily. Link to the manual of your version (PDF file)...

  • Data collection

    • HELP_MDEApp_Courier_FormAppInfo

  • Data collection

    • HELP_MDEApp_Courier_FormCallAddress

  • Data collection

    • HELP_MDEApp_Courier_FormCourierOrderDetail

  • Data collection

    • HELP_MDEApp_Courier_FormCourierOrderEdit

  • Data collection

    • HELP_MDEApp_Courier_FormCourierOrderList

  • Data collection

    • HELP_MDEApp_Courier_FormCourierStopDetail

  • Data collection

    • HELP_MDEApp_Courier_FormCourierStopEdit

  • Data collection

    • HELP_MDEApp_Courier_FormSignature

  • Data collection

    • HELP_MDEApp_Courier_FormStopMultiSelect

  • Data collection

    • HELP_MDEApp_Zustellung_FormAppInfo

  • Data collection

    • HELP_MDEApp_Zustellung_FormDataEntry

  • Data collection

    • HELP_MDEApp_Zustellung_FormEntityEntry

  • Data collection

    • HELP_MDEApp_Zustellung_FormEventInfo

  • Data collection

    • HELP_MDEApp_Zustellung_FormFilter

  • Data collection

    • HELP_MDEApp_Zustellung_FormSelectParam

  • Data collection

    • HELP_MDEApp_Zustellung_FormSendungDetail

  • Data collection

    • HELP_MDEApp_Zustellung_FormSignature

  • Data collection

    • HELP_MDEApp_Zustellung_FormSignatureDetail

  • Data collection

    • HELP_MDEApp_Zustellung_FormSignatureMulti

  • Data Terminal (mobile)

    • HELP_DTM

    Now you can find the manual of this module online on our webserver. This has the advantage that we can incorporate additions and changes more quickly and easily. Link to the manual of your version (PDF file)...

  • Data Terminal (stationary)

    • HELP_DTS_OLD

    Now you can find the manual of this module online on our webserver. This has the advantage that we can incorporate additions and changes more quickly and easily. Link to the manual of your version (PDF file)...

  • Definition of audit

    • HELP_BILL_WARNINGDLG

    In order to minimize the workload of invoice verification, CodX PostOffice offers the possibility to perform plausibility tests per invoice at the end of the plausibility tests per invoice after the invoice has been created. What should be checked can be defined, both in general and per customer. as well as per customer. The settings on the customer are prioritized. Different plausibility test Positions with amount = 0. The invoice receives a warning entry (no. 6) if there are invoice items with amount = 0. General warning...

  • Definition SIx

    • HELP_BV_SETUP_SIXDEF_DETAIL_DLG

    #Q #S

    SIx is a text composed of several individual sorting information and is printed on shipments (label) to sort them quickly and easily. sort them quickly and easily. The SIx is calculated with the help of a formula (SIx definition). The SIx definition is made per service provider. Thus, cooperation partners can mutually use the corresponding format. The SIx definition can contain placeholders and fixed, static text. Placeholder Content / Attribute / Sort Info...

  • Delivery calendar

    • HELP_BV_SETUP_DELIVERYCALENDAR

    CodX PostOffice calculates delivery calendars based on various delivery calendars based on various strategies. The delivery calendars determine on which on which calendar days a delivery is made for certain units. will be delivered. The delivery calendar is calculated for a certain time in advance. calculated in advance. In CodX PostOffice, any number of delivery calendars can be can be set up if the appropriate license is available. Otherwise, only one delivery calendar is used. The individual district structures, district groups, depots, districts and house (area) can be assigned a home delivery calendar. If a unit is not assigned a carrier calendar, the system automatically uses the home delivery calendar of the next highest unit is automatically used. If the securities account a home delivery calendar is assigned to the depot, this calendar has priority over the carrier route group. The carrier route structure must have a must be assigned to the carrier route structure. A home delivery calendar has various strategies for how the home delivery calendar is calculated. There are fixed strategies and freely programmable strategies. The delivery days are recalculated by a job, every time either a district, district group, district structure or depot is changed or newly entered, or when a delivery delivery calendar assigned to an entity is changed. is changed. Similarly, all delivery days are recalculated if the midnight of the planned delivery date, i.e. the changeover hour and/or changeover minute is changed. The delivery days are calculated a certain number of days in the past and in the future. in the past and into the future. The setting of these forward and backward days are set in the following Custfields...

  • Delivery calendar according to weekdays

    • HELP_BV_SETUP_DELIVERYCALENDAR_WEEKLY

    The weekdays (Mon. to Sun.) on which delivery is to take place are set. Sun.) a home delivery is to be made. The delivery calendar is calculated the set weekdays and the public holiday calendar. View This dialog contains the attributes, which a home delivery calendar requires according to weekdays. On the right side are the function buttons. Operation Input fields...

  • Delivery calendar in cycle

    • HELP_BV_SETUP_DELIVERYCALENDAR_CYCLIC

    The cycle in which delivery is made is set taking into account weekdays and the public holiday calendar. holiday calendar. For example, if the cycle is set to 2 days without weekends is set, the following home delivery calendar is calculated: Mon, Wed, Fri, Tue, Thu, Mon, Wed, Fri etc. The start date for the calculation of the home delivery calendar can be be specified. You can also specify how public holidays are to be handled. should be handled. The following variants are available: bring forward the delivery date Delivery day after the holiday Delivery fails Deliver anyway bring forward the delivery date Delivery day after the holiday Delivery fails...

  • Delivery calendar programming

    • HELP_BV_SETUP_DELIVERYCALENDAR_PROGRAMMING

    A script can be stored, which calculates the delivery days. delivery days. With this script every delivery calendar can be which follows a logical description. The scripts are usually created by CodX software. Scripts can only be used if the corresponding license is available. View On this dialog are the attributes, which a delivery calendar programming requires. On the right side are the function buttons. Operation Input fields...

  • Delivery guarantee for courier URGENT documents and goods

    • HELP_DIEPOST_POSTPAC_INTERNATIONAL_ZUSTELLGARANTIE

    The following delivery guarantees are available: Delivery until 9 am Delivery until 12 o'clock

  • Depot detail

    • HELP_BV_TAB_DEPOTDETAILDLG_ALLGEMEIN

    Here you can create a new securities account or edit an existing one. Data Depot designation Name of the securities account. Job Workplace of the depot. Transhipment point The setting for the transshipment point can be changed. You can find it under Settings - Logistics - District management - Tab 'General'.

  • Deputy

    • HELP_PV_DEPUTY

    On this tab "Substitutes" all substitutes for the person displayed in the current main dialog are managed. It can enter any number of deputies for different services. A deputy for one or more services is always entered for a defined period. for a defined period of time. Overlaps and recursions are not checked during entry, so it is the responsibility of the user to maintain them correctly. to maintain them correctly. Substitutes can be imported with the "Standard person import", this is a complete import, previously imported substitutes are replaced. previously imported substitutes will be replaced. Not affected are the substitutes that were entered manually. Currently valid deputy The modules that support deputies, determine the current proxy. There is only one valid proxy at a time. For the determination of the current deputy the following criteria apply: (and in this order) 1: If an assignment exists for the corresponding service for the current date, it is taken over. for the current date exists for the corresponding service, this is transferred...

  • Description of the printer variables

    • HELP_DIRECTPRINT_PRINTVARIABLES

    The print varibals that can be used in the table layouts are described below. Depending you can use different variables depending on the label type. are shown grouped together. Shipment label for CxReport printer Standard or customer-specific shipment labels, which are implemented as CxReport, support a wealth of additional print variables. print variables. New labels should use this technology if possible. Variable Content/Description...

  • Detail image

    • HELP_CXIMAGEVIEW

    You can enlarge the image, zoom (with the toolbar, context menu (+,-), with mouse click (with or without the Shift key) or with the mouse wheel). You canrotatethe imageby 90 degrees, display it in its original size, export it or display it in an external image program. external image program. Notice: None of this has any effect on the saved image!

  • Details

    • HELP_UPOCCENTER_DETAILS_DLG

    You can lock, unlock or reassign the selected UPOCS's. You can also store a target quantity (minimum quantity) of UPOC's for your customers. (Customer management, master data, target quantity, in number or percentage.) Then they get a message when this value is reached.

  • Details of <license>

    • HELP_CXLIC_DETAIL

    The Details functions is not used in this product. This window does not display any data.

  • Determination of receiver in MS/OS-IHS

    • HELP_IHS_CAPTURE

    #MS-IHS #OS-IHS #IHS

    When capturing mailings in-house, the correct recipient must be identified or selected on the basis of a few partially incorrect or incomplete entries. In CodX PostOffice, the entry or reading of the address is done using the modules #MS-IHS or #OS-IHS. The individual steps for identifying the correct receiver are described here. The operation of the two modules MS-IHS and OS-IHS is described in the corresponding online help. Loading the IHS cache The #IHS cache is an internal memory which stores all receiver data. The recipient data is divided into so-called keywords. Keywords are single words that appear in names, first names, department names, and so on. The keywords are stored in a huge list together with other information. The IHS cache is loaded when CodX PostOfffice is started and can take a few minutes depending on the size of the database...

  • DHL-Express price determination

    • HELP_KEP_ERROR_DHLEXPRESS_GETPRICE

    No. Error text Cause/Remedy No. Error text Cause/Remedy 410301 Products not available between this origin and destination (network segment) The selected service is not available for delivery with the entered shipment data (additional service / weight / dimensions / ...). from the sender to the recipient. 420506 Postcode not found. Expected formats: <country specific post code format>. Invalid zip code. Ex: For the recipient country Israel, the postal code must have 7 digits. See postal routing systems 420000 Data error General data error, see other error numbers for specific error. 220001 Failure - request General data error, see other error numbers for specific error. DCT_GENERIC_ERR_001 DCT exception while processing shipmet. Please contact help desk. Error of the web service. Contact DHL Express Support...

  • DHLP Shipment Handling' extended shipment attribute

    • HELP_SBB_CF_DHLP_SHIPMENT_HANDLING

    CEP service provider Allowed values Comment DHL parcel Remove content, return box Remove content, return box Remove content, pick up and dispose cardboard packaging Remove content, pick up and dispose of cardboard packaging Handover parcel/box to customer, no disposal of cardboard/box Handover parcel/box to customer - no disposal of cardboard/box Remove bag from cooling unit and handover to customer Remove bag from cooling unit and handover to customer (only for frozen/deep-frozen products) Remove content, apply return label and seal box, return box Remove contents, apply return label and seal box, return box...

  • DIE POST - Customer data

    • HELP_DIEPOST_SETUP_CUSTOMER_DATA

    #DIE-POST

    The customer data contains all relevant data / settings for the sender, sender / invoice recipient, franking licences and DataTransfer. These can be defined per production location and / or customer. (#DIE-POST) In most cases, data is maintained per production site. Data to customers has priority over the production site data and applies to the respective customer including its cost centers. This means that different data can be stored, for example, if items are entered for other companies. This is usually the case when postal services are performed for other companies. Only existing data can be changed in this listing. New installations are possible via the respective production site / customer. See also: In the AdminDok under DIE POST: How to set up the DIE POST module

  • DIE POST - Customer data details

    • HELP_DIEPOST_SETUP_CUSTOMER_DATA_DETAIL

    #DIE-POST

    The customer data contains all relevant data / settings for the sender, sender / invoice recipient, franking licences and DataTransfer. These can be defined per production location and / or customer. (#DIE-POST) DT = This information must only be provided if the electronic interface DataTransfer to DIE POST is used. Domicile post officeEnter the postcode and town of your domicile post office here. The value will be printed on the labels.This is where any returns are forwarded, for example, if no additional sender information is available.If you are unsure, please contact your customer advisor at DIE POST. DIE POST Sender address 1-4In these fields, specify the sender of the items. These values are used for the documents without DataTransfer and the replacement documents...

  • DIE POST - Product Details

    • HELP_DIEPOST_SETUP_PRODUCT_DETAIL

    #DIE-POST

    The following information about a product can be entered or edited in this dialog: (#DIE-POST) Power Select the service to be defined. Product group Select the product group that applies to the service you want to define. The product group influences the layout of the label. Code Code for generating the additional service barcode on the label. Product identifier Abbreviation for label printing...

  • DIE POST - Product group allocation

    • HELP_DIEPOST_SETUP_PRODUCTGROUP_ASSIGNMENT

    #DIE-POST

    In this register the assignments of DIE POST customer data to a product group and the corresponding license are managed. license are managed. (#DIE-POST) See also: In the AdminDok under DIE POST: How to set up the DIE POST module

  • DIE POST - Product group allocation details

    • HELP_DIEPOST_SETUP_PRODUCTGROUP_ASSIGNMENT_DETAIL

    #DIE-POST

    In this dialog, the following information about a license can be entered or edited: (#DIE-POST) THE POST Customer Select a location/customer from the selection you previously entered in the Customer Data tab. For each location, a link to each existing product group must be created. Otherwise the export cannot be executed. be executed. Product group Select a product group from the selection you previously entered in the Product Groups tab. License Enter the license number you received from DIE POST. See also:...

  • DIE POST - Product group details

    • HELP_DIEPOST_SETUP_PRODUCTGROUP_DETAIL

    #DIE-POST

    In this dialog the following information for a product group can be entered or edited: (#DIE-POST) Provider IDThis serves as information for the interface Track & Trace DataTransfer and defines the ID of the product group.The definition for this comes from DIE POST. Service typeSpecifies the interface for which the shipment is considered. DesignationThe name of the product group can be freely chosen. CommentThe remark can be chosen freely...

  • DIE POST - Product groups

    • HELP_DIEPOST_SETUP_PRODUCTGROUP

    #DIE-POST

    Here, the product groups are defined, which can then be linked to the services in CodX PostOffice can be linked. (#DIE-POST) See also: In the AdminDok under DIE POST: How to set up the DIE POST module

  • DIE POST items for the blind (CEC)

    • HELP_DIEPOST_LEISTUNG_CEC

    Items for the blind, known as cécogrammes, are postal items addressed to or posted by either blind persons or institutions for the blind. Cécogrammes must be marked "Blindensendung". Swiss Post carries items marked accordingly free of charge up to 7 kg. If you select this additional service, a selection dialog opens when you save the shipment, in which you can determine the services to be charged. services to be charged. You can find more information here: THE POST Special mailings

  • DIE POST Military Mail (MIL)

    • HELP_DIEPOST_LEISTUNG_MIL

    Special provisions apply to items sent to and from members of the armed forces and armed forces command posts with regard to postage paid, addressing and formal requirements. If you select this additional service, a selection dialog opens when you save the shipment, in which you can determine the services to be charged. services to be charged. You can find more information here: THE POST Special mailings DIE POST Military postage paid...

  • DIE POST Surcharge for manually created consignment note

    • HELP_DIEPOST_POSTPAC_INTERNATIONAL_MANUELL_FRACHTBRIEF

    For PostPac International consignments that you send with a manually with a manually created consignment note, we charge CHF 3.00.

  • Digitisation Allocation of services

    • HELP_DIGITALISIERUNG_SETUP_ASSIGMENT

    The actual assignment is made in this detail dialog. For this purpose, the details are entered and select at least one or more of the available services. from the existing services. Please note that duplicates cannot be entered, identical assignments that do not differ in any way will not be allowed. are not permitted. On the other hand, several assignments can be entered for the same or identical services, if these are different. due to the validity date, and/or the physical delivery delivery and/or notification. All data must be correctly entered and selected in order to be able to save an assignment, i.e. at least one service must be selected. that is, at least one service must have been selected. The validity date must be correct, i.e. Valid from must be from must be less than Valid to. Currently valid digitization allocation There is only one valid allocation per day and service. For the determination of the current allocation the following criteria apply: (and in this order) 1: If an assignment exists for the corresponding service for the current date, it is taken over. for the current date exists for the corresponding service, this is transferred. 2. if this is not the case, the assignment will be is transferred with the <All services> service for the current date...

  • Digitisation Allocation of services

    • HELP_FOLLOWEDUPPROCESS_CAPTURE_SETUP_ASSIGMENT

    The actual assignment is made in this detail dialog. For this purpose, the details are entered and select at least one or more of the available services. from the existing services. Please note that duplicates cannot be entered, identical assignments that do not differ in any way will not be allowed. are not permitted. On the other hand, several assignments can be entered for the same or identical services, if these differ due to the validity date. All data must be correctly entered and selected in order to be able to save an assignment, i.e. at least one service must be selected. i.e. at least one service must have been selected. The validity date must be correct, i.e. Valid from must be from must be less than Valid to. Currently valid subsequent process Shipment entry IHS assignment There is only one valid allocation per day and service. For the determination of the current allocation the following criteria apply: (and in this order) 1: If an assignment exists for the corresponding service for the current date, it is taken over. for the current date exists for the corresponding service, this is transferred. 2. if this is not the case, the assignment will be is transferred with the <All services> service for the current date...

  • Digitization

    • HELP_DIGITAL_DIGITAZION

    In this dialogue, consignments can be digitised indirectly. This means that existing consignments are scanned again and prepared for the subsequent digitisation process with the digitisation consignment event. The prerequisite is that a consignment has already been correctly entered in the system. The consignment UPOC can either be entered via the keyboard, scanned using a hand scanner or printed on one of the documents to be scanned. After successful scanning of the documents, the recognized elements on the letter can be processed in a list if a mandatory or optional attribute is missing or invalid (e.g. invalid consignment UPOC). The selection of image processing can be used to control which elements (e.g. consignment UPOC, alternative code, etc.) are to be recognised on the consignment. In addition, sub-labels for consignments can be printed in this dialogue. View At the first position of the dialog is the input line for the consignment UPOC. This is followed by the scan dialog with the list of the determined attributes on the scanned documents. At the last position of the dialog is a status line, which displays information about the running process or errors during the digitization. Next to the input line for the shipment UPOC are the three buttons for the modes scan, label print or exception processing. Operation Consignment UPOC If you want to assign the documents scanned in below to a consignment, enter the consignment UPOC here or read it in using a hand scanner. If the consignment UPOC is available on the document to be scanned, you do not need to do anything else, it will be recognised automatically...

  • Digitization Allocation

    • HELP_DIGITALISIERUNG_SETUP

    With this dialog, which is used in several modules, it is possible to assign modules, it is possible to assign services to the underlying entity. underlying entity. This means that if the dialog is in the person management, the assignment of services for the selected person for the selected person, the same when the dialog is on the customer/cost center management, the assignment is made for the selected cost center or selected cost center or customer. The assignments can be made for different services and they can be time limited. As additional criteria for the activity assignment can be the physical delivery and the notification can be set. These settings also control the delivery and the template of the you have mail of type 'Shipment notification for digital shipment'. View The dialog is filled by a list with the recorded assignments to the underlying entity. The entries are displayed in such a way displayed in such a way that for each assignment with all services defined for it with the same valid-to date, the same physical delivery and the same notification. delivery and the same notification are displayed in the list. The services are displayed in the "Service(s)" column separated by semicolons. On the right side of the list are the buttons with the available functions. Operation Add A new assignment is created. A new detail dialog is opened for this purpose...

  • Digitization Allocation

    • HELP_FOLLOWEDUPPROCESS_CAPTURE_SETUP

    With this dialog, which is used in several modules, it is possible to assign modules, it is possible to assign services to the underlying entity. underlying entity. This means that if the dialog is in the person management, the assignment of services for the selected person for the selected person, the same when the dialog is on the customer/cost center management, the assignment is made for the selected cost center or selected cost center or customer. The assignments can be made for different services and they can be time limited. IHS shipments to persons or customers/cost centers for which a subsequent process Shipment entry IHS is defined are routed to the logistics unit for temporary storage (or its district) when they are entry in the MS/OS-IHS modules, they are routed to the logistics unit for temporary storage of shipments (or their carrier route). The definition of this logistics unit is made in the Global Settings Sorting Systems (Settings / Production / Workstations / Global settings). View The dialog is filled by a list with the recorded assignments to the underlying entity. The entries are displayed in such a way that one entry is displayed in the list for each assignment with all the services defined for it. with the same valid-to date are displayed in the list. The services are displayed in the "Service(s)" column separated by semicolons. The buttons with the available functions are located on the right side of the list. Operation...

  • Digitization follow-up process

    • HELP_SV_FOLGEPROZESS

    After the digitization of a shipment, the subsequent process determines the further course of the shipment. Currently the processes of delivery, destruction and archiving are supported. Follow-up process delivery In the subsequent delivery process, the item is forwarded to the normal delivery process. The shipment label contains the SortInfos for the routing of the delivery. Thereby all variants and options of the delivery are available (e.g. handover documentation, delivery to P.O. box, deputization, etc.). In the case of direct digitization, the sorting information for routing is routing are applied directly during capture. In the case of indirect digitisation, these are applied with an additional additional consignment label during the the scanning process. Follow-up process Destruction During the destruction process, the shipment label contains a unique and unmistakable indicator for the destruction. This prevents incorrect consignments from being destroyed or entering the wrong process. In the simplest case, the shipment is simply fed into the shredder and the process is completed. CodX PostOffice is able to document the destruction correctly. document the destruction. In this case the item is digitized with a handheld scanner or a mobile computer hand scanner or a mobile computerDigitization Inbox with CodX PostOffice (MDE). This documents the time and the employee responsible for the destruction. destruction are documented. Subsequent process archiving The consignment label for archiving contains the routing routing information for the archive and a unique indicator for archiving. If the physical shipment is is archived, it can optionally be marked with scanner or MDE to identify the time and the person responsible for the and the employee responsible for archiving. document. Individual follow-up process With the individual follow-up process, the recipient can specify for each individual individual shipment how the follow-up process should be. If the recipient wants to define the follow-up process for each individual individual, he will receive an email after scanning the shipment. email after scanning the shipment. This email contains, in addition to various shipment information and optionally the contents of the shipment and the selection of the subsequent (delivery, destruction, archiving). The selection is available as a web link to the web interface of CodX PostOffice web interface. If the recipient clicks on one of the links, the corresponding follow-up process is selected...

  • Digitization process

    • HELP_DIGITAL_PROCESS

    The following is a visual representation of how the process of digitization takes place. There are two different process flows, depending on the selection made in the digitization dialog was made: Process Scanning Process Follow-up process...

  • Digitization Scan Dialog

    • HELP_DIGITAL_PHOTODLG

    In this detail dialog documents are scanned. Depending on the application, the scanner starts automatically or has to be started by means of the button "Scan". The inner dialog is described in the Chapter Scanning Documents in more detail. View All visible elements belong to the detail dialog Scanning documents, the button "Close" on the right side closes the whole dialog. entire dialog.

  • Digitization with individual follow-up process

    • HELP_DIGITAL_INDIVIDUAL

    The recipient can use the digitization (individual) as well as in the case of the IHS consignment entry himself. He receives an email after the digitization or the capture of the consignment an eMail. This mail contains a selection for the subsequent processes. Digitization: Delivery, destruction and archiving. Mail capture: delivery, destruction, archiving, delivery to deputy, return to sender and to deputy, return to sender and digitization. The selection is available as a web link. If the recipient clicks the recipient clicks on one of the links, the corresponding follow-up process is initiated. In response, an HTML page is displayed to him, which has been supplemented with the corresponding shipment information is displayed. Any errors that occur are are also output. Under "Program Files (x86)\CodX PostOffice\ " you will find the 14 sample files. All possible variables are listed are listed. For each subsequent process there are two files. Those with -NOK contain in each case still another variable for the error message. IMPORTANT: The file names must not be changed. AcknowledgementOfReceiptOK.html...

  • Direct digitization

    • HELP_DIGITALIZATION_DIRECT

    With direct digitization, the content of a shipment is recorded directly when the shipment is captured with a document scanner or camera and saved as a PDF file for the shipment. or a camera and saved as a PDF file for the shipment. This function is available in all capture modules. License The function requires a "CodX PostOffice Digitization" license. If this is not available, the scanner icon is not displayed. displayed. Inbox (MS/OS-IHS) Digitizing items in your inbox saves you valuable delivery time. At the same time, the opening rules are always adhered to in accordance with the recipient's specifications. CodX PostOffice offers the simple digitization of items in the inbox, completely integrated into the overall process...

  • Directprint Label Definition Detail

    • HELP_LABELDEF_DETAILDLG

    Here the settings for an element of the label definition are displayed/set. Depending on which printer has been selected, other types are available. Please note that if the address label or the return label has been changed, then use the function Update label layout" function in the "Label printer" menu. menu. This is necessary because these two label layouts are stored directly directly on the printer and only variable contents are sent to the printer. are sent to the printer. If this is not done, the layout no longer matches the transmitted variable contents. with the transmitted variable contents. Explanation of the fields Designation A descriptive name of the element. Type...

  • Dispatch courier orders

    • HELP_COURIERSYSTEM_DISPO

    This dialog is used to schedule courier orders. Dispatch means to assign a courier order to a driver. In addition the courier orders which are not yet planned are indicated. This list can be worked off as long as it is empty. It can be single or several courier orders can be scheduled, as well as scheduled courier orders can be reset. A double click on an entry in the list "Not scheduled courier orders" as well as in the list "Scheduled courier orders" opens the correspondingly marked courier order for editing. selected courier order for editing. Courier orders which were created automatically from a template will be displayed after the no longer deleted during recalculation. View The dialog for scheduling courier orders is divided into 3 screen halves. The division is done by means of a separator bar, which can be moved up and down to enlarge or reduce the three halves of the screen. The divider bar is shown as a grey line. All 3 parts have their own filter functions, with which the content of the respective list can be filtered. list can be filtered. In the upper part of both lists with courier orders there is the filter settings, with which the display of the courier orders can be restricted. The first part contains the list with all courier orders not yet scheduled courier orders. In the middle part you will find the list with all courier drivers. The column "Courier orders today" shows all courier orders of this driver. of this driver, for which the first stop lies in the current day and which are not marked as deleted...

  • Display module detail

    • HELP_DISPLAYMODUL_SETUP_DETAIL

    This detail dialog shows all properties and information available for the selected display module. The status display at the beginning of the dialog as well as the availability of the functions varies depending on the display module type. These differ whether a normal display module was selected, or whether it is the broadcast display module. All changes made with the button Update button are immediately sent to the corresponding display module. The displayed settings are divided into several groups which belong together in terms of their properties. Default values of a display module are: Green light on only, no backlight, and contrast set to 30. The text is set to. CodX Display Module [No]. View The dialog contains all properties of a display module. The possible functions are displayed with buttons. If the Broadcast display module has been selected, a warning is displayed in the heading. The Address input field and the "New" button are then activated, whereas they are deactivated for the other display modules. Operation...

  • District administration - area

    • HELP_BV_ALIAS

    In the BV module of CodX PostOffice you have the possibility to maintain aliases for countries, localities, streets and logistics units (IHS only). Alias are used to store different spellings or additional names, which can be used accordingly during capture and processing. However, in order for this to function properly, various points must be taken into account when maintaining the alias. CAUTION: If incorrect or inaccurate aliases are entered, this can lead to problems when capturing items with sorting machines or at the manual capture stations. In addition, a large number of aliases can significantly impair the capture performance. CAUTION: General guidelines Please follow these guidelines for all types of aliases in county government:...

  • District administration - delivery organization

    • HELP_BV_TAB_ZUSTELLORGANISATIONDLG

    On this tab you manage the home delivery organizations. View At the top of the detail dialog you will find a search function to filter the list of delivery organizations. Below this is the list of all existing or found delivery delivery organizations found. On the right side there are buttons with the available functions. At the top all the home delivery organizations are always displayed. Operation If you would like to filter the list of delivery organizations the list of delivery organizations, enter a single search term in the "Search for" line. search term. In a search term you can work with wildcards in a search term by using the ? character. Then press the button "Search" to trigger the search function. All delivery organizations found are displayed in the list...

  • District administration - delivery route planning

    • HELP_BV_TAB_AUSLIEFERTOURDLG

    On this tab, you can manage the delivery routes manage. View The main part of the screen is taken up by the list with a tree structure, in which all the available delivery routes are listed. Each delivery route group is the top element of a tree, and below it are the the delivery routes, if they exist. On the right-hand side are are the buttons with the available functions. Operation The following functions are available:...

  • District administration - depot

    • HELP_BV_TAB_DEPOTDLG

    The securities accounts are managed on this tab. More detailed information on the securities accounts can be found on the respective respective detail dialogs. View At the top of the detail dialog you will find a search function to filter the list of depots. Below is the list with all available or found depots. found depots. On the right side there are buttons with the available functions. At the beginning all depots are always displayed. Operation If you want to filter the list of depots the list of securities accounts, enter a single search term in the "Search for" line. search term. In a search term you can work with wildcards in a search term by using the * character. Then press the button "Search" to trigger the search function. All depots found are displayed in the list...

  • District administration - District selector

    • HELP_BV_BEZIRKSELECTOR_HELP

    In order to be able to select and search for districts efficiently, the district selection dialog is used in various PostOffice modules. Depending on the module, exactly one district (single selection) or a list of districts (multiple selection) can be selected. be selected. The search for districts is supported by the specification of filters and the input of multiple search terms. The search can be limited by selecting a district structure, a district group, a depot and/or a service provider. If a district structure is selected, any selection of the district group and the securities account is dissolved and only the district groups belonging to the selected district structure are available in the selection list of the district groups. only the carrier route groups that belong to the selected carrier route structure are available. If a securities account is selected, any selection of the carrier route structure and the carrier route group is dissolved. The last restriction used is saved and used again the next time you select a carrier route selection...

  • District administration - Import

    • HELP_BV_TAB_IMPORT

    In this dialog you have the option monitor and execute current imports for the carrier route or area and to execute them. You can select any files files, which are transferred from your workstation to the server from where the import takes place. Depending on the license model the following import options are available: No import Standard area and district import Standard import of persons DHL area import...

  • District administration - transshipment point

    • HELP_BV_TAB_DEPOTHUBDLG

    On this tab you manage your transshipment points. A transshipment point (abbreviation UP) can be used as an additional as an additional level for subdivision. A load transfer point is not strictly hierarchical and located between the home delivery organization and a depot, but rather as an additional entity next to the the home delivery organization. In principle, the use of a transshipment point is intended as a delivery point for a region. This means means, for example, that prepared lettershop items are delivered by the delivered by the print service provider to the transshipment points and broken up and picked for further transport. The delivery route planning is supported by CodX PostOffice is supported. Tours can be planned from the transshipment point to the depots. can be planned View The dialog contains a list of all existing load transfer points. On the right side of the list are the buttons with the available functions...

  • District administration - unloading point

    • HELP_BV_TAB_DROPLOCATIONDLG

    On this tab you manage the unloading points. Unloading points can be assigned to depots as well as to carriers (employees). This makes it possible delivery rounds in such a way that letters and newspapers are unloaded directly are unloaded directly at the carrier. The unloading points can be grouped and sorted in delivery rounds and sort them. It is relevant whether unloading points from depots or carriers are included in a are included in a delivery round. The output takes place on a delivery round list report, which can be given to the delivery round driver, for example. View At the top of the detail dialog you will find a search function to filter the list of unloading points. Below is the list with all existing or found unloading points. unloading points. On the right side there are the buttons with the available functions. At the beginning all unloading unloading points are always displayed. Operation If you want to filter the list of unloading points the list of unloading points, enter a single search term in the "Search for" line. search term. In a search word you can work with placeholders in a search term by using the ? character. Then press the button "Search" to trigger the search function. All unloading points found are displayed in the list...

  • District administration - Warehouse

    • HELP_BV_TAB_LAGERDLG

    This register for the administration of the district camps is only available with the BV Pro license. View On the screen you will see a list in which all the district warehouses entered are listed. On the right side of the list are the buttons with the available functions. Operation The following buttons are available:...

  • District administration Settings

    • HELP_BV_CUSTFIELD

    Here you will find all settings for the district administration. Below is a list of all available attributes. In the first column is the name of the attribute attribute, in the 2nd column is the value of the attribute, which can be edited. To edit a value click with the mouse on the corresponding column and change the value. District administration Settings Designation (Custfieldname) Value (table ID: 1602, lID = 0)...

  • District administration Settings

    • HELP_SVSERVER_CUSTFIELD

    Here you will find all settings for the SVServer. Below is a list of all available attributes. In the first column is the name of the attribute attribute, in the 2nd column is the value of the attribute, which can be edited. To edit a value click with the mouse on the corresponding column and change the value. SVServer settings Designation (Custfieldname) Value (table ID: 1007, lID = 0)...

  • District Determination

    • HELP_SORTTREE_SETUP_BEZIRKSERMITTLUNG_DLG

    Manual entry (MS/OS-AZD/IHS) The effectively determined district depends on the following factors: Configured sequence Configured district locks Configured partner locks...

  • Districts and routing

    • HELP_BV_TAB_BEZIRKDLG

    This tab is where you manage your districts. A district is a geographical delimitation of an area. Districts must not overlap. There are 3 different types of districts. Normal districts created by the user, system districts which are created automatically by the system, and cooperated districts which have been transferred from another client due to the another client. The district structure is as follows: District structure (backup or active) District groups Counties District countries District locations County Roads District number ranges or IHS districts (depending on license) District groups Counties District countries District locations County Roads District number ranges or IHS districts (depending on license) Counties District countries District locations County Roads District number ranges or IHS districts (depending on license)...

  • Districts and Routing Legend

    • HELP_BV_BEZIRK_LEGENDE

    Districts and routing Districts and Routing is represented as a tree, which contains different levels and the respective attributes of a level can be in a different status. The different entities are represented by a symbol and the different statuses are represented with different colors. The following is a legend to the symbols and colors used. District Entities The following symbols are used for the different entities, please note that the color of the icons may change depending on the status can change depending on the status and corresponds to the color of the entry. The default colors are shown here. Bezirkssturktur...

  • Document Management History

    • HELP_DM_HISTORY

    This dialog shows each step that a document has been has gone through. Document details The UPOC of this document as well as the file name and the file type are displayed. In the lower window you can see the exact document name, the size of the document and the creation date. Documents Check Out Opens the desired version of the selected document...

  • Document scanning

    • HELP_DIGITAL_PHOTOCTRL

    In this dialog the settings for scanning are and the scanning process is triggered either automatically or manually. manually. The scanned images are displayed in the preview, depending on the settings only the front side or front and or front and back side. View In the upper half of the dialog, surrounded by a margin the scanner settings and the buttons for operating the scanner settings and the buttons for the operation of the scanner settings and the scanning process. Below that you see the preview of the scanned image(s). scanned image(s). Depending on the setting of the duplex option, one or or two images will be displayed side by side, these are the preview of the front side and the back side. When multiple documents are scanned, you can scroll through the previews to see all the images. images can be displayed. Operation To select and set a scanner, proceed as follows proceed as follows:...

  • Documents

    • HELP_DM

    Documents are stored in this administration. In the directory structure, the documents can be stored in folders and subfolders. be stored. Directory structure The directory structure can also be extended here or folders can be deleted. For this purpose in the lower part of this window the buttons below the directory structure are available. Add Creates new folders. Depending on the folder you are in, a subfolder will now be created in it. If you want to create a new main folder, then simply click on the box Root directory. Edit This allows you to edit an existing folder name. To do this, you must select the folder before clicking [Edit]...

  • DPAG

    • HELP_DPAG_DLG

    Before the shipments are physically delivered, the shipments are sorted by means of the posting list in CodX PostOffice. This module is used to import mailings from posting lists that DPAG makes available. First an import file (csv file) has to be selected and then the import can be started. The associated log data is displayed in the list. The description of the UserLog can be found in a separate manual...

  • DPAG settings

    • HELP_DPAG_SETUP

    For the import of the posting lists there is a job in the system tasks a job 0201:0001 DPAG: Import of posting list Import posting list This import selects and imports the previously received file is selected and imported. When importing the delivery list, the shipment is created with the service defined here, depending on the alternative code. These definitions are mandatory so that the import of the delivery list import of the delivery list starts. It must be a valid service. (date range)...

  • DPD interface

    • HELP_DPD

    Now you can find the manual of this module online on our webserver. This has the advantage that we can incorporate additions and changes more quickly and easily. Link to the manual of your version (PDF file)...

  • DPD Interface settings

    • HELP_DPDINTERFACE_SETUP

    Data import Language: The language is defined once (e.g. DE) Import path: Here you define the path to the directory where the directory in which the DPD import data is made available. are made available. If you then start an import, the data will be imported from this folder. data will be imported from this folder. Data version: This is an info field and cannot be edited manually. edited manually. In it you can read, which version of the DPD data is imported into CodX PostOffice. Last import: This is also a fixed field that cannot be cannot be changed manually. It shows the date of the last import that was performed...

  • DVS - Script management

    • HELP_TNTINTERFACE_SETUP_SCRIPTDLG

    The sort info printable by DVS can be a maximum of 10 characters long. CodX PostOffice must therefore shorten the sort info to this maximum length. maximum length. This is done by preparing the sort info by means of a script to be defined. In this dialog you manage the script that is executed for each sort information. You have the possibility to test the script based on test data that you enter. After a test, a status message is displayed, showing either the error or the generated results of the script. results of the script. The following functions are available here: Sortinfo: Determines the sorting information based on the captured address. Import: Imports a script file...

  • DVS - System Partner Settings

    • HELP_DVSINTERFACE_SETUP_PARTNERSETTING_DLG

    In this dialog, the data of a DMS system partner are entered and processed. Enter the individual settings according to the DMS specifications. Multiple layer numbers can be entered separated by the comma character ",".

  • E-Bill Email Template

    • HELP_FAVIEW_ERECHNUNG_MAIL_VORLAGE

    #eInvoice

    In this dialog you can enter a subject line and a text for the e-mail of the eInvoice. (#eInvoice) You write the desired text in the corresponding field and can complete it with variables.(See Email Variables) The varibals are then replaced by the actual values of the invoice before the mail is sent. Example for subject...

  • Edit alarm profile

    • HELP_CXWATCHDOG_EDITPROFILE

    For further information see 'AdminDoc

  • Edit authorization

    • HELP_CXSEC_EDITRIGHT

    In this window you can set the rights for each role or user for a specific function. NoteIn order to edit the access rights, you must have the necessary administrator rights yourself. to do so. Function The function selected when opening is displayed in the uppermost window. Depending on the call, the subordinate or also the superordinate superordinate function can be opened/selected. All the following applies to the function selected here! Roles or user names...

  • Edit common files

    • HELP_CXREPORT_COMMONREPOSITORY

    The reports are checked for consistency checked. Select the reports to be checked. To check check all reports, do not select a line. Incorrect reports are then no longer available.

  • Edit courier order

    • HELP_COURIERSYSTEM_ORDER_ORDER

    This detail dialog contains all data for a courier order. Each courier order gets a unique UPOC of the new type 56. For each courier order, any number of journal entries can be made, and any number of documents can be attached using the CodX PostOffice document management can be attached. Please note that all changes you make to a courier order will only be saved when you press the "OK" button. button. No data in the database will be changed before that. If a predefined customer/cost center is set in the corresponding Custfield is set, it will be selected automatically for each new courier order. automatically. Status change If the status is changed from Cleared to Cleared Completed , the associated FA order is automatically deleted. deleted and is not created again until the next created again during the next order run. If, on the other hand, only the FA order is deleted, it will not be created again! More information on the status of courier orders. Automation...

  • Edit delivery calendar Delivery days

    • HELP_DELIVERYDAY_DETAIL

    The home delivery calendar can be be changed manually. Individual delivery days can be introduced, postponed or deleted. This does not affect the normal calculation of the home delivery calendar. The manually manually changed delivery days are not changed by the calculation of the calendar calculation. Manual changes can only be made if the corresponding license is available. View In the upper part of the dialog you see the group group, which contains the data for which the entity for which entity the delivery days displayed are valid and on the basis of which and the home delivery calendar on the basis of which they were generated. they were generated. Below this is a table with all existing home delivery days for this entity (carrier route structure, carrier route group, carrier route or securities account). This table contains both the calculated delivery days and the manually entered and deactivated home delivery days. The table contains 3 columns that display the delivery days with their status and the and the function available for changing them. On the right side are the available functions. Operation Buttons OK Saves the changes made and closes the dialog. If data has been changed, a confirmation prompt appears, whether you want to save these delivery days. After saving the job for recalculating the delivery days is triggered...

  • Edit deputies

    • HELP_PV_DEPUTY_DETAIL

    The deputy is entered or edited in this detail dialog. The "Master" selection box specifies who has the authorisation for this deputy. for this deputy, this can be: Undefined (i.e. anyone, user interface = user interface or import. If another master is defined as user interface, the entries are locked for editing, but this can be undone by a selection. On the deputy, the validity period, the deputy person, the routing and the services are defined. View All adjustable attributes for the substitute are displayed in the dialog, including a list in which one or more services can be selected. services can be selected. All main services are displayed which are shipment-related and not assigned to a business partner. to a business partner. On the right side there are the buttons with the available functions. Operation Master In the case of already recorded deputies, the responsible person who has recorded this deputy is displayed here. the master is automatically set to user interface. You can change this setting at any time. If the setting is not User interface, all other entries are deactivated and you cannot make any adjustments...

  • Edit driver order no.

    • HELP_COURIERSYSTEM_DRIVERORDERNR

    In this dialog you can either enter a new enter a new driver order number or edit or delete an existing one. delete it. The edited driver order number is assigned to the vehiclet which is assigned to the selected driver. is stored. Operation Driver order no. Enter the current driver order number here.

  • Edit export transformation rule

    • HELP_IMPORTEXPORTSERVER_SETUP_EXPORT

    This wizard allows you to create an export transformation rule. The basic structure of an export transformation rule is created created with it. However, extended functions and detailed export rules must still be created manually using the specification described in the Admindok specification described in the Admindok. View The detail dialog is divided into 2 halves by a separator bar. This separating bar can be moved up or down with the mouse so that the upper or the lower half has more space available. In the upper part a large input field is displayed, in which the data query is displayed in which the data query can be entered. In the lower part, the input field for the name of the transformation rule and the list with all generated columns of the export transformation rule. The operation takes place exclusively via the buttons displayed at the right edge displayed on the right margin. Operation In the edit field with the heading "Data SQL", write the data query as it will be used later in the settings of the JobEngine settings on the export task...

  • Edit import transformation rule

    • HELP_IMPORTEXPORTSERVER_SETUP_IMPORT

    This wizard allows you to create an import transformation rule. This creates the basic framework of an import transformation rule. However, advanced functions and detailed import rules must still be created manually using the specification described in the Admindok specification. View The dialog is divided into 2 parts by means of a separator bar, which can be moved with the mouse to the bottom or to the top, so that the upper or the lower half has more or less space available. so that the upper or lower half has more or less space available. The upper part displays a list of all Metalayer tables in the database that can be used for imports. In the lower half of the dialog the input field for the name of the transformation rule and the list with all created columns of the import transformation rule are displayed. The operation is exclusively via the buttons displayed in the right margin. Operation To create an import transformation rule, you must specify the metalayer table into which the data from a file is written to. It is also possible that an import file is distributed over multiple metalayer tables, for this reason you can can also select multiple tables...

  • Edit invoice run

    • HELP_FA_RECHNUNGSLAUF_DLG

    Here you can enter a new invoice run or reactivate an existing one. If the dialogue is left with OK then the invoice run is started when the start time is reached. The following settings must be made. Invoice run All invoice runs that are available in the Settings / Administration / Invoicing System / Invoice Run Definitions are available. If you select an invoice run, various attributes attributes are copied from the settings of the invoice run. Of course, these settings can still be changed. If the invoice run already contains invoices, this value can no longer be changed. Start time...

  • Edit login

    • HELP_CXSEC_USERROLL

    Define the properties of the user for the login here. The user name is predefined and cannot be changed directly. This is formed from the contact data <company>, <name First name>. Select the desired roles to which this user is to be assigned and thus define its access authorizations. Operating system login If you enter your Windows login name in the Operating system login field, you no longer need to enter a password when logging in. when logging on, since you have already identified yourself as a legitimate user in Windows. Notice: You should only make this setting if no unwanted persons other than yourself have access to your logged on computer!...

  • Edit monitoring

    • HELP_CXWATCHDOG_EDITCHECK

    For further information see 'AdminDoc

  • Edit Move

    • HELP_CDM0110_MOVEREORGDETAILDLG

    In this detail dialog you will find all attributes which are contained in a move data record. You can enter or change these or change them depending on the function. Please note that the PID field is mandatory. And depending on the status, a UPOC (MBS or logistics unit) must be selected. View The detail dialog contains all the attributes which are contained in a move data record. At the bottom of the dialog are the available functions. Operation OK Saves the entries, depending on whether a new relocation data record is is entered, it will be created, otherwise the existing move existing relocation data record is updated. Afterwards the detail dialog is closed...

  • Edit partner

    • HELP_CXSYNC_CONFIG_PARTNER

    The partner ID and its alias do not normally need to be changed, as these values are read in by the partner. by the partner. You can deactivate communication with this partner. No more data is written to or read from this partner. is written or read. You can enter any text under Remark. This information is not transferred to the partner. With Reinitialize synchronization you can trigger a complete retransmission of all data to and from the device for this device during the next synchronization. Settings Possible settings are displayed in a list are displayed. You can change this setting system-wide (button to the left of the partner list in the synchronization settings) and per partner. The settings on the partner have first priority. ATTENTION: These settings are made available by the service at startup, and every 30 minutes for synchronization. (Same as the license and Sec data) Designation (Custfieldname) Value (table ID: -110, lID = ID of CxSyncPartner)...

  • Edit partner function for service mapping

    • HELP_BUSINESS_PARTNER_PAYMENT_PRODUCT_MAP_DLG

    For power mapping, they define one power for feed-in and one for logistics compensation. Power Feed: For broadcasts, this is the performance of the broadcast For courier orders, this is the performance of the assigned items. Newly, non-shipment-related services can also be selected here. These are only taken into account for the partner remuneration of courier orders...

  • Edit stop

    • HELP_COURIERSYSTEM_ORDER_ORDER_STOP

    A courier order can contain any number of stops. Enter the corresponding data in this corresponding data in this detail dialog. You can define the default time differences for the Latest possible date in a Custfield. This is the Custfield with the table 2262 and the name "strDelivernotLaterComboValues". This contains a list of the times that can be added in the format in the format: Default minutes;Display text, (sign)number of minutes; Example: -1;+15 minutes,15;+30 minutes,30;+45 minutes,45;+1 hour,60;Individual,-1 If on a service the extended attribute "600: Courier system - Maximum processing time for calculating the stop" has been entered with a value, this value (in minutes) is added to the value (in minutes) is added to the current time. If several articles with services selected, which have such a value stored value, the value with the smallest maximum processing time is processing time is determined and added. View The stop has a status that can be displayed and set with a selection box. The address of the stop and the contact person of the stop are displayed with the contact control, which can be edited with the corresponding "..." button. The The dates of the earliest and latest possible start of the stop are displayed with a date and a separate time entry. The latest possible date can be set by means of a selection box with predefined stops. The effective stop is only displayed and recorded by the driver via MDE. recorded by the driver...

  • eInvoice - Script

    • HELP_ERECHNUNG_EXPORT_SCRIPTING

    #eBill

    Here you enter the script for the eInvoice export. (#eBill) In the upper part, all passed script variables are listed and, if possible, already filled with values. These values can still be changed for test purposes. The variable names can be used in the script. In the editor you enter a VB script. The script is only saved when you click the Save button. Not with OK...

  • eInvoice e-mail test

    • HELP_FAVIEW_ERECHNUNG_MAIL_TEST

    #eInvoice

    With this dialog you can send an e-mail for test purposes (#eInvoice). To do this, you enter a recipient e-mail address and fill the variables with the desired values. These values are then copied into the mail, provided you have used the appropriate variables in the subject or text. If you have called up the dialog from the settings for FA Invoice Client, you can also select the desired customer. If this customer has defined a subject or text, these will be used for the test mail. Send sends an e-mail with two attachments (PDF and XML) to the entered recipient...

  • eInvoice E-mail variables

    • HELP_ERECHNUNG_MAIL_VARIABLE

    #eInvoice

    If eInvoices are sent by e-mail, a template can be created for this. The subject and the text can also be provided with values of the invoice (#eInvoice). The following variables are available for this purpose: Customer name Invoice number Invoice amount Invoice Currency...

  • eInvoice settings

    • HELP_ERECHNUNG_SETTING

    #eInvoice

    General To create eInvoices you need at least two licenses, one General and one Additional for the corresponding format. The license can be used for an unlimited number of customers. (#eInvoice) CodX PostOffice Invoice eInvoice (general) CodX PostOffice Invoice eInvoice XInvoice EN 16931 CodX PostOffice Invoice eInvoice ZUGFeRD / Facture-x...

  • Employee management

    • HELP_MV

    Now you can find the manual of this module online on our webserver. This has the advantage that we can incorporate additions and changes more quickly and easily. Link to the manual of your version (PDF file)...

  • Employee Selector

    • HELP_MITARBEITER_SELECTOR

    Employees are searched for and listed on this dialog. View At the top of the detail dialog is a search function to search function to filter the list of employees. Below is the list with all found employees. On the right side there are buttons with the available functions. Operation If you want to filter the list of employees the list of employees, enter a single search term in the "Search for" line. search term. In a search term you can work with placeholders in a search term by using the * character. Then press the button "Search" to trigger the search function. All employees found are displayed in the list.

  • Enhanced Shipment Attribute 'DHLP Visual Check Of Age

    • HELP_SBB_CF_DHLP_VISUAL_CHECK_OF_AGE

    CEP service provider Allowed values Comment DHL parcel A16 (Recipient must be 16 years old) A18 (Recipient must 18 years old)...

  • Enter ad hoc person as recipient

    • HELP_POLIBRARY_ENTER_ADHOC_PERSON_DLG

    Items can also be captured and delivered for people who are not recorded in the CodX PostOffice database (e.g. temporary employees). For this purpose, the recipient is entered as an "ad hoc person". It is mandatory to enter the name and the logistics unit (work center) of the person. be entered. The entry of the cost unit in this dialog is optional. The name is taken from the search field in MS/OS-IHS, the cost unit is the one already selected in MS/OS-IHS. If no cost object is selected in MS/OS-IHS, the cost object of the selected logistics unit is used. The recorded person itself is not stored in the database. The name entered and the address of the logistics unit are stored as the consignee address of the consignment. are stored. Thus the consignment can be found (e.g. in the search module) via the recipient address. The logistics unit entered is used for carrier route determination. Input fields...

  • Enter cost objects

    • HELP_MSOSIHS_COSTUNIT

    The cost unit can be searched for directly by entering a search term. The hit list is filled with all persons found, logistics units and customers/cost centers. The cost center assigned to the selected line/entity is used as the cost unit. The cost unit can also be searched and assigned directly via keyboard shortcut (default setting F9) or selection dialog. Select customer/cost center as cost object (cost object icon) Opens the specific dialog for the direct selection of the customer/cost center (application especially for outgoing shipments). This dialog can also be opened via the corresponding keyboard shortcut (default setting F9). Cost unit selection mode (combo box) This combo box contains the possible options for selecting the cost object. The available options are controlled by the settings "IHS receiver is cost object" and "Fix IHS sender display" in the defaults Entry. Select The cost object is searched for with the search term. The cost center assigned to the selected row is used as the cost object. ReceiverWith this option, the cost center assigned to the entered receiver is automatically used as cost object.This option is usually used for external incoming shipments.If this option is active, the search field is deactivated. Fix The selected cost object is fixed and thus also used for the next newly entered shipments. The option can only be selected if a cost unit is already selected in the list. Select The cost object is searched for with the search term. The cost center assigned to the selected row is used as the cost object. ReceiverWith this option, the cost center assigned to the entered receiver is automatically used as cost object.This option is usually used for external incoming shipments.If this option is active, the search field is deactivated...

  • Enter invoice run

    • HELP_FA_SETUP_RECHNUNGSLAUF_DLG

    Here you can enter a new invoice run or edit an existing one. The following settings must be made for this. Designation Enter a unique name here. The name can be chosen freely. An automatic function is however, is not assigned to them. They serve to settle a group of customers at the same time, in ONE pass. A designation such as "End of month", however, does not trigger an automatic automatic invoice run on the last day of the month, but only serves you at the start of the billing run to select the correct one. Customers who are to receive an invoice only 1x per month typically an invoice run called "End of month" (or similar) is assigned. Month" (or similar) is assigned. Customers who are to receive an invoice 2x per month will be either an invoice run called "2x monthly" (or similar) is assigned to them (and then this is also started 2x per month). However, another possibility is to assign these customers an billing run called "Mid month" (or similar) AND the one with the name "End of month" assigned. So in the middle of the month the one invoice run will be started and only invoices are created for these customers. At the end of the month, the invoice run with the same name is executed and invoices are created for these customers only. and invoices are created for customers with a monthly and semi-monthly the invoices are created...

  • Enter recipient

    • HELP_POLIBRARY_ENTERRECEIVER_DLG

    If the recipient does not exist in the database, it can be entered via this input field. The individual fields are filled with the available information in order to correctly store the recipient address and to make this consignment and to make this consignment findable again, e.g. for the search on the basis of the recipient's address.

  • Enter reference

    • HELP_RM_DETAIL_VERWEIS

    With this detail dialogue you have the possibility, enter shipment references, i.e. to add existing shipments as a reference to a complaint. You can search for a consignment either via the UPOC or via the alternative code. View In the upper part there are the 2 input fields for the UPOC and the alternative code. Below this there is a display field with detailed information about the found shipment. On right side are the buttons with the functions to operate the dialog. to operate the dialog. Operation Enter either the UPOC or the alternative code. If both are entered, the UPOC has priority in the search. priority. Press the "Search" button to search for the consignment and, if found and if it is found, detailed data is entered in the display field display field. If no or several consignments were found, a corresponding error message is displayed. a corresponding error message is displayed...

  • Enter shipment price manually

    • HELP_POLIBRARY_ENTER_PRICE_DLG

    Enter the price of a shipment manually here.

  • Enter UPOC/search term

    • HELP_POLIBRARY_ENTER_UPOC_EX_DLG

    This dialogue allows the input of UPOCs or a search term for the selection/search of consignments or of services, cost units, persons, etc. The currently permitted entry is displayed in text form. If the corresponding checkbox is activated and a search term (no UPOC) is used, consignments are searched for as follows: Shipments with alternative code LIKE *<search term>*. Shipments with alternative code in SBBCustField LIKE *<search term>*. Transmissions with order identifier LIKE <search term>* (no wildcard at the beginning!) Input fields and buttons...

  • Enter/edit address...

    • HELP_ADRESSDLGSERVER_EDIT

    With this detail dialog you can either enter a new address or edit an existing address. It does not matter does not matter what type of address it is. This is managed automatically by the corresponding application. Depending on the available licenses, you can transfer addresses from other entities in this dialog without entering them again. These are addresses of persons, logistics units or from the universal addresses. This dialog can be called in every address dialog with ALT-A. For new universal addresses the default value for the checkbox Sender address can be defined in a CustField. This is described in the AdminDoc (chapter Universal Addresses). View All available attributes are displayed, which you can edit. On the right side there are the buttons, which display the available functions. Operation...

  • Entry of KEP consignment price

    • HELP_KEP_ERROR_NO_ITEM_PRICE

    TODO! Header 2 Header 3 Broadcast: UPOC of the broadcast Service provider: CEP service provider...

  • Entry of KEP consignment price

    • HELP_POLIBRARY_ENTER_KEP_PRICE_DLG

    Enter the shipment price of a CEP shipment including all additional services here. For CEP multiple shipments, the total price of all shipments is recorded here. It is not possible to enter a separate price (individual consignment) to enter a separate price. Display fields: Broadcast: UPOC of the broadcast Service provider: CEP service provider...

  • Error sort plan check

    • HELP_SORTIERPLANEDITOR_VALIDATION_ERROR_DLG

    This dialog shows all errors in all checked sort plans. One line is displayed per sort plan for each faulty compartment. The compartment is displayed with the compartment number, compartment type and the criterion, followed by a corresponding error text. Open the detail dialog of the sort plan and correct all errors. See also: Sort plan - Editor Sorting plan detail

  • Event Capture

    • HELP_DTS

    Introduction CodX PostOffice offers the Mail Search function for mailings. The item research is depends on certain data. The item must be completely recorded (recipient address, sender, format, weight, etc.). In addition the process of an item can be documented by means of status messages. In CodX PostOffice, these status messages are called events. and are mostly captured with barcode scanners. Exactly this can be done in the Data Terminal module. In addition, data can also be captured that is not directly linked to individual items, e.g. the allocation of employees to districts. For this purpose, the event type Employee<=>District Assignment has to be selected, then the the district UPOC can be scanned or entered. Supported barcode scanners In the Event Capture module, two types of barcode scanners are supported: Barcode scanners with keyboard emulation (Wedge) These barcode scanners work analogous to the input via keyboard and facilitate the input of UPOCs. They are usually looped into the cable of the PC keyboard. keyboard. If a barcode is read in, the system behaves as if the barcode had been entered with the keyboard. When using this type of scanner , the entry is made in the Event Entry tab , Guided Data Entry...

  • Event Capture

    • HELP_DTS_TAB_LOGRADIOSCANNERDATAENTRYDLG

    For the introduction and general mode of operation, see Event Capture. Introduction When using wireless scanners, the user can move freely and does not have to work directly on the PC. The recorded data is sent to the PC via radio technology and is and evaluated/documented there. The register Free data entry is used for the acquisition of events with radio scanners, without any feedbacks on the user interface/screen. The simultaneous use of several scanners is also supported. If a radio scanner offers a return channel, success/warning/error are indicated acoustically/optically on the scanner itself...

  • Event Capture Guided Data Capture

    • HELP_DTS_TAB_GUIDEDDATAENTRYDLG

    For the introduction and general mode of operation, see Event Capture. The Guided Data Capture tab is used for capturing events via keyboard or with barcode scanners with keyboard emulation (Wedge). The Cx photo scanners are also supported. Operating elements Input UPOC via: Define here, whether after the scan of a bar code still a manual confirmation with with <Enter> or <OK> is necessary or whether a successful scan is processed directly/immediately...

  • Event entry settings

    • HELP_DTS_SETUP_DLG

    Make the settings here that affect the behavior of the Event Capture module. Changed settings must be applied by clicking on the Save button. ATTENTION: The settings apply system-wide to all workstations and are only applied after a restart of CodX PostOffice takes effect! Behaviour if the item for which an event is entered is not (yet) stored in PostOffice In this group you define how CodX PostOffice should behave when an item is scanned that is not yet saved. is not yet saved...

  • Event type details

    • HELP_SVSERVER_SETUP_EVENTTYPE_DETAIL_DLG

    This dialog shows the details of an event type and allows you to edit them. For predefined system events, not all attributes can be edited, the affected input fields are disabled. In the following, the term entity defines a shipment or a bundle or a box respectively. Input fields Designation: Name of the event. Is used/displayed when entering events and in the broadcast search. is used/displayed. Short name: Short name ofthe event. This is displayed during recording on mobile recording devices if the display of the device is too small to of the device is too small for the full name. UPOC: Unique UPOC of the event type. The UPOC is automatically assigned by the system and cannot be edited. It is used for the entry of events via barcode scanner (modules Event Entry, Data Transfer PDC and PDC App Delivery)...

  • Event type Parameter Details

    • HELP_SVSERVER_SETUP_EVENPARAMTTYPE_DETAIL_DLG

    This dialog shows the details of an event parameter and allows you to edit them. ATTENTION: The processing of these attributes requires high know-how and expertise in the field of shipment tracking! Input fields Designation: Name of the parameter. Displayed when capturing events in Event Capture when a parameter needs to be captured. Short name: Short name ofthe parameter. This is displayed during acquisition on mobile acquisition devices if the display of the device is too of the device is too small for the complete designation...

  • Event types

    • HELP_SVSERVER_SETUP_EVENTTYPE

    Right To be able to make changes here, the rights must be set accordingly under General settings / Delivery days / Holidays must be set accordingly. General In this tab, all defined event types are displayed in a list. Event types can be predefined system events, customer-specific events or universal events. Events can be captured for shipments, bundles and boxes (hereafter referred to as entity). An event is an action that can be taken for a specific entity (shipment/bundle/box), such as the capture/sorting of a shipment. Events are the basis for Track and Trace. Each captured event is stored with the employee and date/time of capture to the corresponding entity and also archived with the entity. Events of bundles and boxes are inherited by the objects contained in them at the time of the event, e.g. all shipments of a bundle receive the event "Acceptance to depot" when the event occurs. receive the event "Acceptance at depot" when this is captured for the bundle. Events can contain optional or mandatory parameters, e.g. the event "Acceptance at depot" requires the UPOC of the depot as a mandatory parameter. The events recorded for an entity can be viewed in the Shipment Search module. Columns...

  • Extended consignment attribute 'Alternative consignee name

    • HELP_SBB_CF_KEP_ALTERNATIVE_RECIPIENT_NAME

    Enter the name of the alternate consignee of the shipment. If you have any questions, please contact our support at http://support.codx.ch.

  • Extended shipment attribute

    • HELP_SBB_CF_ABO_SBB_LSUBSCRIBERID

    There is no additional help for this extended shipment attribute. If you have any questions, please contact our support team at http://support.codx.ch.

  • Extended shipment attribute

    • HELP_SBB_CF_DIEPOST_Customer_Reference

    There is no additional help for this extended shipment attribute. If you have any questions, please contact our support team at http://support.codx.ch.

  • Extended shipment attribute

    • HELP_SBB_CF_DIEPOST_DM_UPOC

    There is no additional help for this extended shipment attribute. If you have any questions, please contact our support team at http://support.codx.ch.

  • Extended shipment attribute

    • HELP_SBB_CF_DIEPOST_eExportStatus

    There is no additional help for this extended shipment attribute. If you have any questions, please contact our support team at http://support.codx.ch.

  • Extended shipment attribute

    • HELP_SBB_CF_DIEPOST_LICENCE

    There is no additional help for this extended shipment attribute. If you have any questions, please contact our support team at http://support.codx.ch.

  • Extended shipment attribute

    • HELP_SBB_CF_DIEPOST_POST_DATE

    There is no additional help for this extended shipment attribute. If you have any questions, please contact our support team at http://support.codx.ch.

  • Extended shipment attribute

    • HELP_SBB_CF_DIEPOST_SBB_EXPORTED

    There is no additional help for this extended shipment attribute. If you have any questions, please contact our support team at http://support.codx.ch.

  • Extended shipment attribute

    • HELP_SBB_CF_DIEPOST_SBB_TO_EXPORT

    There is no additional help for this extended shipment attribute. If you have any questions, please contact our support team at http://support.codx.ch.

  • Extended shipment attribute

    • HELP_SBB_CF_DIEPOST_strFileName

    There is no additional help for this extended shipment attribute. If you have any questions, please contact our support team at http://support.codx.ch.

  • Extended shipment attribute

    • HELP_SBB_CF_FEDEX_NON_DOCUMENT

    There is no additional help for this extended shipment attribute. If you have any questions, please contact our support team at http://support.codx.ch.

  • Extended shipment attribute

    • HELP_SBB_CF_FEDEX_PACKAGING_TYPE

    There is no additional help for this extended shipment attribute. If you have any questions, please contact our support team at http://support.codx.ch.

  • Extended shipment attribute

    • HELP_SBB_CF_KEP_PACKAGE_DIMENSIONS

    Record the length of the package in [cm]. Enter the width of the package in [cm]. Record the height of the package in [cm]. DHL Express service:...

  • Extended shipment attribute

    • HELP_SBB_CF_KEP_PACKAGE_HEIGHT

    Record the height of the package in [cm]. DHL Express service: - NO or ALL dimensions must be recorded! DHL parcel service:...

  • Extended shipment attribute

    • HELP_SBB_CF_KEP_PACKAGE_LENGTH

    Record the length of the package in [cm]. DHL Express service: - NO or ALL dimensions must be recorded! - The length is transferred as Depth. DHL parcel service:...

  • Extended shipment attribute

    • HELP_SBB_CF_KEP_PACKAGE_WIDTH

    Enter the width of the package in [cm]. DHL Express service: - NO or ALL dimensions must be recorded! DHL parcel service:...

  • Extended shipment attribute

    • HELP_SBB_CF_KEP_RECEIVER_COMPANY

    Enter the company name of the recipient in this field. If you have any questions, please contact our support team at http://support.codx.ch.

  • Extended shipment attribute

    • HELP_SBB_CF_KEP_RECEIVER_PHONENUMBER

    Enter the phone number of the recipient in this field. CEP service provider Allowed values Comment all...

  • Extended shipment attribute

    • HELP_SBB_CF_KEP_TERMS_OF_TRADE

    There is no additional help for this extended shipment attribute. If you have any questions, please contact our support team at http://support.codx.ch.

  • Extended shipment attribute

    • HELP_SBB_CF_LETTERSHOP_PRODUCTION_DATETIME

    There is no additional help for this extended shipment attribute. If you have any questions, please contact our support team at http://support.codx.ch.

  • Extended shipment attribute

    • HELP_SBB_CF_SSS_MANUAL_FEED_ON_SORTER

    There is no additional help for this extended shipment attribute. If you have any questions, please contact our support team at http://support.codx.ch.

  • Extended shipment attribute

    • HELP_SBB_CF_UPS_PACKAGING_CODE

    Enter the packaging of the shipment here. The attribute must be entered. Select one of the predefined packages. If you are using your own packaging, select'Customer Supplied Package'. If you have any questions, please contact our support team at http://support.codx.ch.

  • Extended shipment attribute 'Building

    • HELP_SBB_CF_KEP_BUILDING

    Record the building of the consignee of the shipment. If you have any questions, please contact our support at http://support.codx.ch.

  • Extended Shipment Attribute 'CEP Additional Customs Fee

    • HELP_SBB_CF_KEP_ADDITIONAL_CUSTOMS_FEE

    KEP DHL parcel: Additional customs duty to be paid.

  • Extended shipment attribute 'CEP Customs Tariff Number'.

    • HELP_SBB_CF_KEP_CUSTOMS_TARIFF_NUMBER

    CEP service provider Allowed values Comment TNT Express GmbH 6 digits...

  • Extended shipment attribute 'CEP Declared currency'.

    • HELP_SBB_CF_KEP_DECLARED_CURRENCY

    This attribute defines the currency in which the value in the KEP Declared value attribute. CEP service provider Allowed values Comment UPS United Parcel Service...

  • Extended shipment attribute 'CEP Declared value'.

    • HELP_SBB_CF_KEP_DECLARED_VALUE

    Record the value of goods in the shipment for customs declaration (pro forma invoice) and/or insurance. CEP service provider Allowed values Comment TNT Express GmbH...

  • Extended Shipment Attribute 'CEP Export Type Description

    • HELP_SBB_CF_KEP_EXPORT_TYPE_DESCRIPTION

    KEP DHL parcel: TODO Optional field, maximum 35 characters. For international shipments the invoice number can be indicated in this field. This will be added to the generated customs declaration (CN23). If you have any questions, please contact our support team at http://support.codx.ch. See also: Link 1...

  • Extended shipment attribute 'CEP Insured Value' (CEP Insured Value)

    • HELP_SBB_CF_KEP_INSURED_VALUE

    Record the value of goods in the shipment for customs declaration (pro forma invoice) and/or insurance. CEP service provider Allowed values Comment DHL parcel TNT Express GmbH...

  • Extended shipment attribute 'CEP Invoice Description'.

    • HELP_SBB_CF_KEP_INVOICE_DESCRIPTION

    Enter a description of the contents of the consignment for the customs declaration (pro forma invoice). This description appears on the corresponding customs documents. CEP service provider Allowed values Comment TNT Express GmbH...

  • Extended shipment attribute 'CEP Invoice Number

    • HELP_SBB_CF_KEP_INVOICE_NUMBER

    KEP DHL parcel: Optional field, maximum 35 characters. For international shipments, the invoice number can be specified in this field. This will be added to the generated customs declaration (CN23). If you have any questions, please contact our support team at http://support.codx.ch. See also: Link 1 Link 2

  • Extended shipment attribute 'DHL Paket Export Type

    • HELP_SBB_CF_DHLPAKET_EXPORTTYPE

    Type of export, depending on the selected service (product). The entry is mandatory for international (non-EU) shipments.

  • Extended shipment attribute 'DHL Paket Terms Of Trade

    • HELP_SBB_CF_DHLPAKET_TERMSOFTRADE

    This optional field is only available for the CEP service provider DHL Paket. For international shipments, the trade term can be specified in this field. Possible values are: - DDP (Delivery Duty Paid) - DXV (Delivery Duty Paid, excl. VAT) - DDX (Delivery Duty Paid, excl. Duties, Taxes and VAT) - DDU (Delivery Duty Unpaid) See also: Settings KEP DHL Parcel

  • Extended Shipment Attribute 'DHLP Delivery Timeframe

    • HELP_SBB_CF_DHLP_DELIVERY TIMEFRAME

    CEP service provider Allowed values Comment DHL parcel 10:00 till 12:00 12:00 until 14:00 14:00 until 16:00 16:00 until 18:00 18:00 until 20:00 19:00 until 21:00...

  • Extended shipment attribute 'DHLP Endorsement' (DHLP advance directive)

    • HELP_SBB_CF_DHLP_ENDORSEMENT

    CEP service provider Allowed values Comment DHL parcel SOZU (Return immediately) ZWZU (2nd attempt of Delivery) IMMEDIATE (Sending back immediately to sender) AFTER_DEADLINE (Sending back immediately to sender after expiration of time) ABANDONMENT (Abandonment of parcel at the hands of sender (free of charge))...

  • Extended shipment attribute 'Filing instruction

    • HELP_SBB_CF_KEP_DEPOSIT_INSTRUCTION

    Enter a filing instruction for the shipment. If you have any questions, please contact our support at http://support.codx.ch.

  • Extended shipment attribute 'GLS delivery conditions (franking/incoterm code)'.

    • HELP_SBB_CF_GLSDE_INCOTERM

    CEP service provider Allowed values Comment GLS Germany Franking 10 (DDP) Franking 20 (DAP) Franking 30 (DDP, VAT unpaid) Franking 40 (DAP, cleared) Franking 50 (DDP)...

  • Extended shipment attribute 'KEP Shipment contents/description'.

    • HELP_SBB_CF_KEP_SHIPMENT_CONTENTS

    Enter a description of the contents of the shipment. If you have any questions, please contact our support at http://support.codx.ch.

  • Extended shipment attribute 'pick-up date

    • HELP_SBB_CF_KEP_PICKUP_DATE

    This attribute defines the date on which the shipment is picked up from the sender by the CEP service provider. The pickup period is defined with the extended shipment attributes Pickup period earliest/latest. See also: Extended shipment attributes 'Collection period earliest/latest'. Settings CEP GO!

  • Extended shipment attribute 'Receiver EMail-Address'.

    • HELP_SBB_CF_RECEIVER_EMAIL

    Enter the e-mail address of the recipient here. If the selected CEP service provider supports the function to notify the recipient via e-mail and this is activated, the e-mail address entered here is used for this. the e-mail address entered here is used for this purpose. For the CEP service provider UPS up to five e-mail addresses can be entered separated by semicolons. See also Extended transmission attribute 'Receiver Message Text'.

  • Extended shipment attribute 'Recipient date of birth'.

    • HELP_SBB_CF_KEP_RECEIVER_BIRTHDATE

    Enter the date of birth of the recipient of the shipment. If you have any questions, please contact our support at http://support.codx.ch.

  • Extended shipment attribute 'Recipient first name'.

    • HELP_SBB_CF_KEP_RECEIVER_FIRSTNAME

    Enter the first name of the recipient of the shipment. If you have any questions, please contact our support at http://support.codx.ch.

  • Extended shipment attribute 'Recipient nationality

    • HELP_SBB_CF_KEP_RECEIVER_NATIONALITY

    Record the nationality of the consignee of the shipment. If you have any questions, please contact our support at http://support.codx.ch.

  • Extended shipment attribute 'Recipient surname'.

    • HELP_SBB_CF_KEP_RECEIVER_LASTNAME

    Enter the last name of the recipient of the shipment. If you have any questions, please contact our support at http://support.codx.ch.

  • Extended shipment attributes 'Collection period earliest/latest'.

    • HELP_SBB_CF_KEP_PICKUP_TIME

    These attributes define the time window in which the shipment is collected from the sender by the CEP service provider. The pickup date is defined with the extended shipment attribute pickup date extended attribute. See also: Extended shipment attribute 'pick-up date Settings CEP GO!

  • Extended transmission attribute 'Receiver Message Text

    • HELP_SBB_CF_RECEIVER_MESSAGE_TEXT

    Enter a message to the recipient here. If the selected CEP service provider supports the function to notify the recipient via e-mail and this function is activated, then the message entered here will be sent to the recipient via e-mail (provided that a correct e-mail address has been entered for this purpose). See also Enhanced Shipment Attribute 'Receiver EMail-Address'.

  • FA - eInvoice

    • HELP_FA_TAB_ERECHNUNG

    #eInvoice

    General In this tab the log entries of the generation and transmission of the eInvoice are visible. The buttons "Print", "Detail", "Export" and "Setting" on the right side of this tab refer to the log entries. (#eInvoice) Log entries for the individual invoices are also available for the invoice run and the invoice. In order for eInvoices to be generated and transmitted, the required settings must of course be made beforehand. (See eInvoice Settings)...

  • FA - Financial accounting

    • HELP_FAVIEW_TAB_RECHNUNG_TAB_FIBUEXPORT

    With the button [Start export] you can execute the FIBU export. The job "Standard FIBU Exporttask" is started, which can be managed in the Extras, System Tasks. Exported are all invoices which are closed but not yet exported. You can see the progress of the export in this window. The operation of the UserLog is described in a separate help file. For explanations see there. See also: Description of the UserLog

  • FA - Invoice Grouping Definition

    • HELP_FA_SETUP_TAB_RECHNUNG_GRP_DEF

    The user can adapt the appearance of the invoice with these settings to his needs. The invoice grouping definitions are defined per FA invoice client. With the selection of the FA invoice client the corresponding entries are displayed in the list. The items of the invoice are the result of a grouping of InvoiceDetailPos by items. The items of the detailed invoice are the InvoiceDetailPos. The user can now group the items of the invoice or detailed invoice according to his wishes. The invoice/detailed invoice can be grouped on two levels. The second grouping is always a grouping within the first. No grouping can be selected for the InvoicePos and the Invoice. The following figure shows how an invoice is structured in the DB...

  • FA - Invoice run

    • HELP_FA_SETUP_TAB_RECHNUNGSLAUF

    With CodX PostOffice you have the possibility to define for the invoice creation define invoice runs. Invoice runs are used to Create invoices for a group of customers. You can assign these invoice run definitions to the individual customers (see Customer Management module, Invoice Definition tab) and trigger them in the Invoicing module, Invoice Run tab. Trigger Invoice Run. Functions With the buttons"Add","Edit" and"Delete" invoice runs can be edited. invoice runs can be edited. Delete...

  • FA - Invoice run

    • HELP_FA_TAB_RECHNUNGSLAUF

    General Each customer is assigned to an invoice run. With the execution of an invoice run, the invoices can be created for all associated customers based on the existing order data. invoices can be created based on the existing order data. Here the invoice run job can be configured and monitored. The entire invoice run job can also be completed, printed or deleted. or deleted. The invoice run is executed on the server. After starting the invoice run, the corresponding orders are checked to see if they are still being processed or if they contain contain allocation errors. If this is the case, the run continues depending on the settings. After the invoice has been created from the order data, cyclical articles for invoices are executed, if available. Once the invoice has been created, the corresponding PDF is created and stored in the database. The invoice run is not considered complete until all PDFs have been created...

  • FA - Order data

    • HELP_KV_TAB_AUFTRAG

    General The order data can be processed and entered from the invoicing module as well as from the customer management. The only difference is that in the customer management the orders are already filtered by customer/cost center. Filter With the filter you can further limit the number of displayed orders. (Filter by date, status and order number) Depending on where the order data is viewed and what licenses are available, other filter criteria are available. FA invoicing: filter by customer/cost center (several selectable)...

  • FA - Terms of payment

    • HELP_FA_SETUP_TAB_ZAHLUNGSBEDINGUNG

    With CodX PostOffice you have the possibility to define payment terms for invoicing. The payment terms are assigned to the customers and are included in the invoice when the invoice is created. Functions With the buttons"Add","Edit" and"Delete" payment terms can be edited. Delete If it is a standard payment term, it cannot be deleted. You must first define another payment term must first be defined as the standard...

  • FA - Transfer units

    • HELP_FAKTURIERUNG_SETUP_FA_UNIT_CHANGE

    Do you want to delete a unit that is already used for articles, order items or invoice items is already in use, you will be asked which unit the existing entries are to have should have. Here you select the unit which is to be used instead of the one to be deleted, is to be used. Since not only the reference (ID) of the unit is stored on invoices, but also the unit is stored, but also the designation itself, the original unit remains on closed invoices. invoices.

  • FA - Units

    • HELP_FAKTURIERUNG_SETUP_FA_UNIT

    Here you define the units for invoicing. The name of system units cannot be changed. To enter UNECE code you must have a license for eInvoices. must be available. These codes are standardized. Further below are listed other UNECE codes for units. The designation and abbreviated designation can be recorded depending on the be recorded. UNECECode Other codes for units would be: ANN Year MON Month WEE Week HUR Hour KMT Kilometer If you need other units, you can find them on the internet on the internet by searching for: "UNECE Code for Units"

  • FA Invoice Client

    • HELP_FA_SETUP_DIALOG_FARECHNUNGMANDANT

    #eInvoice

    The settings for the FA invoice client are divided into several tabs.(#eInvoice) General eInvoice eInvoice E-mail eInvoice export...

  • FA/KV - Invoice data

    • HELP_KV_TAB_RECHNUNG

    General The invoice data can be edited and entered from the invoicing module as well as from the customer management. The only difference is that in the customer management the invoices are already filtered by customer/cost center. Search You have the option to search for an invoice number or invoice UPOC. Invoice verification (only with appropriate license)...

  • FachBox

    • HELP_FB

    Now you can find the manual of this module online on our webserver. This has the advantage that we can incorporate additions and changes more quickly and easily. Link to the manual of your version (PDF file)...

  • FE - Edit document type

    • HELP_FE_SETUP_DOCTYPE_DETAIL

    Enter the document types used in this dialog. For more information, refer to the Form EntryUser Guide. Pagination mode: Simplex (Each image file is an independent, self-contained document with reference UPOC, no connection of front/back side) - Documents are one/two or more pages (multipage TIF also possible) - The individual pages (also front/back) have no connection (e.g. delivery lists printed on two pages) - A UPOC is searched for on each page (also front/back of the same document). - All individual pages are saved for the UPOC found. Duplex (front/back side of document saved as separate image file, connection via file name pattern, reference UPOC on one of the two sides) - Documents are always duplex, i.e. they consist of front and back pages that belong together (e.g. certificates of delivery). - If the file is a multipage TIF, the odd page numbers (1,3,5,..) are treated as the front page, the even page numbers (2,4,6,..) as the back page. back page - If the file is NOT a multipage TIF, the front/back page are determined according to the "File name pattern" setting. - The UPOC is read on the front side, if not successful the back side is searched for - Front and back side are saved as single pages for transmission...

  • FE - Edit scanner

    • HELP_FE_SETUP_SCANNER_DETAIL

    For more information, refer to the Form EntryUser Guide. File name pattern: In pagination mode "Duplex (front/back side of the document stored as a separate image file stored as separate image file, connection via file name pattern, reference UPOC on one of the two pages)"pagination mode, front/back pages are determined based on this based on this setting. Function - All files with <File name pattern> in the filename (not in first position) are processed as front side - The file name of the associated reverse side must be identical to the front side, but with <file name pattern reverse side> in the place of <file name pattern>...

  • FedEx Delivery Signature' extended shipment attribute

    • HELP_SBB_CF_FEDEX_DELIVERY_SIGNATURE

    Record the value of goods in the shipment for customs declaration (pro forma invoice) and/or insurance. CEP service provider Allowed values Comment FedEx...

  • FedEx Priority Alert' extended shipment attribute

    • HELP_SBB_CF_FEDEX_PRIORITY_ALERT

    Record the value of goods in the shipment for customs declaration (pro forma invoice) and/or insurance. CEP service provider Allowed values Comment FedEx...

  • File Exchange

    • HELP_FX

    Now you can find the manual of this module online on our webserver. This has the advantage that we can incorporate additions and changes more quickly and easily. Link to the manual of your version (PDF file)...

  • File Exchange

    • HELP_HANDHELD_SETUP_DLG

    The list shows all handheld scanners, RFID readers and signature pads that have been detected by CodX PostOffice on this computer and are to be supported. The dialog is also used, among other things, to update firmware on individual devices, to run a test or to test the connection to the device. The heading of the header indicates in brackets whether the CodX PostOffice instance displayed is the server or a client for the handheld devices. That is, the server manages the hardware, a client sends and receives all handheld data and commands from the server. View The screen is divided into 2 lists, each with its own functions. The upper list shows all found handheld devices, on the right side of it are the available functions to the devices. The lower list is a test list, which displays all read-in data of an existing device. On the right side there is the function to delete the read-in data from the list...

  • Filter courier orders

    • HELP_COURIERSYSTEM_FILTER

    The filter settings are used to limit the displayed courier orders displayed. Various elements from a courier order are a courier order are displayed, which limits the selection to the selection of all courier orders. All displayed filter settings can be combined with each other to restrict the selection. For performance reasons, the maximum number of selected courier courier orders has been restricted. This setting can be changed per courier order list in the registry of the respective client. The default value is 500. If this number of courier orders to be displayed of courier jobs to be displayed is exceeded, a message dialog is displayed and the dialog is displayed and the filter "Date from (Accept or Stop)" is activated and Stop" filter will be activated and set to the last date of the displayed courier order. You can find these settings in the registry under the key "HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\CodX\PostOffice\CourierSystem", the 3 entries by list are self-explanatory. View Depending on the dialog, all or only a limited selection of possible selection of the possible filter attributes are displayed. Depending on the type of filter attribute, the corresponding field is displayed as an input field, selection list or, in the case of customers, as a button for selecting a customer. of a customer. On the right side there is the button "Reset" to set all filter settings back to default or empty. default value or empty. Operation To operate the filter, enter the desired data or select the possible settings from the check boxes. selection fields. In all cases except the 2 attributes "Order number" and "Ext. no." the courier orders are automatically automatically reselected and displayed...

  • Filter recipient list

    • HELP_IHS_FILTER_RECEIVERLIST_DLG

    In this dialog, enter the filter criteria for displaying the (IHS) recipients in the list of search results. Buttons: Save and apply The settings are saved, accepted and applied immediately. Reset The settings are reset to the default values. Cancel The dialog is closed without saving and applying the settings...

  • Flat rate remuneration Detail

    • HELP_MV_SETUP_PAUSCHALVERGUETUNG_DLG

    In addition to the number, text and amount, the wage type and cycle must be selected and the script entered. Important The most important thing is that the number must be unique for all remunerations. (Remunerations as well as lump sum remuneration) Whether the flat rate is credited depends on the cycle and the script (program code). If the cycle per month is selected, the flat rate is only credited on a certain day in the month, provided that the script results in a quantity greater than 0 results. The corresponding day is set under General configuration (Settle on). The script can contain in the simplest case only a number or then a complicated query on the database. This function is very powerful and flexible, but requires some technical understanding. If you want to create program code, please you to contact our support. (See below for contact details). The script is executed during the payroll run for the corresponding day and employee. If the result is greater than 0, a lump sum will be will be charged. The following variables may be used for the script: (Input) dtDate: Date of the settlement day strText: Text of the flat-rate remuneration...

  • Form entry

    • HELP_FE

    Now you can find the manual of this module online on our webserver. This has the advantage that we can incorporate additions and changes more quickly and easily.

  • Form Entry: Assigning a Shipment to a Document

    • HELP_FE_VIEW_ADDSBBTODOCUMENT_DLG

    Assigning items to a document Now you can find the manual of this module online on our webserver. This has the advantage that we can incorporate additions and changes more quickly and easily...

  • Form entry: Enter unrecognized UPOCs

    • HELP_FE_VIEW_UPOC_ASSIGNMENT_DLG

    Capture unrecognized UPOCs Now you can find the manual of this module online on our webserver. This has the advantage that we can incorporate additions and changes more quickly and easily...

  • Formula for shipment reference

    • HELP_KEP_SETUP_ITEM_REFERENCE

    This setting defines a formula for the text of the custom shipment reference. The text generated with the help of this formula is transmitted to the CEP service manager for the shipment and printed on the shipment label. Default: <%ItemUPOC%> Formula content that does not correspond to a defined placeholder is copied unchanged into the text...

  • Francotyp MailReport: Import

    • HELP_FRANCOTYP_MAILREPORT

    General The import job is started manually. On the left of the Start button, the status of the status of the import is displayed. The associated log data is displayed in the list. First of all customers/cost centers are exported from CodX PostOffice, whose settings are set accordingly (see Export Customer/Cost Center). Then the shipment data is read in, validated, completed and imported. Only items that have been entered on the Carrier DPAG have been entered. (Database MailReport; TransactionView.Carrier = 0)...

  • Francotyp MailReport: Settings

    • HELP_FRANCOTYP_MAILREPORT_CONFIGURATION_CUSTFIELDS

    This dialog is used to make the settings for the Francotyp MailReport franking machine are made in this dialogue. Check database connection settings If you activate this function, the database connections are connections are checked. If the system is a test system or if you have have entered a test-database connection, the test-database connection is also test database connection will also be checked. Standard setting (110) for each customer/cost center If you use this function, the Custfield (TableID: 2015) of all customers/cost centers (CF:120: Export Customer/Cost Center to MailReport) is set accordingly. The value from the settings 110 is taken over. If this setting (110) is selected, it is only applied to the active customers/cost centers. the active customers/cost centers. If it is not selected, it is applied to all customers/cost centers. are applied...

  • Francotyp Postalia Commander

    • HELP_FPCommander

    Now you can find the manual of this module online on our webserver. This has the advantage that we can incorporate additions and changes more quickly and easily. Link to the manual of your version (PDF file)...

  • FrontDesk - Acceptance

    • HELP_FRONTDESK_RECEIVING

    This is where shipments are accepted. Existing consignments as well as new consignments to be to be entered are accepted. In each case a consignment label is printed. The prerequisite for this is that the corresponding license is available, that this workstation is is configured as a FrontDesk and also has at least one workstation assigned to it. This is done in the settings under Production / Workstations / Workstations. (See Settings) New broadcasts To enter a new shipment select the sender sender and the service and confirm this entry. For each further consignment only one confirmation, if necessary first select another service. select...

  • FrontDesk - Handover

    • HELP_FRONTDESK_HANDOVER

    Recipients of consignments can collect their pick up their deposited shipments. Items that have been routed to this workstation can then be received by the recipients. These were previously notified by e-mail. Each time they leave this register, the recipient must the recipient has to identify himself again. The prerequisite for this is that the corresponding license is available, that this workstation is is configured as a FrontDesk and also has at least one workstation assigned to it. This is done in the settings under Production / Workstations / Workstations. (See Settings) The recipient identifies himself...

  • FrontDesk - Identification

    • HELP_FRONTDESK_PERSONIDENTIFICATION

    Here you can store information for the identification can be stored here. New or temporary service cards can be registered here. (assign to a person) A new PIN can be assigned to a person. The prerequisite for this is that the corresponding license is available, that this workstation is is configured as a FrontDesk and also has at least one workstation assigned to it. This is done in the settings under Production / Workstations / Workstations. (See Settings) Register service card New or temporary service cards can be registered here. (assign to a person)...

  • FrontDesk - Scan shipment

    • HELP_FRONTDESK_HANDOVER_SBB

    Shipment UPOC can be read or entered here. can be entered. With Apply or ENTER the entered UPOC is taken over and then the corresponding programme selected in the consignment list. (Delivery) Status The status shows the detected value and its status. Valid values are green. Invalid red. Possible statuses...

  • General settings Userlog

    • HELP_CONFIGSERVER_SETUP_USERLOG

    On this settings page you can define which user log entries remain in the system for how long. There are 2 parameters for the default settings which are applied, if no user specific value has been defined, and a list of all the list of all the user log types currently in the system on which the default values can be overwritten. The actual deletion process is performed by the Cleanup module, which runs a job a job every 24 hours at 03:00. There are 2 different types of user log entries, which are used as follows: Linked entries These are user log entries that are linked as a log entry for a particular attribute of a defined table. As an example, changes in the district structure are logged, these entries are stored in the table with the the ID 2060 and contain the data record ID of the relevant district structure as additional information in the user log entry. This means that a unique link can be established from the user log entry to this district structure can be made. These user list entries have a standard storage period of 365 days. Unlinked entries These user log entries are log entries of modules independently of a database table. As an example is the job engine, which logs executed jobs in the user log. These user log entries have a standard storage period of 14 days. View...

  • Global CEP settings

    • HELP_KEP_GLOBAL_SETTINGS

    In this dialog, global settings are made that apply to all CEP service providers and all definitions together. The dialog is only available if the logged in user has admin rights. Setting Value Comment 001: Countries in EU (ISO2 codes)...

  • Global settings Acquisition

    • HELP_GLOBAL_CAPTURE_SETTINGS

    In this dialog, global, system-wide settings are made for entry with the sorting modules (MS/OS-AZD/IHS & MDE) are made. To edit these settings, the user must have the"Administrator" right! Logistics unit temporary storage for subsequent process Shipment entry IHS: Define here the logistics unit for the temporary storage of shipments at the subsequent process Shipment Entry IHS. Shipments to persons or customers/cost centers for which a subsequent process Shipment entry IHS is defined are routed to this logistics unit (or its carrier route). Click on the "..." button next to the display field and select the corresponding logistics unit. The name of the selected logistics unit is displayed in the display field. The following additional settings are available:...

  • GLS DeliveryAtWork Service

    • HELP_GLSDE_service_deliveryatwork

    With this additional service the GLS DeliveryAtWork Service is booked. If this additional service is selected, the following extended attributes must be entered: Recipient Phone no. Building Floor/Floor The following extended attributes are optional:...

  • GLS Deposit Service

    • HELP_GLSDE_SERVICE_Deposit

    This additional service is used to book the GLS Deposit Service. If this additional service is selected it is mandatory to enter the extended attribute Deposit instructionmust be specified! See also: GLS Germany Parcel Shipping GLS Germany Express Shipping

  • GLS FlexDelivery Service

    • HELP_GLSDE_SERVICE_FlexDelivery

    This additional service is used to book the GLS FlexDelivery Service. booked. If this additional service is selected, it is mandatory to specify the extended attribute Recipient EMail address must be specified! See also: GLS Germany Parcel Shipping GLS Germany Express Shipping

  • GLS Germany Express Shipping

    • HELP_GLSDE_PRODUCT_EXPRESS

    This service is used to send express parcels with GLS Germany as the service provider/deliverer. You can find more information here: GLS Express Shipping national GLS Express Shipping in Europe GLS Express shipping worldwide

  • GLS Germany Parcel Shipping

    • HELP_GLSDE_PRODUCT_PARCEL

    This service is used to send parcels with GLS Germany as the service provider/deliverer. You can find more information here: GLS Germany parcel shipping national GLS Germany parcel shipping international

  • Goods receipt manual scanner

    • HELP_WE

    With the goods receipt, shipments of different types are processed. Depending on the type of shipment processing can be different. The following describes the supported shipment types are described below. Wireless hand-held scanners are used in goods receipt. Alternatively, a barcode can be entered by hand in the field Scan-Data and the search can be started in this way. No printer is required for the acceptance of consignments. For most shipment types, shipments are are activated. This activation process can include the following include: An event is added to the shipment with the acceptance Goods Receipt is added to the shipment. Based on the setting in the corresponding module a district assignment is made or the district is deleted. district is deleted...

  • Goods receipt scanner dialog

    • HELP_WE_SCANNER

    With the goods receipt scanner the different types of consignments by means of a scanner supported by the system. scanner supported by the system. In the dialog the desired scanner is scanner with which the consignments are scanned. Thereby scanner with a feeder, which can read in several items. multiple items. If you are in possession of an Abby BCR licence license, all barcodes on the scanned shipments are recognized and and processed with the same process as described in the incoming goods manual scanner. The scanned shipment is stored with the shipment. The scanned images are displayed in the dialog, if front and back are scanned then scanned then 2 images are displayed next to each other. Process description When the scanning process is started by the button "Depending on the selection and settings of the scanner, only one sheet or several sheets are of the scanner, only one sheet or several sheets are scanned. For multiple sheets as well as front and back scanning, the process is the same as if the process is the same as if a single sheet is scanned. Process of a single scan: An image or page is scanned with the selected selected scanner. Depending on the setting of the Duplex option, the front and back sides are scanned. The scanned documents are checked for barcodes. All detected barcodes are examined by means of the WE recognition process and it is whether the item is one of the supported item types. are involved. The first barcode of a scan that is found and correctly recognized is scans is processed, the rest are ignored...

  • Group of people

    • HELP_PV_PERSONENGRUPPE_DLG

    Here you have the possibility to enter all important data of this person group. The only mandatory information is the name, which must be entered so that the person group can be added. Settings Custfield values can be set to each person group. People Here they add all the associated people...

  • Handheld scanner test dialog for R

    • HELP_HANDHELD_SETUP_TESTRFID

    This test dialog is used to test the reading of handheld devices and display the read data. data read. In addition, the 5 different signals that (depending on the device) can be tested. In the headline on the dialog you can see which device you have selected and which applies to this test dialog applies. Please note, that scans from other devices can be read devices can be read, but in this dialog they are only displayed as is displayed as a scan from another device. If the device under test is an image scanner, an image preview is displayed in the lower half of the dialog. Operation Scan a barcode or an image with the previously selected previously selected device, and you will see the following information in the display panel: Reader type Connection location (which serial COM port)...

  • Hotkey Keyboard Layout

    • HELP_HOTKEYMAPPER

    Help dialog to view the keyboard layout of the active module. This list varies from module to module, because the function key assignment is individual. View This dialog shows in a list all key combinations used by the hotkeymapper. The following columns are displayed: HotKey: The key combination that is used. Different key combinations can be used, e.g. the combination e.g. the combination of Control and Shift, which is represented as CTRL+ALT. Description: The textual description of the key and its use...

  • Image acquisition

    • HELP_BE

    The Image Capture module can be used to display and capture shipment images. Shipment images serve, for example, as evidence in the case of damaged shipments. To use use the Image Capture module, you need the appropriate licence, the necessary access rights and a Cx photo scanner (handheld scanner with photo function) for capturing. The Image Capture module can be operated completely with the keyboard. A user with read-only rights can also use the image capture. He can enter a capture a consignment UPOC and display the existing images. However, no new images can be captured and no images can be deleted. The UPOC or alternative code of a consignment can be read in via scanner or keyboard. The consignment must already be entered in the system. No new consignments can be entered, only images of existing consignments can be captured. One image can be captured for each UPOC or alternative code. For further images, the consignment must first be searched for again. New images can come from two different sources: - Capture with connected CxPhotoscanner - From a file on the computer Capture process...

  • Image acquisition

    • HELP_POLIBRARY_FOTO

    This window opens by selecting the [Photo] button or the checkbox Photo after each shipment/Automatic. In addition to the address and format photos (with OS - OCR sorting), further photos can be saved here for a consignment (also with MS - manual sorting). (also for MS - manual sorting). A special scanner is used to take the photo, which not only reads 1- and 2D barcodes, but can also create photos at the same time. photos at the same time. These photos are displayed in a preview and stored after the definable time for sending. If the picture is is not good enough, a new photo can be taken as long as the scroll bar is running. The previous picture will then not be saved. This takes place only after this time has expired. If the option Photo after each consignment was selected, the consignment UPOC of the last recorded consignment is directly transferred into the UPOC field. In the settings under Production/Camera, you can configure your own image section and camera settings for image capture. can be configured...

  • ImageParser elements

    • HELP_CXLETTERSCAN_USECASE_CAPTURE

    #ImageParser

    ImageParser elements The use case "Capture" supports the following ImageParser elements (#ImageParser): ElementName Content Receiver...

  • ImageParser settings

    • HELP_IMAGE_PARSER_SETUP

    #ImageParser

    The ImageParser (#ImageParser) analyzes images which are read from a source supported by CodX PostOffice. Various elements like address or texts, barcode and UPOC are recognized. Settings are needed to recognize these elements. On this settings page, the rules, which are captured in XML format, are managed. Rules can be imported from a file, exported to a file, deleted and tested. The specification of the rules can be found underImageParser Syntax. View On the dialog you see a list with all available ImageParser configurations. On the right side are the buttons with the available functions. The ImageParser configurations shown in the list are validated when they are displayed. If an existing ImageParser setting is not correct, the corresponding entry in the list is highlighted inred. Operation Refresh The list with all available ImageParser settings is reloaded and displayed. The current selection is retained...

  • ImageParser settings

    • HELP_IMAGE_PARSER_SETUP_CUSTFIELDS

    #ImageParser

    #ImageParser In this dialog global, system-wide settings for the textbox detector in the image parser are made. To edit these settings the user must have the right"Administrator"! For more detailed information about exclusion zone, franking zone and encoding zone see AdminDoc #ImageParser. The following settings are available: Setting Allowed values Default value Comment Setting...

  • ImageParser Syntax

    • HELP_IMAGE_PARSER_SYNTAX

    The ImageParser is a module of CodX PostOffice to control the processing of images. An XML configuration file specifies how the image should be processed. The XML file consists of rules (ParserRule) with picture elements (Element) and evaluation criteria (Criteria). Example ImageParser configuration file <ImageParser Name="Parser 1" Timeout="1000" Reference="SN-AZD, FE" Remark="This is a remark"> <ParserRule Name="Role 1" Rotate="0, 30, 60, 90" Origin="top_left" Trim= "Bottom, Right" FirstPage="1" LastPage="3"> <Element Name="Element 1" x="100 px" y="200 px" h="50 mm" w="40 mm" Type="Text" Rotate="0, 90, 180, 270" ValidValue="[a-z]+" Prerequisite="Mandatory" SBB-CF="Alternative code"></element> <Element Name="Element 2" x="200 px" y="400 px" h="50 mm" w="40 mm" Type="Barcode" BarcodeType="All" Rotate="0" PreProcess="BRectS" InvalidValue="(?<Invalid>[^[0-9a-zA-Z()-/\s\öäüéàèÖÄÜ])"></Element> <element name="element 3" x="300 px" y="500 px" h="50 mm" w="40 mm" Type="UPOC" Rotate="0" ValidValue="[0-9]+"></Element> <Element Name="PostAdr1" Type="PostalAddress" ValidValue="[AdrLevel_City]"></element> <Criteria Name="Criteria 1" Operation="AND" ElementName="Element 1" RegEx="[a-z]+"></Criteria> <Criteria Name="Criteria 2" Operation="AND" ElementName="Element 2" RegEx="[0-9]+"></Criteria> <Criteria Name="Criteria 3" Operation="OR" ElementName=" Element3" RegEx="04[0-9]+"></Criteria> <Criteria Name="Criteria 3" Operation="AND" ElementName="PostAdr1" RegEx="[AdrLevel_City]"></Criteria> </ParserRule> <ParserRule Name="Role 2" Rotate="0, -30, -60, -90" Origin="top_left" Trim="Top" > <Element Name="Element 1" x="100 px" y="200 px" h="50 mm" w="40 mm" Type="Text" Rotate="0, 90, 180, 270" ValidValue="[a-z]+"></element> <Element Name="Element 2" x="200 px" y="400 px" h="50 mm" w="40 mm" Type="Barcode" Rotate="0" ValidValue="[a-z]+"></Element> <Element Name="Element 3" x="300 px" y="500 px" h="50 mm" w="40 mm" Type="UPOC" Rotate="0" ValidValue="[0-9]+"></element> <Criteria Name="Criteria 1" Operation="AND" ElementName="Element 1" RegEx="[a-z]+"></Criteria> <Criteria Name="Criteria 2" Operation="AND" ElementName="Element 2" RegEx="[0-9]+"></Criteria> <Criteria Name="Criteria 3" Operation="OR" ElementName="Element 3" RegEx="04[0-9]+"></Criteria> </ParserRule> </ImageParser>tags. The XML configuration file is structured as follows: ImageParser Contains 1 or more tags of 'ParserRule'. Attribute Description Name Name of the ImageParser Timeout Maximum processing time in milliseconds. When the timeout is reached, processing is aborted and no result is returned.This attribute is optional, the default value is 1000 ms and the maximum allowed timeout is 99999 ms. If the timeout is 0 or less, the timeout is set to the default value, if it is greater than the maximum allowed value, it is reset to the maximum value. Reference Reference to the module/function that uses this ImageParser. If an ImageParser is used in multiple modules, the module names are listed separated by commas. The following values are possible: R-SCAN CxLetterScan in 'R-Scan' mode CxLetterScan in 'Maintenance' mode Module R-Scan SCANNER CxLetterScan in 'Scanner' mode CAPTURE CxLetterScan in 'Capture' mode SORT CxLetterScan in 'Sort' mode DIGITAL Digitizing Remark Remark about the ImageParser. This attribute is optional ParserRule Contains 1 or more tags of 'Element' and 'Criteria'. Attribute Description Name Name of the ParserRule Rotate List of angles with which the value is to be read. The angles are separated by commas. The angles increase clockwise from 0 to 360°. ATTENTION: Each additional angle multiplies the processing time additionally! Origin Origin of the image. All coordinates refer to this origin. Possible values: - top_left - top_right - bottom_left (default) - bottom_right This attribute is optional. Trim Optional. If this attribute is defined, the corresponding part of the image is cut off, which is significantly darker than the rest of the image. Possible values are a combination of the following values, separated by commas: - Top - Bottom - Left - Right FirstPage This attribute is only used when several documents are processed at the same time, for example, in the digitization. From this page on, this ParserRule is applied. If the page to be processed is smaller, the ParserRule is is ignored. LastPage This attribute is only used if several documents are processed at the same time, e.g. in digitizing. digitization. Up to this page this ParserRule is applied. If the page to be processed is larger, the ParserRule is is ignored. Element Describes the element to be parsed. Attribute Description Name Name of the element, must be present! The CxLetterScan requires certain elements depending on the mode (use case). See the online help for the corresponding mode. Type Type of element; optional, default value: Text. The following types are possible: - Text: The section of the element is analyzed with OCR and the recognized text is output. - Barcode: The section of the element is analyzed for a barcode. - UPOC: The section of the element is checked for a barcode and whether it is a valid UPOC (type, client, ID, checksum). - PostalAddress: The section of the element is analyzed with OCR and the address tokenizer and the recognized address is output. See also Postal Addresses. x X-coordinate of the upper left corner of the element. The coordinate refers to the origin of the image. Optionally, a unit can be specified, default = px (pixel). The following units are possible: - px: Pixel (default) - %: Percent, related to the whole image - mm: Millimenter (only if resolution is known) y Y-coordinate of the upper left corner of the element. The coordinate refers to the origin of the image. Optionally, a unit can be specified, default = px (pixel). The following units are possible: - px: Pixel (default) - %: Percent, related to the whole image - mm: Millimenter (only if resolution is known). h Height of the element. Optionally, a unit can be specified, default = px (pixel). The following units are possible: - px: Pixel (default) - %: Percent, related to the whole image - mm: Millimenter (only if resolution is known). w Width of the element. Optionally, a unit can be specified, default = px (pixel). The following units are possible: - px: Pixel (default) - %: Percent, related to the whole image - mm: Millimenter (only if resolution is known). BarcodeType Barcode type. Only relevant for type'Barcode'. Several barcode types can be specified. These are specified separated by commas. The following barcode types are possible: - All (or no specification): All barcode types listed below are searched for. - All1D: All 1D barcode types are searched for. - All2D: Searches for all 2D barcode types. - AustralianPostCode - Aztec - Circular2of5 - Codabar - CodablockF - Code128 - Code16K - Code39 - Code39Extended - Code39Mod43 - Code39Mod43Extended - Code93 - DataMatrix - EAN13 - EAN2 - EAN5 - EAN8 - GS1 - GS1DataBarExpanded - GS1DataBarExpandedStacked - GS1DataBarLimited - GS1DataBarStacked - GS1DataBarOmnidirectional - GTIN12 (UPC-A with 12 symbols) - GTIN13 (EAN-13) - GTIN14 (I2of5 with 14 digits) - GTIN8 (EAN-8) - IntelligentMail - Interleaved2of5 - ITF14 (I2of5 with 14 digits) - MaxiCode - MICR - MicroPDF - MSI - PatchCode - PDF417 - Pharmacode - PostNet - PZN - QRCode - RoyalMail - RoyalMailKIX - TriopticCode39 - UPCA - UPCE - UPU This attribute is optional, default value is 'All'. Rotate Optional, default = 0 (0°). Angle in degrees [°] by which the element must be rotated to be readable horizontally from left to right . The angles are recorded separated by commas. The angles increase clockwise from 0 to 360°. Negative entries are allowed, these are automatically converted to the corresponding positive angle, e.g. -20° = + 340°. The rotation of the element is done after the rotation of the full image (see attribute Rotate of Tag ParserRule) and after cutting the element according to the attributes y,x,h, w. ATTENTION: Each additional angle multiplies the processing time additionally! To avoid incorrect readings of barcode and especially UPOC elements, it is important that the possible angles are defined correctly. defined. The internally used barcode OCR engine supports the following discrete rotation angles: 0°, 11°, 22°, 45°, 90°, 135°, 158°, 169°, 180°, 191°, 202°, 225°, 270°, 315°, 338°, 349°. The specified angles are rounded up/down to the corresponding nearest of these angles. Additional angle specifications are mandatory if the twist is greater than the arc tangent (tan-1) of the ratio of bar height to bar code length. Ex: bar height = 10 mm, total length = 50 mm. Thus: Arctan(10/50)=11.3°. So: If the barcode can be rotated by more than 11° the value 11 must be added as rotation angle. PreProcess Optional, preprocessing of the image for barcode OCR reading, is only available for the type barcode! Default value: <blank> (no preprocessing) The following preprocessings are possible: - BRectS: Cut out small used areas and single processing. Improves the reading of barcodes and DataMatrix. Long processing time. - BRectM: Cutting of medium used areas and single processing. Improves the reading of barcodes and DataMatrix. Medium processing time. - BRectL: Cutting of large used areas and single processing. Improves the reading of barcodes and DataMatrix. Short processing time. ValidValue RegEx expression defining a valid value of the element. The element has a valid value only if it was checked according to the RegEx expression. Otherwise the value of the element is empty. Not to be confused with 'RegEx' from the criterion. If the attribute 'ValidValue' is not specified or empty, the following default values apply: - Text: "[0-9,a-z,A-Z]+" - Barcode: "[0-9,a-z,A-Z]+" - UPOC: <empty>, the value is checked by verifying the UPOC syntax. If a RegEx is specified, it is additionally evaluated according to the UPOC syntax. InvalidValue RegEx expression which defines all invalid values of an element. The element must not contain any of these invalid values, in which case the element is valid. If this element is captured, it takes precedence over the ValidValue element. If the attribute 'InvalidValue' is not specified or empty, the default value remains empty and the rule for 'ValidValue' is active. OCRMinConfidence Optional, default = 0, only available for the types Text and PostalAddress. The attribute defines the minimum quality(confidence) that the complete text recognized by OCR must have for further processing. must have for further processing. The global setting xxx is applied for each individual line in any case! Range: 0% ... 100% Well recognized texts have a confidence >= 50%, bad < 30%. Prerequisite This attribute is only used for digitization. application. It defines whether the value of this element element must be present in order to complete digitization. to complete the digitization. If the element is not found, manual manual postprocessing or capture is mandatory. must be carried out. The following values are possible: - Optional - Mandatory - None SBB-CF This attribute is only used for digitization. application. It defines, in which consignment-custfield the value of the current element is to be stored. should be stored. Criteria Describes the criteria that must be met for this ParserRule to take effect. If the criteria are not met, the next ParserRule is processed. This must not be confused with 'ValidValue' of the element! Attribute Description Name Name of the criterion Operation Specifies how the criterion is logically linked. Possible values: 'AND', 'OR'. ElementName Name of the element to be checked. RegEx RegEx expression which must be fulfilled. Elements of type PostalAddress do NOT support criterias, the validity is determined by internal rules! Postal addresses Elements of the type PostalAddress are processed as follows: The attributes x, y, h, w are optional. If they are not specified (or all are 0), the entire image is scanned for text blocks. If the attributes x, y, h, w are defined then only the defined section is used (analogous to element type "Text"). The found text blocks are sorted according to certain criteria and analyzed with OCR and the SortTree. The first/best recognized address is output. If NO value is defined as ValidValue , all detected address blocks are returned as string, there is NO analysis with the SortTree! Specific attributes for element type "PostalAddress The following attributes can be defined specifically for elements of the type "PostalAddress": Attribute Description ValidValue The following pseudo regex (default: <empty>) are supported: - <empty> (default) - [AdrLevel_Country] - [AdrLevel_City] - [AdrLevel_Street] - [AdrLevel_House] - [AdrLevel_Name] CutLength Optional, default = 0 (no exclusion zone). Defines an "exclusion zone" in[mm] for automatically found text blocks (x,y,h,w = 0) on both long sides of the image. Detected text blocks that overlap this zone are ignored. CutWidth Optional, default = 0 (no exclusion zone). Defines an "exclusion zone" in[mm] for automatically found text blocks (x,y,h,w = 0) on both short sides of the image. Detected text blocks overlapping this zone are ignored. ValidateAddress Optional, value range: 0/1, default: 0 Defines how the addresses found according to ValidValue are checked. 0: The check is performed by decomposition via tokenizer and test for non-empty (except for the address defined by ValidValue defined level) 1: The check is made against the area data of the district administration. The address must be valid up to at least the ValidValue defined level. Functionality The functionality and further information can be found in the AdminDoc (search for 'ImageParser'). See also: ImageParser settings ImageParser Settings Textbox Detector Attribute...

  • ImageParser Test

    • HELP_IMAGE_PARSER_SETUP_DETAIL

    #ImageParser

    In this test dialog ImageParser configurations (#ImageParser) can be tested. The ImageParser configuration selected in the settings dialog is checked if it is correct, if not, an error message is displayed and the test dialog is closed. Otherwise, an image can be read either from a source supported by CodX PostOffice, e.g. scanner or camera, or an image file from the hard disk, which will be used as a reference image to check the configuration. After a test, the result is displayed below the image as an XML fragment with the image analysis information. View At the top of the test dialog, the name of the image parser configuration, the usage and the description are displayed. These attributes are determined from the XML configuration file. Below this is the display of the image that is used for testing, if one was loaded or scanned. Below the image is a text field in which the result is displayed as an XML fragment after a successful test. On the right side are the buttons with the available functions. Operation Close Closes this dialog, no data will be changed...

  • Import tariff model

    • HELP_TARIFMODELL_IMPORT

    #DIE-POSTTarifmodell

    With the tariff model import you can import services, additional services, service provider zones, articles and article prices. In the system tasks you have the possibility to import different tariff models. (TM:Standard tariff model Import, TM: DHL Express tariff model Import, ....) For service providers such as DIE POST, DHL Express, DHL Paket, UPS, FedEx, DPD you will find here Zip files for download. Unpack the zip-file and make sure that that the path of the 5 tasks of the import job is set correctly. is set correctly. (Task to transform the ...) (#DIE-POSTTarifmodell) Settings in the Custfields Rate Model (Table 1015) For the import to work, valid values must still be entered for the following Custfields valid values must be entered: (for ID = 0)...

  • Index Reports CodX PostOffice

    • HELP_RP_INDEX

    The following index shows all reports available in CodX PostOffice.

  • Intranet WebApp Settings

    • HELP_CONFIGSERVER_SETUP_INTRANETWEBAPP

    On this dialog you will find Custfields which are needed for the Intranet WebApp settings. Furthermore, you can import or save the configuration files for the Intranet WebApp here. In the AdminDoc you can find more information about the Intranet WebApp. General settings...

  • Introduction

    • HELP_STATUS

    Now you can find the manual of this module online on our webserver. This has the advantage that we can incorporate additions and changes more quickly and easily. Link to the manual of your version (PDF file)...

  • Introduction

    • HELP_USERLOG

    The UserLog shows you which steps have been taken in the respective modules. So you always have an overview and can follow this up. A maximum of 3000 entries are displayed, regardless of the filter. If more than 3000 entries are available but only 3000 are displayed, this is noted in the headline and displayed in red color. Call UserLog There are several ways to access the UserLog: You can start it from the menu. Or you can open it directly from the module if the corresponding button is visible in it...

  • Invoice - eInvoice

    • HELP_FAVIEW_TAB_RECHNUNG_TAB_ERECHNUNG

    #eInvoice

    Here the eInvoice is displayed in XML format. (#eInvoice)

  • Invoice - general

    • HELP_FAVIEW_TAB_RECHNUNG_TAB_ALLGEMEIN

    In this tab, data of the invoice are displayed, most of which cannot be changed. A few can be adjusted, but only while the bill is pending. These are: - creation date - invoice category - eInvoice...

  • Invoice - Info

    • HELP_FAVIEW_TAB_RECHNUNG_TAB_INFO

    Some data about the invoice is displayed here. These data are grouped by: - General - eInvoice (if it is an eInvoice) - SEPA (if set)...

  • Invoice - Invoice item

    • HELP_FAVIEW_TAB_RECHNUNG_TAB_POSITION

    The processed invoice must contain at least one invoice position. If you have not entered one, you can still save the invoice by agreeing to create an empty position. You enter and process all invoice items here. List...

  • Invoice - payment term

    • HELP_FAVIEW_TAB_RECHNUNG_TAB_ZB

    You can select a payment term from the list. The values saved under the selected terms of payment are automatically transferred. However, you can change these values as required. The content of the Text field is printed on the invoice. printed. The placeholders are replaced by the actual values. How the placeholders are used and an example can be found in the following link(Placeholders and their use) The payment term is taken from the invoice definitions of the customer. The terms of payment are entered under Settings / Invoicing system / Terms of payment...

  • Invoice - Texts

    • HELP_FAVIEW_TAB_RECHNUNG_TAB_TEXT

    Publicity Release The advertising message is copied from the settings during the invoice run (invoicing system - FA Invoice Client) and added to each new invoice. Header text The field can be filled in as desired and is printed on the invoice before the invoice items. Invoice items. The "Header text" is taken from the invoice definitions (header line) during the invoice run. The length depends on the configuration of the invoice forms...

  • Invoice item

    • HELP_FA_DIALOG_RECHNUNGPOSITION

    With this dialog you can enter or change the data of an invoice item. By selecting a service, you limit the selection of articles. You can also select an article directly by selecting an entry with the mouse, or select the article selection list and enter a specific article number. All the associated values are taken over for the selected article. The order date is taken from the orders during the invoice run. When creating an invoice manually and adding an item item, it should be set to the day on which the service was performed. In this way, evaluations can be created over the period of the service performance (or the order date) can be created...

  • Invoice run: Settings

    • HELP_FA_SETUP_RECHNUNGSLAUF_CF

    In this dialog the Custfields definitions for the invoice run are made in this dialog. Please note, that the settings can be different for each invoice run. For further help on edit custfields, please refer to the corresponding help. Available options Designation (Custfieldname) Value (table ID: 1605, lID = X)...

  • Invoice warnings

    • HELP_FAVIEW_DIALOG_RECHNUNG_WARNING

    Certain requirements must be met for SEPA invoices. If this is not the case, the invoices receive a corresponding warning. In addition, depending on the settings, plausibility tests are carried out after the invoice has been created. If the invoice is corrected accordingly and the plausibility test is carried out successfully, the warning entry is deleted again. deleted. However, the warnings can also be acknowledged. This means that the next time you search for invoices with warnings, they will no longer appear in the in the result list. However, if the invoice is processed again without correcting the error, a warning entry will be created again...

  • Invoicing

    • HELP_FA

    Now you can find the manual of this module online on our webserver. This has the advantage that we can incorporate additions and changes more quickly and easily. Link to the manual of your version (PDF file)...

  • JetMail

    • HELP_Jetmail

    Now you can find the manual of this module online on our webserver. This has the advantage that we can incorporate additions and changes more quickly and easily. Link to the manual of your version (PDF file)...

  • Job 0108:0001 PV: PIN allocation

    • HELP_JOB_0108_0001_PV_PIN_VERGABE

    General Creates PINs for persons without a PIN or with an expired PIN. If a person has at least one manually deactivated PIN, then no PIN is automatically assigned for this person. Settings Designation Value...

  • Job Engine - Job Detail

    • HELP_JOBENGINESERVER_SETUP_JOBDETAIL

    This dialog shows the details of a job and allows you to edit them. For predefined system events, not all attributes can be edited, the affected input fields are disabled. A job consists of one or more schedules that define when this job is to be started and one or more schedules that define when this job is to be started, when this job is to be started and one or more tasks that are to be tasks that are executed and trigger a process. View In the first frame "General settings" contains the settings for this job. job. Below this are the two lists with the schedules and tasks contained in this job. schedules and tasks with the available functions on the right side. functions on the right side. On the dialog there are 2 buttons for help are displayed, the first upper one is a specified help for this job, the second bottom one is this help. Operation Save Saves all settings on the job...

  • Job status of current lettershop jobs

    • HELP_JOBVIEW_LSSTATUS

    In this detail dialog you see an overview of all currently running jobs for Lettershop. The display is automatically updated every 5 seconds. When the Lettershop job is finished, the corresponding entries disappear from the list. View The dialog has the two buttons "Close" and "Refresh", as well as a list of all currently running Lettershop processing. The files to be imported per lettershop partner that are being processed are displayed. The processing status corresponds to the process of the job. The individual processes are displayed textually. The following fields in the list show the number of items in total and how many of them are processed, saved and incorrect. Operation Update Refreshes the list of Lettershop jobs. This is done automatically every 5 seconds, but can be forced at any time with this button be forced...

  • Jobs

    • HELP_JOBVIEW

    In the Jobs module, tasks of various types are displayed clearly and summarized. Here you will find the entered postcon, LetterShop and Mailalliance SEM jobs and can edit or delete them. Different types of jobs have different job details, which are displayed are displayed according to the selected job. Please note that for LetterShop jobs the customer is only displayed if the same assigned customer is present on is present on all mailings, otherwise <several> will be displayed. Filter settings You can use the filter settings to restrict the display of jobs in different ways. On the one hand, you have the option of displaying only jobs that were imported within a certain period. Here it is possible to restrict the date and time, in order to be able to set the filter as precisely as possible, if required. In addition, you can define which types of jobs should be displayed; whether Letter-Shop, Mailalliance SEM and/or postcon jobs...

  • Jobs

    • HELP_JOBVIEW_DETAILDLG

    Here you have the possibility to change the job identifier and the name as well as to determine the type of activation for the stored for the job. Activating a shipment means, depending on the type of shipment and the settings for activation that a new district is determined, that the overflow district and/or alternative district is applied and that the planned delivery and order date are updated. Job Details The customer name, the job identifier and the job and job remark as well as the number of shipments that belong to the job. In addition a grouping of the number of consignments is displayed according to the planned planned delivery date is displayed. Below this are the filters of the which are deposited to the selected job and the settings for Settings for activating and setting the job date. Activation types Please select one of the following activation types for the consignments stored in this job and set the set the required filters depending on the type. With this filter you select for which shipments you want to change want to change the order date or the planned delivery date. The following are available for are available for selection:...

  • Jobs

    • HELP_JOBVIEW_UPOC_IMPORTDLG

    Here you can import transmissions from a file file. To do this, select an import file and press the button Load data. All transmissions from the import file are displayed in the list. After loading all shipments have the status Unchecked. (traffic light grey) If you leave the dialog with Apply, the system checks whether the imported items exist and belong to the corresponding job. belong to. Only consignments that meet these criteria are transferred to the calling instance. instance. A maximum of 100,000 items can be imported. can be imported. Functions Load data All items from the import file are filled into the list. After loading all shipments have the status Unchecked. (traffic light grey)...

  • JobView / CommonTools - Check expiring licenses

    • HELP_JOB_0102_0001_COMMON_TOOLS_CHECK_EXPIRING_LICENSE

    #License

    General Checks cyclically every 12 hours for expiring licenses. If licenses are found, a warning is written to the syslog and userlog and a WatchDog alarm is triggered. Further infromation about the task and general licenses was marked in the admindoc with "#License". Settings Designation...

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB

    Now you can find the manual of this module online on our webserver. This has the advantage that we can incorporate additions and changes more quickly and easily. Link to the "JobView" manual of your version (PDF file) Link to the TNT Interface manual for your version (PDF file)...

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0000_0001_SORTTREE_MAP_AKTUALISIEREN

    General Checks if the map files of the SortTree are up to date and correct. If not, the newest ones are fetched from the database. Settings No specific settings necessary...

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0000_0002_SORTTREE_GENERATOR

    Checks for changes in the territory and county data and creates the SortTree map file if necessary. Settings No specific settings necessary.

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0000_0003_SORTTREE__PPS_AKT_SENDUNGEN

    Calculates/updates the number of shipments per district and delivery day Settings No specific settings necessary.

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0001_0001_SVSERVER_BILDER_NACHRECHNEN

    General Recalculates the number of shipment images per shipment/box/bundle Settings No specific settings necessary

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0002_0001_RECHNUNGSSERVER_STD_FIBU_EXPORT

    General Standard FIBU Export Settings Designation Value...

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0002_0002_RECHNUNGSSERVER_SEPA_MANDAT_IMPORT

    General Imports a file with SEPA mandates Settings Designation Value...

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0002_0003_RECHNUNGSSERVER_SEPA_MANDAT_EXPORT

    General Exports SEPA mandates to a file Settings Designation Value...

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0002_0004_VI_VA_FIBU_EXPORT

    General Vi&Va FIBU Export Settings Designation Value...

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0002_0005_RECHNUNGSSERVER_TRANSFER_E_RECHNUNGEN

    General Transmits eInvoices Settings No specific settings necessary...

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0003_0001_CLEANUP_MARK_BILDER

    General Marks all broadcast images for deletion that need to be deleted. need to be Settings No specific settings necessary...

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0003_0002_CLEANUP_DEL_USERLOG

    General Deletes all user log entries based on the age specified in the settings. set age Settings No specific settings necessary...

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0003_0003_CLEANUP_DEL_BILDER

    General Deletes all broadcast images in the image database that are marked for deletion. are marked for deletion Settings No specific settings necessary...

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0004_0001_DBMAINTENANCE_TRANSFER_BACKUP_FILES

    General Transfers the oldest existing database backup files to a FTP server and deletes them after successful transfer. Settings No specific settings necessary...

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0004_0002_DBMAINTENANCE_REINDEXIEREN

    General Reindexes all CodX PostOffice databases in different ways depending on the in different ways depending on the level of fragmentation Settings No specific settings necessary...

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0004_0003_DBMAINTENANCE_BACKUP_IMAGE

    General Creates a backup of the CodX PostOffice Image database to the hard drive Settings No specific settings necessary...

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0004_0004_DBMAINTENANCE_BACKUP_POSTOFFICE

    General Creates a backup of the CodX PostOffice database to the hard drive Settings No specific settings necessary...

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0004_0005_DBMAINTENANCE_BACKUP_ARCHIVE

    General Creates a backup of the CodX PostOffice archive database to the hard disk Settings No specific settings necessary...

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0005_0001_IHSSERVER_PAKADOO

    General Fetches the PAK ID for all persons who have activated private delivery the PAK ID and sends its shipment data to Pakadoo. Settings No specific settings necessary...

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0006_0001_FASERVER_UAD

    General Job for automatic recalculation of effective order quantities Settings No specific settings necessary...

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0006_0002_FASERVER_STD_KUNDENIMPORT

    General Standard customer import including contact person and Account manager Settings Designation Value...

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0006_0003_FASERVER_UPS_TARIFIMPORT

    General Job to import the UPS tariff model by means of articles, services, article prices, DLZones, links to additional additional services and SBBCustfield Settings Designation Value...

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0006_0004_FASERVER_TNT-EXPRESS_TARIFIMPORT

    General Job to import the TNT-Express tariff model by means of articles, services, article prices, DLZones, connections to additional services and SBBCustfield Settings Designation Value...

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0006_0005_FASERVER_STD_TARIFIMPORT

    General Job to import the standard tariff model by means of articles, services, article prices, DLZones, connections to additional additional services and SBBCustfield Settings Designation Value...

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0006_0006_FASERVER_STD_TARIFEXPORT

    General Job to export the standard tariff model by means of articles, services, article prices, DLZones, links to additional additional services and SBBCustfield Settings Designation Value...

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0006_0007_FASERVER_FEDEX_TARIFIMPORT

    General Job to import the FedEx tariff model by means of articles, services, article prices, DLZones, connections to additional additional services and SBBCustfield Settings Designation Value...

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0006_0008_FASERVER_DPD_TARIFIMPORT

    General Job to import the DPD tariff model by means of articles, services, article prices, DLZones, connections to additional additional services and SBBCustfield Settings Designation Value...

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0006_0009_FASERVER_DIEPOST_TARIFIMPORT

    General Job to import the DIE POST tariff model by means of articles, services, article prices, DLZones and connections to additional services Settings Designation Value...

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0006_0010_FASERVER_DIEPOST_TARIFEXPORT

    General TM: DIE POST tariff model export Settings Designation Value...

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0006_0011_FASERVER_DHL_PAKET_TARIFIMPORT

    General Job to import the DHL Paket tariff model by means of articles, services, article prices, DLZones, connections to additional additional services and SBBCustfield Settings Designation Value...

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0006_0012_FASERVER_DHL_EXPRESS_TARIFIMPORT

    General Job to import the DHL Express tariff model by means of articles, services, article prices, DLZones, connections to additional additional services and SBBCustfield Settings Designation Value...

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0006_0013_FASERVER_KND-KST_EXPORT

    General Exports customer and cost centers to a CSV file Settings Designation Value...

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0006_0014_FASERVER_AUFTRAG_IMPORT

    General Imports jobs Settings Designation Value...

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0007_0001_SAVESENUNGSSERVER_STD_SEVENT_IMPORT

    General Imports shipment events from a CSV file Settings Designation Value...

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0007_0002_SAVESENUNGSSERVER_STATISTIK_ERFASSUNG

    General Cyclical recalculation of entry services for shipments Settings No specific settings necessary

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0007_0101_SSI_SENDUNGEN_MARKIEREN

    General Marks items that are not available in SorterSendungView. are available. Settings No specific settings necessary

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0007_0201_SSI_EMP_ADR_AUS_IMAGE

    General Determines recipient address from transmission images. Settings No specific settings necessary

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0007_0301_SAVESENDUNGSSERVER_AKTUALISIERE_AUS EDITOR

    General Updates shipments that have been edited with the shipment editor. have been Settings No specific settings necessary

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0008_0001_CONFIGSERVER_UPOC-MANDANT_AUTOIMPORT

    General Updates the UPOC clients (downloads the current clients from CodX and updates the database) Settings Designation Value...

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0008_0002_CONFIGSERVER_CODE_PARSINGRULE_IMPORT

    General Job to import the Code- & ParsingRule for CodeParser Settings Designation Value...

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0008_0005_CONFIGSERVER_UPOC-MANDANT_IMPORT

    General Updates the UPOC clients (imports and updates the clients) Settings No specific settings necessary

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0011_0001_LETTERSHOP_IMPORT

    General Processes LetterShop files from LetterShop partners Settings Designation Value...

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0012_0001_YHM_ERINNERUNG_FACH_NICHT_GELEERT

    General Job sends messages if tray was not emptied Settings No specific settings necessary.

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0012_0002_YHM_COURIER_STATUS_GEAENDERT

    General Job sends messages when status of courier order changes Settings No specific settings necessary.

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0012_0003_YHM_SENDUNGSAVIS_DIG_SENDUNG

    General Job sends messages during digital transmission Settings No specific settings necessary.

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0012_0004_YHM_SENDUNGSAVIS_AUSGEHENDE-SENDUNG_ABSENDER

    General Job sends messages to sender on outgoing transmission Settings No specific settings necessary.

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0012_0005_YHM_SENDUNGSAVIS_ERFASSUNG_EINGEHEND

    General Job sends messages when inbound shipment is captured Settings No specific settings necessary.

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0012_0006_YHM_SENDUNGSAVIS_FACHZUORDNUNG

    General Job sends messages for subject assignment Settings No specific settings necessary.

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0012_0007_YHM_SENDUNGSAVIS_ZUSTELLUNG_EINGEHEND

    General Job sends messages on delivery of inbound shipments Settings No specific settings necessary.

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0012_0008_YHM_ZWANGSENTLEERUNG

    General Job sends messages when MBS is force emptied Settings No specific settings necessary.

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0012_0009_YHM_SENDUNGSAVIS_SENDUNG_ZURUECK_ABSENDER

    General Job sends messages when shipment is returned to sender Settings No specific settings necessary.

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0012_0010_YHM_SENDUNGSAVIS_NIEDERLEGUNG

    General Job sends messages when it is down Settings No specific settings necessary.

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0012_0011_YHM_MBS_VERSAND_POSTSTELLE

    General Job sends messages MBS Dispatch to mailroom Settings No specific settings necessary.

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0012_0012_YHM_MBS_VERSND_VERSENDER

    General Job sends messages when status of courier order changes Settings No specific settings necessary.

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0012_0013_YHM_SENDUNGSAVIS_ERFASSUNG_AUSGEHEND

    General Job sends messages when outgoing shipment is entered Settings No specific settings necessary.

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0012_0014_YHM_SENDUNGSAVIS_FREIGABE_VERRECHNUNG

    General Job sends messages when released for allocation Settings No specific settings necessary.

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0012_0015_YHM_MBS_VERSAND_POSTFACHANLAGE

    General Job sends MBS Info messages to mailbox system Settings No specific settings necessary.

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0012_0016_YHM_SENDUNGSAVIS_HINTERLEGUNG

    General Job sends messages when stored Settings No specific settings necessary.

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0012_0017_YHM_FOLGEPROZESS_SENDUNGSERFASSUNG_IHS

    General Job sends messages for subsequent process IHS Settings No specific settings necessary.

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0012_0018_YHM_PIN_VERGABE

    General Job sends messages of new PIN assignment Settings No specific settings necessary.

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0014_0001_MAILALLIANCEINTERFACE_SEM_IMPORT

    General Imports Mailalliance SEM files Settings Designation Value...

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0014_0002_MAILALLIANCEINTERFACE_SEM_EXPORT

    General Exports Mailalliance SEM files Settings Designation Value...

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0014_0003_MAILALLIANCEINTERFACE_SENDUNG_EXPORT

    General Exports Mailalliance shipments Settings Designation Value...

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0015_0001_MBS_ZUGRIFFSDATEN_IMPORT

    General Imports access data Settings No specific settings necessary.

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0015_0002_MBS_FREIGABE_DYN_FACH

    General Enable dyn. subjects Settings No specific settings necessary.

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0015_0003_MBS_ZUGRIFFSDATEN_EXPORT

    General Exports MBS access data Settings Designation Value...

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0015_0004_MBS_STATISTIK

    General Calculate MBS statistics Settings no spz. Settings necessary.

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0016_0001_FRANKIERMASCHINEN_SENDUNGSDATEN_IMPORT_FP_MAILREPORT

    General Imports shipment data FP Mailreport Settings No special settings necessary.

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0100_0001_BV_BEZIRKSFREISCHALTUNG

    General Job for the temporal release of districts Settings No specific settings necessary.

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0100_0002_BV_OPTIMIERTE_ZUSTELLBEZIRKE_EXPORT

    General Exports the delivery districts to be optimized into a defined XML file Settings No specific settings necessary.

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0100_0003_BV_OPTIMIERTE_ZUSTELLBEZIRKE_IMPORT

    General Imports the optimized delivery districts from a defined XML file Settings No specific settings necessary.

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0100_0005_BV_STD_GEBIET-BEZIRK_IMPORT

    General Standard area-district import Settings Designation Value...

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0100_0006_BV_STD_PERSON_IMPORT

    General Import and processing of area, district, logistics units, depots, delivery tours and personal data Settings Designation Value...

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0101_0001_KO_KOOPERATION_DATEI_IMPORT

    General Fetches all containers from cooperation partners from the corresponding FTP servers Settings No specific settings necessary.

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0101_0002_KO_KOOPERATION_DATEI_EXPORT

    General Sends all containers for cooperation partners that have been exported to the corresponding FTP server Settings No specific settings necessary.

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0101_0003_KO_KOOPERATION_SENDUNG_IMPORT

    General Imports broadcasts which were sent by the cooperation partner were Settings No specific settings necessary.

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0101_0004_KO_KOOPERATION_REKLAMATION_IMPORT

    General Imports complaints which were sent by the cooperation partner sent Settings No specific settings necessary.

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0101_0005_KO_KOOPERATION_LEISTUNG_IMPORT

    General Imports broadcasts which were sent by the cooperation partner were Settings No specific settings necessary.

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0101_0006_KO_KOOPERATION_KND-KST_IMPORT

    General Imports customers and cost centers sent by the sent by the cooperation partner Settings No specific settings necessary.

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0101_0007_KO_KOOPERATION_GEBIET-BEZIRK_IMPORT

    General Imports area and district data sent by the cooperation partner Settings No specific settings necessary.

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0101_0008_KO_KOOPERATION_CLRDATEN_IMPORT

    General Imports clearing data which was sent by the cooperation partner were sent Settings No specific settings necessary.

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0101_0009_KO_KOOPERATION_SENDUNG_EXPORT

    General Exports shipments for the cooperation partner Settings No specific settings necessary.

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0101_0010_KO_KOOPERATION_REKLAMATION_EXPORT

    General No specific settings necessary.

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0101_0011_KO_KOOPERATION_LEISTUNGEN_EXPORT

    General Exports all own services for the cooperation partner Settings No specific settings necessary.

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0101_0012_KO_KOOPERATION_KND-KST_EXPORT

    General Exports all own customers/cost centers for the cooperation partner Settings No specific settings necessary.

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0101_0013_KO_KOOPERATION_GEBIET-BEZIRK_EXPORT

    General Exports territory and district data for the cooperation partner Settings No specific settings necessary.

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0101_0014_KO_KOOPERATION_CLRDATEN_EXPORT

    General Exports clearing data for the cooperation partner Settings No specific settings necessary.

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0101_0015_KO_KOOPERATION_CHECK_GEGENSTELLE

    General Checks by means of an empty container whether the remote station is still is still working Settings No specific settings necessary.

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0104_0001_RM_REKLAMATION CLEARING

    General Job to clean up old complaint data Settings Designation Value...

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0104_0002_RM_REKLAMATION EXPORT

    General Job for exporting complaints Settings Designation Value...

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0104_0003_RM_REKLAMATION IMPORT

    General Job for importing complaints Settings Designation Value...

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0105_0001_MV_MITARBEITER_IMPORT

    General Job to import employees Settings Designation Value...

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0105_0002_MV_MITARBEITERBEZIRK IMPORT

    General Job for importing employee districts Settings Designation Value...

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0105_0003_MV_MITARBEITERBEZIRK_ZUWEISUNG

    General District Assignment Job Settings Designation Value...

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0105_0010_MV_USER_GROUP_IMPORT_MS_ACTIVE_DIR

    General Import Users/Groups (Employees/Roles) from a Microsoft Active Directory Settings Designation Value...

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0106_0001_FE_Kunden-KST_IMPORT_DIGITALISIERUNG

    General Imports people and customer/cost center master data for digitization Settings No special settings necessary.

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0107_0001_ME_MASSENERFASSUNG_IMPORT

    General Job for importing mass entry data Settings Designation Value...

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0108_0002_PV_VERERBUNG

    General Creates mailbox assignment based on the workstation Settings No special settings necessary.

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0108_0003_PV_PERSONENDATEN_DEL

    General Delete personal data Settings Designation Value...

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0110_0001_COURIERORDER_ZYKL_AUFTRAEGE

    General Job for recalculating cyclical orders in the courier system Settings No special settings necessary.

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0111_0001_CXLETTERSCAN_MANUELLER_IMPORT_WARTUNG

    General Job for importing the maintenance jobs for the CxLetterScan Settings No special settings necessary.

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0111_0002_CXLETTERSCAN_AUTO_IMPORT_WARTUNG

    General Job for importing the maintenance jobs for the CxLetterScan Settings Designation Value...

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0200_0001_DIEPOST_AUFGABENVERZEICHNIS_IMPORT

    General DIEPOST AVZ Import fetches the reports from the FTP server of the post office and places them in the defined path. These reports are then stored in the database and deleted from the directory again. The job should only run on the server. The reports are displayed in the DIE POST module Export tab under Task Directory...

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0200_0002_DIEPOST_BMZ_BERICHT_IMPORT

    General DIEPOST BMZ Report Import ATTENTION: The paths of both tasks must match. Also make sure that this path is available on the computer on which the import is running. You make the definitions for the FTP under Settings / Production / DIE POST / DIE POST Customer Data. DIE Post Customer Data Detail Settings...

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0200_0003_DIEPOST_SENDUNG_EXPORT

    General DIEPOST consignment-export BMZ Settings Designation Value...

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0200_0004_DIEPOST_ZUSTELLLISTE_IMPORT

    General DIEPOST delivery list import ATTENTION: The paths of the first two tasks must match. Also, make sure that this path exists on the computer running the import. You make the definitions for the FTP under Settings / Production / DIE POST / DIE POST Customer Data. DIE Post Customer Data Detail...

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0200_0005_DIEPOST_ZUSTELLLISTE_SEEB_IMPORT

    General DIEPOST ZLP-SEEB Import Settings No special settings necessary.

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0201_0001_DPAG_EINLIEFERLISTE_IMPORT

    General DPAG posting list import Settings No special settings necessary.

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0202_0001_DHL_STD_GEBIET_IMPORT

    General Import and processing of DHL territory data Settings No special settings necessary.

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0300_0001_ALLG_IMPORT_EXPORT_STD_SENDUNG_AZD_EXPORT

    General Standard shipment export AZD Settings Designation Value...

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0300_0002_ALLG_IMPORT_EXPORT_P2_INTERFACE_EXPORT

    General P2 Interface Export exports shipment data. Settings The following settings must be made in the various tasks. IMPORTANT : The path (Task1 & 2) and the ExportPath (Task3) must be the same...

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0300_0003_ALLG_IMPORT_EXPORT_P2_INTERFACE_PRODUKTZUORDNUNG

    General P2 Interface Product Assignment Settings Designation Value...

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0300_0004_CXSYNC_SYNCHRONISATION

    General Exports data to the Syncgateway and imports data from the Syncgateway Settings No special settings necessary.

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0900_0001_DIVERSE_JOBS_DATEN_ANONYMISIEREN

    General anonymize data Settings Designation Value...

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_0900_0002_DIVERSE_JOBS_CXREPORTING_BI

    General CxReporting Settings Designation Value...

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_9999_0001_MESSAGING_UNZUSTELLBARE_SENDUNGEN

    General Messaging 'undeliverable mail'. Settings Designation Value...

  • JobView / TNT Interface

    • HELP_JOB_9999_0002_MESSAGING_UEBERSICHT_UEBERLAUFBEZIRKE

    General Messaging Overflow Districts Settings Designation Value...

  • Journal Detail

    • HELP_POLIBRARY_JOURNALMANAGEMENT_DETAIL

    This detail dialog shows a journal entry. Edit the possible entries and store any documents as an attachment to the journal entry. attachment to the journal entry. View The "General data" block displays information about this journal entry. The reference UPOC is the UPOC that is assigned to this journal entry based on its affiliation. which is assigned to this journal entry based on its affiliation. Additionally, the date of the first entry and the date of the last change are displayed. change is displayed. As input fields you can enter a subject and the actual journal text. The buttons displayed represent the available functions. Operation OK The journal entry is saved and the detail dialog is closed...

  • Journal entries

    • HELP_POLIBRARY_JOURNALMANAGEMENT

    This dialog shows all existing journal entries for a CodX PostOffice entity from which you opened this dialog. opened this dialog. This could be a customer/cost center, a courier order or any other CodX PostOffice data entity that supports journaling. supports. In this dialog you manage the journals using the displayed buttons. View A list with all existing journal entries is displayed. On the right side of the list are the buttons for all available functions. Operation OK Closes this dialog and saves the changes you have made to the journals...

  • KEP 'DIE POST' error messages

    • HELP_KEP_ERROR_DIPOST_DELETE

    Error text Cause/Remedy Error text Cause/Remedy The shipment '<shipment number>' is already exported to 'DIE POST'! (UPOC: '<UPOC>') The shipment with the specified shipment number (Track&Trace-ID / alternative code) has already been exported to the service provider 'DIE POST'. exported. The consignment data can therefore no longer be changed or the consignment saved again. The shipment '<shipment number>' is already exported to 'DIE POST'! (UPOC: '<UPOC>')...

  • KEP: DHL parcel error messages

    • HELP_KEP_ERROR_DHLPAKET

    No. Error text Cause/Remedy No. Error text Cause/Remedy - Invalid configuration of the service: Setting 'DHL Paket Procedure' must contain exactly 2 characters [01, 53, 54]! Enter a valid DHL parcel service. Check the configuration of the DHL parcel services and re-import the DHL parcel tarfi model if necessary. - Invalid configuration: DHL parcel billing number ('xxx') for procedure 'xx' must contain exactly 14 characters characters! The configuration/setup for DHL parcel is invalid/incorrect. Enter a valid billing number in the settings page for the specified procedure. valid settlement number. See also Settings CEP DHL Parcel. 1001 login failed - The configuration/setup for DHL parcel is invalid/wrong - The DHL Parcel web service is not working correctly See also Settings CEP DHL Parcel. 1101 at least one shipment has errors Shipment not registered, at least one error => see further error messages 1101 The specified product is not available for the country. The selected service is not valid/available for the destination country. Enter a valid DHL parcel service or change the recipient address accordingly. 1101 Please specify a product. Enter a valid DHL parcel service Check the configuration of the DHL parcel services 1101 The specified product is not known. Enter a valid DHL parcel service Check the configuration of the DHL parcel services 1101 Please enter a weight. Record the weight of the shipment 1101 Please enter a postcode. Enter a complete/valid recipient address (postcode) 1101 Please specify a location. Enter a complete/valid recipient address (city/village) 1101 Please enter a street Enter a complete/valid recipient address (street) 1101 Please enter a house number. Enter a complete/valid recipient address (house number) 1101 Please enter name 1. Enter the name of the recipient (person) in the"Name" field. or Enter the company name of the recipient in the extended attributes in the field"KEP Receiver company". 1101 Please indicate the type of franking. Enter a value in the extended attribute"DHL Paket Terms Of Trade". 1101 The type of franking indicated is not valid. Enter a valid value in the extended attribute"DHL Paket Terms Of Trade". 1101 Please specify the type of shipment. Enter a value in the extended attribute"DHL Paket Export Type". 1101 The specified type of shipment is not valid. Enter a valid value in the extended attribute"DHL Paket Export Type". 1101 A description is required for the "Other" type. You have selected as"DHL Paket Export Type" the value OTHER as the "DHL Parcel Export Type". In this case an additional specification in the extended attribute"KEP Export Type Description" is required. 1101 Please provide the description. Enter a description of the shipment in the extended attribute"CEP Shipment contents/description". 1101 The customs tariff number indicated is not valid. Enter a valid value in the extended attribute"CEP Customs Tariff Number" (maximum 10 characters) or leave it empty. 1101 The specified street cannot be found. Enter a complete/valid recipient address (street)...

  • KEP: DHL parcel error messages

    • HELP_KEP_ERROR_DHLPAKET_DELETE

    No. Error text Cause/Remedy No. Error text Cause/Remedy 2000 Unknown shipment number. A shipment for cancellation cannot be found The shipment to be deleted could not (no longer) be found in the DHL Parcel system. The shipment was NOT deleted! Possible causes: - The Track&Trace ID (alternative code) has been changed. - The shipment was deleted earlier 1001 login failed. The user of the web service could not be authenticated. - The configuration/setup for DHL parcel is invalid/wrong - The DHL Parcel web service is not working correctly See also Settings CEP DHL Parcel...

  • KEP: DHL-Express error messages

    • HELP_KEP_ERROR_DHLEXPRESS

    No. Error text Cause/Remedy No. Error text Cause/Remedy 0 The selected service is not a valid DHL Express service (no Product-Code/DOC-Indicator assigned)! Enter a valid DHL Express service 111 ... Datatype error: In element'CompanyName' : Value '' with length '0' is less than minimum length facet of '2'... at ... Enter the company name of the recipient in the extended attributes in the field"Receiver company" (KEP Receiver company), at least 2 characters. 111 ... Datatype error: In element'PersonName' : Value '...' with length '...' is less than minimum length facet of '2'... at ... The recipient name entered is too short! Enter the name of the recipient (person) in the"Name" field, at least 2 characters, maximum 35 characters. characters. or The entered sender name is too short or empty! Enter a name for the sender. 111 ... Datatype error: In element'PersonName' : Value '...' with length '...' exceeds maximum length facet of '35'.. at ... The recipient name entered is too long! Enter the name of the recipient (person) in the"Name" field, at least 2 characters, maximum 35 characters. 111 ... Datatype error: In element'GlobalProductCode' : Value '' with length '0' is less than minimum length facet of '1'... at ... Enter a valid DHL Express service 111 ... Datatype error: In element'PhoneNumber' : Value '' does not match regular expression facet '.*[^\s].*'.. at ... The phone number of the recipient or the sender is missing (empty). Make sure that a telephone number is stored for the selected cost unit or sender. Enter the phone number of the recipient in the extended attributes in the field" KEP Receiverphone number". 111 .. Datatype error: In element'Width' : ... is out of bounds .. Datatype error: In element'Height' : ... is out of bounds .. Datatype error: In element'Depth' : ... is out of bounds Enter a valid value (>=1) in the extended attributes in the corresponding field Package width [cm] Package Height/Thickness [cm] Package length [cm] 151 Consignee segment City Mandatory Required error Enter a complete/valid recipient address (postcode, town/village) 151 Shipper segment Contact segment Phone Number Mandatory Required error The selected sender does not have a phone number. 152 Consignee segment Address Line 1 Conditional Required Error Enter a complete/valid recipient address (street) 152 Shipment Details segment Contents Conditional Required Error Enter a description of the shipment in the extended attributes in the field"KEP Shipment contents/description". 152 Piece segment Width Conditional Required Error Piece segment Height Conditional Required Error Piece segment Depth Conditional Required Error If one dimension of the shipment is recorded, all other dimensions must also be recorded with valid values. Enter valid values (>=1) in the extended attributes in the corresponding field: Package Width [cm] Package height/thickness [cm] Package length [cm] 154 154 Shipment Details segment Weight Total field value is invalid Piece segment Weight field value is invalid Record the weight of the shipment 157 Consignee segment Contact segment Email Format Error The address specified in the Receiver EMail-Address is invalid. is invalid. Enter a valid value or delete it (then no notification will be sent to the recipient). 340015 The declared value is missing. Enter the value of the goods in the CEP Declared value 420504 The origin location is invalid. Please check the data. The address of the registered sender is invalid. Enter a correct address 420505 The destination location is invalid. Please check the data. The address of the recipient entered is invalid. Enter a correct address DCT_0001 The requested Global Product Code X and Local Product Code X is not available between this origin and destination. Please make sure data entered is valid before proceeding or contact our customer service. The selected service is not available for delivery with the entered shipment data (additional service / weight / dimensions / ...). from the sender to the recipient. Enter the shipment data correctly. SV011a Cannot determine destination service. Please check recipient information or complete a manual airwaybill. For pickup assistance call DHL customer services. The selected service/additional service is not available for the recipient address (country) . Correct the service and/or the recipient address. The selected service may not be available for the configured DHL Express account. In this case contact the support of DHL Express...

  • KEP: DPD error messages

    • HELP_KEP_ERROR_DPD

    #AnonType_messageLanguagegetAuth

    No. Error text Cause/Remedy LOGIN_8 The combination of username and password is unknown...

  • KEP: FedEx error messages

    • HELP_KEP_ERROR_FEDEX

    No. Error text Cause/Remedy - No FedEx Packaging Type selected!...

  • KEP: FedEx error messages

    • HELP_KEP_ERROR_FEDEX_DELETE

    No. Error text Cause/Remedy 1000 General Failure...

  • KEP: GLS Germany error messages

    • HELP_KEP_ERROR_GLSDE

    #xxxxx

    No. Error text Cause/Remedy HTTP POST-Request failed, see CxDataLogger for details!...

  • KEP: GO! Error messages

    • HELP_KEP_ERROR_GO

    Error/Code: Error text Cause/Remedy HTTP POST-Request failed, see CxDataLogger for details!...

  • KEP: TNT-Express error messages

    • HELP_KEP_ERROR_TNTEXPRESS

    No. Error text Cause/Remedy - The selected service is not a valid TNT Express service (no TNT Express service code assigned)!...

  • KEP: UPS error messages

    • HELP_KEP_ERROR_UPS

    No. Error text Cause/Remedy No. Error text Cause/Remedy 120001 XML Shipping System is unavailable, please try again later. UPS Web Server is (temporarily) unavailable, the shipment cannot be saved. Try again later. 120109 Missing or invalid shipper phone number The sender 's phone number is invalid. The sender 's telephone number must be available for international shipments (shipment abroad)! The sender can be a cost unit (customer/cost centre), a person (person is cost unit) or a universal address. The telephone number must be entered accordingly. If a customer/cost centre is selected as sender, the telephone number entered in the corresponding settings CEP UPS is used. 120110 Hard Missing/Invalid Shipper AttentionName The name of the sender is invalid. The sender can be a cost object (customer/cost center), a person (person is cost object) or a universal address. The name must be entered accordingly. If a customer/cost center is selected as sender, the address entered in the corresponding Settings KEP UPS is used as the name. A maximum of 35 characters are transmitted to UPS! 120120 The country associated with Shippers ShipperNumber must be the same as the shipments Shippers country. The configured UPS account number does not match the Country of the selected Shipper. Select a shipper with the correct country, or correct the UPS Account Number setting. This error can occur when a return shipment is entered for an original shipment whose recipient is in a foreign country (for the return shipment, the sender/recipient of the original shipment are swapped). return shipment, the sender/recipient of the original shipment is reversed). 120124 The requested service is unavailable between the selected locations The selected Power not available for combination sender/recipient address (possibly foreign mail?). Change the Performance accordingly. 120200 Missing or invalid ship to company name Enter the company name of the recipient in the extended attributes in the field KEP Receiver company. 120201 Missing or invalid ship to attention name In the field Name field, enter the correct name of the recipient (person). Possibly the field is empty or the name is too long. 120202 Missing or invalid ship to address line 1 Enter a complete/valid Recipient address (street/house number). 120205 Missing or invalid ship to city Enter a complete/valid Recipient address (city/village). 120206 Missing or invalid ship to StateProvinceCode For shipments to the USA/Canada, the following must be entered in the field District the US state or the Canadian province must be entered must be entered (two characters). 120207 Missing/Invalid ShipTo PostalCode. Postal Code is required. Enter a complete/valid Recipient address (postal) code. 120209 Missing or invalid ship to phone number Enter the telephone number of the recipient in the extended attributes in the field KEP Receiver phone number. 120213 ShipTo PhoneNumber must be at least XX alphanumeric characters Enter a valid phone number of the recipient in the extended attributes in the field KEP Receiver phone number (at least XX characters). 120217 ShipTo phone number and phone extension together cannot be more than XX digits long Enter a valid telephone number for the recipient in the extended attributes in the field KEP Receiver phone number (maximum XX characters). 120300 Missing/Invalid ShipFrom CompanyName The company name of the sender is empty or invalid! The sender can be a cost unit (customer/cost center), a person (person is cost unit) or a universal address. The company name must be entered accordingly: - Sender is cost object: Settings CEP UPS, field "021: Sender company name" - Sender is person: Name1 of the customer assigned to the person - Sender is universal address: Company name in the "Company" field of the universal address. 120301 Missing or invalid ship from attention name The name of the sender is invalid. The name of the sender must be mandatory for international shipments (shipment abroad)! The sender can be a cost unit (customer/cost centre), a person (person is cost unit) or a universal address. a universal address. The name must be entered accordingly. If a customer/cost center is selected as sender, the address entered in the corresponding Settings CEP UPS is used as the name. A maximum of 35 characters are transmitted to UPS! 120512 Shipment Description is required for this shipment. In the extended attributes, enter a description of the shipment in the field KEP Shipment contents/description. 120518 The format of the first Email Address entered for Quantum View Notification - Ship Notification is invalid In the settings for UPS, notification of the receiver via e-mail is activated, but the value in the field Receiver EMail Address is invalid. Enter a valid e-mail address. 120608 Package weight is required Record the Weight of the shipment. 120609 All Package Dimensions are required and each must be greater than 0 The entered UPS Packaging code is not supported, select another one. 120802 Address Validation Error on ShipTo address Enter a complete and valid Recipient address (postcode/city/village/street/house number). For shipments to USA/Canada: In the field District field must contain the US state or Canadian province (two characters). Make Make sure the state/province is correct for the location entered. 121210 The selected service is not available from the origin to the destination The UPS-Power is invalid for the destination country, change the Performance accordingly. 121212 The requested package type is not allowed in a shipment from the origin to the destination There is no UPS Packaging code selected is not permitted for the shipment, e.g. because the shipment is going shipment is going abroad. Enter a correct UPS packaging code in the extended attributes. UPS Packaging code. 121219 The requested service is unavailable between the selected locations. Please check your Documents Only, Letter/Envelope, and Saturday Delivery settings as these may affect service availability. The option UPS Saturday Delivery option is selected, it is not available for the current service or the Shipper/Receiver Address combination. Switch UPS Saturday Delivery off or select another Service from the list. 121286 XX is not a valid state for the specified shipment For shipments to the USA/Canada, the following must be entered in the field District the US state or the Canadian province must be entered must be entered (two characters). The entered value 'XX' is invalid! 121500 The selected service is not valid with the selected packaging The selected Power and the selected UPS Packaging code are not compatible or the UPS Packaging code is not compatible for the Power not allowed. Select another UPS Packaging code from. 250002 Invalid Authentication Information The credentials used are invalid. Enter the correct password/user ID settings for authentication in the UPS settings. 250003 Invalid Access License number The UPS license number used is invalid. Record the correct UPS license number setting in the UPS settings...

  • KEP: UPS error messages

    • HELP_KEP_ERROR_UPS_DELETE

    No. Error text Cause/Remedy No. Error text Cause/Remedy 190101 Time for voiding has expired. The shipment could not be cancelled at UPS because the time period allowed for cancellation has expired. UPS holds shipments for a maximum of 28 days after initial entry. 190102 No shipment found within the allowed void period The shipment could not be voided at UPS because no shipment with the specified Track & Trace ID (alternate code) was found within the time period allowed for voiding. period allowed for the void. UPS holds shipments for a maximum of 28 days after initial entry. 190103 The Pickup Request associated with this shipment has already been completed The shipment could not be deleted at UPS because the shipment was already picked up. 250002 Invalid UserId/Password The credentials used are invalid. Enter the correct password/user ID settings for authentication in the UPS settings. 250003 Invalid Access License number The UPS license number used is invalid. Record the correct UPS license number setting in the UPS settings...

  • KO Complaints

    • HELP_KO_SETUP_SETUPRMDLG

    Cooperation Complaint means that complaints are assigned to a cooperation partner and are transferred to this partner including all data. including all data is transferred to this partner. The CoP can process the complaint and it is returned to the original creator. back to the original creator. These settings define the import and export of complaint data. Export Send complaints to partner By activating the checkbox for the export, you allow the sending of complaint data, after a cooperation partner has been assigned to a complaint. The quantity of complaints to be transferred per KO container is is limited either on the basis of the number of complaints or the size of the complaint data, depending on which value reaches the reaches the maximum first. These settings for limiting can be made on the two Custfields on table 1046 with the following settings: 600: Maximum number of reclamations to send per container. (1 - 999) 610: Maximum size of complaints incl. references/journals and attachments to send per container and attachments to send per container (1 - 999) [Megabyte]. Transfer address of the complainant If you want to transfer the address of the complainant, activate this checkbox, otherwise no address data will be transferred and these input fields remain empty for the cooperation partner...

  • KO Control

    • HELP_KO_SETUP_SETUPCONTROLDLG

    On this tab there are no settings that can be edited, only information. The received and sent containers are listed. This in each case with the status, the date, a sequence number and further information. See also: WS#38821: Howto: Cooperation

  • KO customer management

    • HELP_KO_SETUP_KVDLG

    Cooperation KV (customer management) means that customer data is exchanged between two cooperation partners. It customers and cost centers are exchanged with the corresponding address. Here all settings are made that are required for sending and receiving customer data. Export Send customer data to partner To export the customer data you only have to activate the checkbox, so at each export interval it will be checked if customers/cost centers have changed. If this is the case, all active customers and cost centers will be sent via XML file to the defined cooperation partner. cooperation partner. Import...

  • KO District administration

    • HELP_KO_SETUP_BVDLG

    Cooperation BV (district administration) means that the area and district data is exchanged between two cooperation partners. are exchanged. In each case, the cooperation partner that receives the carrier route and area data defines which data it wants to receive by transferring the responsibility of areas on the city level to a cooperation partner. Area data defined in this way and carrier route data in which in which these locations occur are compared with the data of the cooperation partner during an import. Territory and district data can be matched by any number of cooperation partners, the only limitation is the only on the acquired licenses. The settings for exporting and importing territory and district data are made on the KO District Management dialog. Export...

  • KO Secure communication

    • HELP_KO_SETUP_SKDLG

    On this tab is the overview of all alarms that are triggered during cooperation. You can set whether you want to activate the alarm and after how many errors you want to be alerted. The version of CodX PostOffice at the cooperation partner and the defined alarms used by KO SK are displayed. Alert The alerting is a module that is generally used in CodX PostOffice . In this module you can set what type of alarm should be used depending on the alarm. An alarm can be defined via SMS, e-mail and Shell-Execute. The instructions for setting alarms can be found in the corresponding document. The alarms are executed according to cycles, that is that is, one cycle corresponds to the execution of the corresponding job, e.g. receive data or send data. View...

  • KO shipments

    • HELP_KO_SETUP_SBBDLG

    SBB cooperation (consignment, box, bundle) means that items are delivered from the collecting mail service provider to the delivering mail service provider. mail service provider. The delivering mail service provider charges its cooperation partner for its services. The exchange of shipments can of course take place in both directions and with several cooperation partners. Changed consignments that are no longer transmitted or are transmitted to another cooperation partner are transmitted as consignments to be deleted and deleted on the deleted on the receiving side. Here you only set whether transmissions are received from the cooperation partner or whether transmissions may be sent to this partner. Use the [Send] and [Receive] buttons to initiate a manual receive or send cycle. The default service provider zone is used to define the service provider zone to which received shipments are to be assigned. should be assigned. This is necessary for the subsequent correct billing...

  • KO tariff model

    • HELP_KO_SETUP_TMDLG

    Cooperation TM (tariff model) means that tariff model data, in this case performance data, is exchanged between two cooperation partners. cooperation partners. This is particularly the case when two mail service providers enter into the SBB cooperation with each other. This means that the services recorded on the items can be compared. On the setuppage of the tariff model it is set whether the tariff model data may be received from the KoP and/or sent to the KoP. may be sent. Tariff model received from KO-Partner If activated, the tariff model data is imported from the cooperation partner. Send tariff model to KO partner If activated, your own tariff mode data is sent to your cooperation partner so that they can import it in turn. Services...

  • KV - advance directive

    • HELP_KV_TAB_VORAUSVERFUEGUNG

    With CodX PostOffice you have the possibility to define for each define advance directives for each customer or cost center. An advance directive may include the following: Procedure if the shipment is undeliverable (corresponding license necessary) Work instructions for capture and redress. (corresponding license required) Partner locks (corresponding license required)...

  • KV - Advance directive - Partner blocking

    • HELP_KV_VORAUSVERFUEGUNG_PARTNERSPERRE

    It can be defined that shipments should NOT be transferred to certain partners. This can also be done for all partners (service providers/mandates) of a service provider group by selecting the corresponding checkbox. The service provider groups must first be defined in the settings (BA System settings). If you want to block an entire service provider group, select the checkbox of the service provider group and all associated service providers are also selected. If the service provider group is not selected, this means that none of the associated service providers is selected. If the service provider group has a square, this means that at least one of the associated service providers is selected. Only service providers to which districts have been assigned (service provider/zone for sorting) are visible. This means that a service provider necessarily needs a zone and this zone must be assigned to a district...

  • KV - Advance directive - Settings

    • HELP_KV_VORAUSVERFUEGUNG_CF_SETTING

    Here you can define data entry restrictions (OS-AZD, OS-IHS, MultiSort). E.g. how must an alternative code must be entered, is the entry optional or is the field not displayed at all. These settings can be defined on customer/ cost center (by advance allocation), service, sorter or globally.

  • KV - advance disposition- / TM - performance- work instruction

    • HELP_KV_VORAUSVERFUEGUNG_ARBEITSANWEISUNG

    With CodX PostOffice you have the possibility to define work instructions for each customer or cost center. per service. (KV advance directive) You can also define work instructions for the service only. define. (In the Rate Model / Service settings) The work instructions you enter here are then executed when you change the customer/cost center or service. or service change during entry or during redress processing. If work instructions are created for both the customer/cost center (advance allocation) and also for the service (price model) both are displayed during data entry or redress processing. are displayed. Work instructions can be entered for: Start of coverage End of recording...

  • KV - Advance ruling - District blocking

    • HELP_KV_VORAUSVERFUEGUNG_BEZIRKSPERRE

    It can be defined that shipments are NOT to be delivered to be delivered to certain districts. The districts are grouped by depot. In front of the the client ID is listed with leading zeros. (e.g. 1000: Depot DPAG) If you want to a whole depot, you select the checkbox of the depot and all the associated districts are also selected. If the depot is not selected, it means that none of the associated districts are selected. The delivery will then be made to the alternative district. You can make the setting for the alternative district under Settings / Administration / Tariff model / Service provider/DLZone. (see also Service provider / Zone: Setting). You define the global alternative district directly in the Custfield. (Entity 2045(DLZone); ID = 0)...

  • KV - Customer price

    • HELP_KV_TAB_CUSTOMER_PRICE

    With CodX PostOffice you have the possibility to define customer specific prices for each article. These prices will be applied to orders and invoices for the customer/cost center, instead of those defined in the rate model. The customer price can be scheduled. To define customer prices, the complete FA licensing is required. If relative customer prices are defined for the selected customer/cost center, the current rate model prices are loaded into the cache. This may take a moment. For relative customer prices whose Valid To date is in the future, the current price is displayed. If the Valid To date is in the past, the value valid at that time is displayed. Details customer price Functions...

  • KV - eInvoice

    • HELP_KV_TAB_ERECHNUNG

    #eInvoice

    In order for eInvoices to be created at all, the invoice type must be set to eInvoice in the invoice definitions. In addition to this, there are of course a few other settings that need to be made (#eInvoice). The settings here are for the creation and transmission of the e-bill per customer. When saving, it is checked in each case whether all required settings have been made. (See eInvoice settings) Depending on which format you choose, a corresponding file is created for the eInvoice. With XInvoice, the recipient receives an XML. With ZUGFeRD, the recipient receives a PDF in which the XML is included as an attachment. Attachments (invoice PDF or invoice detail PDF) are included in the XML file as an attachment...

  • KV - Invoice definitions

    • HELP_KV_TAB_RECHNUNGDEF

    #eInvoice

    Price group Using the drop-down, you can select the price group to which this customer should belong. This determines the item prices to be charged. FA Invoice Client Using the drop-down, you can select the invoicing client to which this customer should belong. This defines among other things the header and footer of the invoice and the bank data of the clearing client. Payment term with VAT With this drop-down you can select the payment term to be printed on invoices subject to VAT. Payment term VAT 0% With this drop-down you can select the payment term to be printed on VAT free invoices. If VAT Separate is not activated, this payment term is deactivated and only the payment term with VAT is valid for the invoice. Tax number This field is used to store the customer's VAT number...

  • KV - Master data

    • HELP_KV_TAB_ABHOLUNG_STANDORT_DLG

    Here the location of the pickup can be entered for the customer or cost center. can be entered. The location is given a name and a validity date. Address data The address can be the customer/cost centre address ,the invoice address can be taken over or a new address can be entered...

  • KV - Master data

    • HELP_KV_TAB_ADRESSE_DLG

    Here you can enter further addresses for customers or cost centres. be entered. In addition, functions can be stored for the address. Address type There are different address types Contact Redress Feedback...

  • KV - Master data

    • HELP_KV_TAB_MASTER

    Here the master data of the selected customer or cost center are entered. UPOC The UPOC is assigned automatically by the system and cannot be changed. Number Each customer and each cost center can be assigned a number, which may also contain alphanumeric characters. Ext. number...

  • KV Settings Pick-up tour Lock

    • HELP_KV_SETUP_UNLOCK_ABHOLTOUR

    This settings dialog is used to unlock locked standard locked standard pickup tours or pickup tour instances. These are locked and unlocked by the program during editing. This is done automatically and the user does not have to take care of it. However, it can happen, however, that if the user is in edit mode, the program is terminated or closed improperly, for example. a lock remains active. This can usually be removed by the same by the same user on the same workstation, by processing the same standard pickup route or pickup route instance again and closing the processing mode correctly. However, as soon as another user wants to process this standard collection tour or collection tour instance , this is not possible, since the system considers it to be locked by another user. by another user. This means that standard pick-up tours or pick-up tour instances can no longer be can be processed. In order to prevent this from happening, this dialog has been implemented with which it is possible to remove such locks on the database. !!! Please note the following: An improper use of this function can lead to misbehaviour of the software, mainly when a standard pickup tour or pickup tour instance that is unlocked is actually still being processed by a user. being processed by a user. After that, other users could also edit it again and invalidate changes made by the first user or lead to inconsistencies in the default collection tour instance. or lead to inconsistencies in the standard pick up tour or pickup tour instance. You should therefore be be careful with unlocking the standard pickup tour or pickup tour instance. View...

  • Label definitions

    • HELP_LABELDEF_LABELDEF

    The individual elements of the label are defined here. Which elements are available for selection depends on the selected printer. The individual types are described in the help of the Detail dialog. Via the buttons "Default address label" and "Default return label" the currently opened label can be defined as such. See also: DirectPrint Variable definition

  • Label definitions

    • HELP_LABELDEF_SETUP

    All labels per printer are set up here. The detail dialogs of the labels show the corresponding settings for the currently selected printer. Therefore select the printer first. The yellow label is the standard address label and red is the standard return label. Which label is used depends on the assignment to the customer, the cost center or the service. The sequence cost center, customer, service applies. Printer setting Shows/changes the settings for the currently selected printer. This only applies to printers that are controlled via DirectPrint (COM port) (e.g. Intermec E4, Intermec PC4/PF8/OD5+, Intermec PF4i/PM43c, Sato LT408). No Windows printers...

  • Laser cross mode setting

    • HELP_CAMERA_SETUP_LASERCROSS_DLG

    In laser cross mode, the ROI (Region of Interest) refers to the laser cross, i.e. the reference point is the crossing point. The defined image section is cut out of the full camera image and transferred to the image paser for further processing. Due to the reduced amount of data, the further image processing is optimized and executed significantly faster. If image saving is activated, the reduced image section is saved for transmission (not the full image). The settings apply per camera and workstation, and must be made once when the camera is commissioned or when the mechanical properties (focus, mounting angle, etc.) are changed. mechanical properties (focus, mounting angle, ...). Process Place a blank white A4 sheet in the centre of the platform. Click on Find laser cross The coordinates are displayed green if successful, otherwise red Exit the dialog with OK or repeat the process...

  • LetterShop - E-Mail

    • HELP_LS_SETUP_EMAIL

    To configure an e-mail communication channel, you must have the access data for the corresponding e-mail account. Please make sure that you enter the data correctly. The following settings must be configured for each e-mail communication channel. Application information Communication channel active With this checkbox you can set a configured communication channel to active or inactive. E-mail account exclusively for LetterShop Specifies whether the email account being used is exclusive to the LetterShop application, or whether there are other communications taking place on the same email address. other communications take place. Processed emails are deleted on the server...

  • LetterShop - E-mail address/domain

    • HELP_LS_SETUP_EMAIL_DETAIL

    E-mail address/domain Enter the valid e-mail addresses and domains in the following format: <name>@<domain> <name>@<domain> Example: info@codx.ch...

  • LetterShop - FTP

    • HELP_LS_SETUP_FTP

    To configure an FTP communication channel, you must have the access data of the corresponding FTP server. Please make sure that you enter the data correctly. The following settings must be configured for each FTP communication channel. Application information Communication channel active With this checkbox you can set a configured communication channel to active or inactive. FTP connection inbound or outbound...

  • LetterShop - Partner Settings

    • HELP_LS_SETUP_CHANNEL_XML

    This configuration file contains settings which are assigned to a specific communication channel. This specification describes the structure of an LS job config file. This LS job config file contains all the settings for an LS job. Please note that the order of the elements must match the order in the schema definition. in the schema definition. Optional means that the corresponding element in the XML file may be missing. XML element Field type...

  • LetterShop - Partner Settings

    • HELP_LS_SETUP_DETAIL

    The detailed settings of a LetterShop partner are divided into 2 areas. The first part contains the general settings for each LetterShop partner and the second part is a tab with the different communication channels. communication channels. General settings DesignationAny designation for the LetterShop partner. The maximum length is 254 characters. CustomerSelected customer for which the incoming data will be saved if no customer UPOC has been transferred. For selection the customer/cost center selector appears. The UPOC of this customer will then also be used for allocation. Allowed customersAll customers that are allowed in the import file. The customer/cost center selector appears for selection with the option that multiple customers can be can be selected...

  • LetterShop - Script

    • HELP_LS_SETUP_SCRIPT

    On all settings there is an entry for a pre- or postscript. For this purpose a button "Script is displayed. This button is used to display the detailed dialog for editing the scripts. Test data This area contains all fields that can be passed to a script as fixed values. The identifier in front of the field corresponds to the used variable in the script. In the editor for the script you enter a VB-Script. With the button "Test" you can check the script afterwards for its validity. With a message it is indicated whether it was executed successfully or with errors. In case of an error, a message appears which shows in detail at which point the error occurred and what kind of error it is. error occurred and what kind of error it is.

  • LetterShop - Settings

    • HELP_LS_SETUP

    Global settings The following settings apply system-wide to the entire CodX PostOffice instance. IHS OCR mode When enabled (recommended setting), the search algorithm dynamically chooses the best match from all individual search terms. If inactive, the individual search terms are linked together (logically AND) and the search must result in exactly one hit so that a recipient can be assigned. This setting can make sense in special cases. Hint: This option is only available when LetterShop is running in InHouse mode, i.e. when the IHS license is activated. Directory for IHS accounting file A special file is then created which contains certain totals of all shipments. This is copied into the specified directory and returned to the customer sent back to the customer together with the created LetterShop export file. Notice: This option is only available when LetterShop is running in InHouse mode, i.e. when the IHS license is activated. IHS Settings This button opens the CustField editing dialog. It contains all IHS settings which can be used to search for persons/cost centers and/or logistics units. These settings are valid for all, but can be overwritten. Notice: This option is only available when LetterShop is running in InHouse mode, i.e. when the IHS license is activated...

  • Lettershop - Share

    • HELP_LS_SETUP_SHARE

    To configure a share communication channel, you should have read and write permission for the shared directories. directories. The user under which the CodX PostOffice service is running must have read and write permissions. Please make sure that you enter the data correctly. The following settings must be configured for each share communication channel. Application information Communication channel active With this checkbox you can set a configured communication channel to active or inactive. Scripts...

  • LetterShop IHS Settings

    • HELP_LETTERSHOP_SETUP_IHSSETTINGS

    These Settings contain all IHS settings that are used for the search of persons/cost centers and/or logistics units to achieve the to achieve the highest possible hit rate. View A list of all existing attributes is displayed for editing. The first column contains the name of the The second column contains the value of the attribute that can be edited. To edit a value click with the mouse on the corresponding column and change the value. Designation (Custfieldname)...

  • Log files for KO CL - Cooperation Clearing

    • HELP_KO_SETUP_KOLOGFILESDLG

    In this selection dialog you will see an overview of all log files created by KO Clearing, provided you have this license. license. View log files Select an entry from the list of log files and press the [Open] button or double-click on the highlighted item. After that an html log file opens with your default browser. Exit the dialog again with the [Close] key. See also:...

  • Logic for determining the currently valid data set based on the date range

    • HELP_LOGIK_GET_CURRENT_DATE_RANGE

    In several locations in CodX PostOffice, you can assignments can be made for a specific duration. The logic for determining the valid data record is explained using the three data records with different effectivity areas. (see figure) If several validity areas exist for the current day, the following sequence for determining the currently valid data record...

  • Logic for determining the workstation or mailbox facility based on precedence

    • HELP_LOGIK_GET_LOCATION_OR_MBS

    In several locations in CodX PostOffice you can assignments for the workstation and the mailbox system tray can be made. The logic for determining the workstation or of the P.O. box is to be explained using the four examples. (see picture) The green marked data records apply to the current day. If there are several data records without precedence and they all have the same time range, the user must make a selection. user must make a selection. (Case 4) The following precondition must already be fulfilled: Service and validity area. Behaviour based on priority...

  • Logon

    • HELP_POSTATUSVIEW_LOGON_DLG

    In order to log in to CodX PostOffice, you must enter the employee ID here. Depending on the user login settings enter here the UPOC / Pers. no. or Ext. pers. no. (employee data). Settings for user logon. If you want that after the start of CodX PostOffice, select the checkbox here. the checkbox.

  • Mail Alliance Clearing Interface

    • HELP_MAILALLIANCE_SETUP

    #MailAllianceClearing

    The Mail Alliance Clearing Interface (#MailAllianceClearing) can be used to export mail data from Mail Alliance partners. The received files are then manually imported into the Tomato system (before 11:59 a.m.), so these files should be created between the daytime switching time of CodX PostOffice, usually 9:00 a.m. (custfield 1012 FAServer), and 11:59 a.m. All consignment data whose planned delivery date corresponds to the current day is exported. The shipment data is grouped by partners and saved in DAT format. The location for this can be freely selected. With an additional license for mail alliance Clearing Interface (FA_RM), the settings of the FA invoice clients for the E-ZUP are also taken into account during export. The export is executed by the Job Engine. The job is called: Mail Alliance Clearing Interface: Shipment Export Previously, Pre- and Postscript could still be defined in the Setuppage. Now these must be defined directly in the job. To do this, you must add a Script Task and enter the corresponding script as an attribute...

  • mail alliance SEM interface

    • HELP_MAILALLIANCE_SEM_INTERFACE_OVERVIEW

    The Mail Manager (SEM) from mail alliance is a software program that allows letters, mailings and invoices to be routed quickly and easily. can be routed. This means that items from all 120 or so mail service providers nationwide can be included in the routing and calculation. The module SEM-Interface of CodX PostOffice transfers the routing information from CodX PostOffice to the shipment manager on the one hand. and on the other hand the shipment data to be processed is imported into CodX PostOffice. For further information, please refer to the product info of the mail alliance SEM interface. The mail alliance SEM interface works optimally in combination with the mail alliance CNDB module (Cooperation) and the mail alliance Clearing Interface (Tomato) and the module WE - Incoming Goods. These are not the subject of this documentation. SEM interface in CodX PostOffice...

  • Mailbox system compartments

    • HELP_MAILBOXSYSTEM_BIN_TAB_DLG

    Each compartment system consists of compartments. All subjects are listed in the list. The symbols in the left column indicate the status: Green: The tray is available (Active) Yellow: The compartment is available but currently in Maintenance (Maintenance) Red: The tray is not available. It will not be for mail delivery. (Inactive)...

  • Mailbox system Operator

    • HELP_MAILBOXSYSTEM_OPERATER_TAB_DLG

    Employees may be assigned to perform specific work on the subject facility. The following work may be assigned: Operation (filling the mailbox) Maintenance Cleaning (for lockers)...

  • Mailbox system PC

    • HELP_MAILBOXSYSTEM_PC_TAB_DLG

    Each compartment system is controlled by at least one PC. The list shows all the PCs that belong to this compartment system. The symbols in the left column indicate the type. There are the following types: Control PC Operating terminal There is one control PC per compartment system, which is responsible for controlling the compartments of a compartment system. Optionally, several operating terminals can be defined...

  • Mailbox system Select recipient

    • HELP_MAILBOXSYSTEM_RECEIVER_SELECTOR

    Here you can directly select the recipient of a shipment from. This application is used if no valid UPOC or alternative code is available when filling the no valid UPOC or alternative code is available and the recipient's name is entered. and the recipient name is entered. The list shows all entries found (persons or customers/cost centers) are displayed. If you have found no search result or too many, leave the dialog with the dialog with Cancel and enter the recipient name again correctly. again correctly. If necessary, leave out a part of the name or complete it. Which and how many search results you see here you define under settings 0900, 0910, 0911,0912,0913)...

  • Mailbox system Special function

    • HELP_MAILBOXSYSTEMEXTRABINDLG

    Here you can make the definitions of a special functions. No special functions are defined for mailbox systems without control. General settings For each special function you can enter a identifier, UPOC and comment for each special function. Each special function has a UPOC. If no it will be assigned automatically when saving. When save, the system checks whether it is valid and unique. (Unique for subjects and special functions)...

  • Mailbox system Special functions

    • HELP_MAILBOXSYSTEM_EXTRABIN_TAB_DLG

    Special functions are understood to mean the control of electrical compartments such as outgoing mail compartment, peripheral compartment, roller shutters, access doors, etc. Any number of special functions can be special functions can be recorded. No special functions are defined for mailbox systems without control. The list shows all associated special functions are listed.

  • Mailbox systems / tray selector

    • HELP_MAILBOXSYSTEMBIN_SELECTOR_DLG

    Use this selector to select mailboxes and/or compartments of a mailbox. For persons, you also have the option for dynamic tray assignment, you also have the option of choosing whether the P.O. box is is inherited from the current work center. Further there are 3 different modes, in which the selector works. This is either the selection of a P.O. box, the selection of a compartment of a P.O. box or the selection of a P.O. box and a compartment together. mailbox and a compartment together. All available P.O. box systems with their compartments are displayed in a tree structure, in addition to the current assignment of persons and customers/cost centers. With the input line for the search term you have the possibility to search for several search terms which are separated by blanks and "AND". are linked. When assigning mailboxes, only mailboxes are available for selection...

  • Mailbox systems / tray selector

    • HELP_MAILBOXSYSTEMBIN_SELECTOR_DLG_SD

    With this selector you select locker systems and/or compartments of a locker system. Further there are 3 different modes, in which the selector works. This is either the selection of a locker system, the selection of a compartment of a locker system or the selection of a locker system and a compartment together. locker system and a locker together. All available safe deposit boxes are displayed with their compartments in a tree structure, along with the current allocation of of persons. With the input line for the search term, you have the option of searching for several search terms separated by spaces and "AND". are linked. When assigning lockers, only lockers are available for selection. Please note the following:...

  • Mailbox systems Operation - Filling

    • HELP_MAILBOXSYSTEM_HANDLING_FILLNG_DLG

    Select mailbox To work in this module, you must always select a mailbox system first. If you are working on a computer that is assigned to a mailbox this system is automatically selected and cannot be changed. Assigning a computer to a P.O. box system can be done by via the button with the pin (top right), or in the module Mailbox Management. Right To perform actions, the rights under Mail Box System mailbox must be set accordingly. Filling method (from the rear/front)...

  • Mailbox systems Operation - Maintenance

    • HELP_MAILBOXSYSTEM_HANDLING_MAINTENANCE_DLG

    Selecting a P.O. box system To work in this module, you must always select a mailbox system first. If you are working on a computer that is assigned to a mailbox this system is automatically selected and cannot be changed. Assigning a computer to a P.O. box system can be done by via the button with the pin (top left), or in the Mailbox Management module. Right In order to open mailboxes here, the rights have to be under Mail Box System Mailbox / Maintenance Maintenance...

  • Mailbox systems operation - overview

    • HELP_MAILBOXSYSTEM_HANDLING_GENERALVIEW_DLG

    There are four tabs in the Mailboxes module. If you have a license for dispatch the register Shipping is available. These five tabs stand for different tasks of the operator. Overview of the entire system with manual execution of special functions and manual emptying of individual compartments Filling the system Shipping (optional) Forced emptying of individual compartments...

  • Mailbox systems Operation - Shipping

    • HELP_MAILBOXSYSTEM_HANDLING_SHIPPING_DLG

    General If a license for the mailbox system dispatch and you are working on a computer that is assigned to a mailbox system, you will see this tab. If you change the P.O. box, the tab remains visible, but you cannot remains visible, but you cannot make any entries. You can therefore only make entries if you are on the computer of the of the mailbox system. Select mailbox To work in this module, you must always select a mailbox system first. If you are working on a computer that is assigned to a mailbox this system is automatically selected and cannot be changed. Assigning a computer to a P.O. box system can be done by via the button with the pin (top right), or in the module Mailbox Management...

  • Mailbox systems operation - Userlog

    • HELP_MAILBOXSYSTEM_HANDLING_LOG_DLG

    Select mailbox To work in this module, you must always select a mailbox system first. If you are working on a computer that is assigned to a mailbox this system is automatically selected and cannot be changed. Assigning a computer to a P.O. box system can be done by via the button with the pin (top left), or in the Mailbox Management module. Right To perform actions, the rights under Mail Box System mailbox must be set accordingly...

  • Mailbox systems Tray

    • HELP_MAILBOXSYSTEMBINDLG

    Module configuration General definitions Here they can make the basic definition of a subject. Each compartment has a unique number within the compartment system. Each compartment has a UPOC. If you do not specify one, it will be automatically when saving. When saving, a check is made to ensure that this is valid and unique. (Unique for subjects and special functions) The remark can be used to specify the subject dimensions to be specified. This helps when selecting a compartment for dispatch or when depositing. The lock ID stands for the I/O address of the compartment. (Details can be found here) None must be assigned for compartments without control. Mailbox systems without control can only have compartments without control. Status...

  • Mailboxes: Settings

    • HELP_MAILBOXSYSTEM_CONFIGURATION_CUSTFIELDS

    In this dialog the Custfields to the module MBS - Fachanlagen are made in this dialog. Please note, that all settings except the default performance for dummy dummy items can be different for each P.O. box system. For further help on edit custfields, please refer to the corresponding help. Available options Designation (Custfieldname) value (table ID: 2263, lID = ID from table Mailboxsystem)...

  • Manage licenses

    • HELP_CXLIC_LICENSE

    #license

    This dialog is used to manage the licenses (#license) of CodX PostOffice. Customer information Enter the customer information as specified by CodX Software AG. The instance identification (instance ID) is used if you as a customer have more than one instance of CodX PostOffice in use. You will receive this information from CodX Software. Import licenses...

  • Manual Capture Receiver Selection

    • HELP_CXLETTERSCAN_MANUAL_CAPTURE_SELECT

    Enter the (IHS) recipient of the shipment in this dialog. In the field Search terms field, enter the known information about the consignee. This can be a name, first name or also, for example, office number. The results found are displayed in the list Recipients found displayed. You can select the recipient from this list and then transfer them to the CxLetterScan for processing. The more precise the recipient data is entered, the better the results are narrowed down, until finally only a single receiver is is available, which can be accepted directly with the ENTER key. The display of the search results can be configured using the dialog Filter Recipient List dialog. Buttons...

  • Manual Outbound Shipment Entry (MS-AZD)

    • HELP_MSAZD_MSAZDVIEW

    Content Introduction Acquisition mode Procedure for manual entry Input fields...

  • Manual sorting (early entry)

    • HELP_MSFrueh

    Now you can find the manual of this module online on our webserver. This has the advantage that we can incorporate additions and changes more quickly and easily. Link to the manual of your version (PDF file)...

  • Manual sorting (late entry)

    • HELP_MSSpaet

    Now you can find the manual of this module online on our webserver. This has the advantage that we can incorporate additions and changes more quickly and easily. Link to the manual of your version (PDF file)...

  • Mapping of production output

    • HELP_FA_PRODUCTIONSERVICE

    In this register the assignment of production service to billing service. Shipments are recorded with production services. If a mapping was made for the mapping has been carried out for the production service, the system data, the production service is replaced by the billing service and the the production service is replaced by the billing service and the corresponding corresponding article is determined. The related services and articles are then taken into account by the billing service and not by the production service. production service. If the billing service was used, the shipment receives a corresponding event. corresponding event. This shows which is the earlier and which is the new service. NOTE: The original article may only be assigned to one service provider zone so that the associated item is determined for the billing service. is determined. If this is not the case, the original item will be charged. will be charged. If no article can be determined for the billing service can be determined, the original article is also is also charged...

  • MBS - General settings

    • HELP_MAILBOXSYSTEM_SETUP_MBS_COMMON_SETTING_DLG

    This dialog contains all the custfields that are available for the are available for the module Trays (MailBoxSystem). View A list of all existing attributes is displayed for editing. The first column contains the name of the The second column contains the value of the attribute that can be edited. To edit a value click with the mouse on the corresponding column and change the value. CustFields Designation (Custfieldname)...

  • MDE app courier system

    • HELP_MDEApp_Courier

    The MDE app "Courier System" is used for mobile processing and documentation of courier orders by courier drivers. Data exchange with CodX PostOffice takes place automatically in the background using the "CxSync" app. Notice: To use this app you need basic knowledge of Windows Mobile 6.5 operation (buttons, input fields, (context) menus, lists, ...). This is not the content of this online help. Content Licenses and user rights Launch App / Log In...

  • MDE app delivery

    • HELP_MDEApp_Zustellung

    The MDE app "Delivery" is used for the mobile recording of events for consignments, bundles and boxes; in particular for documenting of the delivery. If an event is assigned to a group (district, district group, depot, unloading point, delivery organization, delivery tour or delivery tour group), it is delivery route group), all shipments that belong to this group and its planned delivery group and whose planned delivery date corresponds to the current date are assigned the corresponding event. The device receives all shipments that meet the following conditions: The shipment must be delivered by the be delivered by the logged in employee The shipment was entered no more than 6 days ago. (Time of planned delivery) The shipment has an event "Annamhe to Delivery".....

  • MDE App Shipment Entry

    • HELP_MDEApp_Capture

    The MDE app "Shipment entry" is used for the mobile entry of shipments. The app can be used to capture the following entities can be captured. Power (1) Cost unit (2) Shipment UPOC (3)...

  • Menu additional print

    • HELP_MSOS_ZUSATZDRUCK

    In addition to the label, a form can also be printed out for each shipment. This form can be for example a return receipt or delivery note. If now the addition print is switched on when entering a shipment, a corresponding form is printed. Print [On/Off] Printing via an additionally connected printer (not DirectPrint) can be switched on or off. Print again... After the input of a consignment UPOC, the last generated result can be printed again via an additionally connected printer (not DirectPrint). result can be printed again. Printing when changing customer Herewith a possibly defined report is started after each customer change, which is printed before and after the customer change.

  • Module Codx Support

    • HELP_CXSUPPORT_VIEW

    The CodX Support module provides central access to the CodX PostOffice knowledge base and ticketing system. Create support requests... Create support requests for the ZenDesk ticketing system directly in CodX PostOffice. So that also quickly and easily submit files and log files to ZenDesk. Web Support In Web Support you will find various technical and non-technical information about CodX PostOffice. In Web Support, you can often find the answer to your question without starting a support request. For more information on Web Support, see WS#63193: Using ZenDesk Support and Knowledge Base Web Support...

  • Move Management

    • HELP_CDM0110_MOVEMANAGEMENTDLG

    The Move Management tab displays all move data that has been cyclically imported by the import job and has not yet been and has not yet been completely processed. The format of the import file is specified by the CS. CodX PostOffice needs the columns 19 (PID) and 11 (Relocation date), as well as the columns (38) Target building code, (39) Target honeycomb and (40) Target floor value. In addition to the data from the file, the system also displays the processing status, the file name, the current instradication, and the determined person and cost center are displayed. This dialog is used to assign a new address to the imported relocation data and to delete unwanted relocation data before it is processed. before it is processed. In addition, an import can be performed manually from a workstation. The list has a context menu that can be displayed with the right mouse button. In this context menu you have the possibility to select all entries by means of the activation box or to deselect all entries or to reverse the existing selection. invert. View The dialog contains three elements. The upper part contains the filter settings, which only contain the filter for the status new. status. Below this is the list of all existing relocation data in the database that have not yet been processed. Next to the list are the buttons with all available functions. Below the list there is a user log control in which the respective active/last import is displayed...

  • MS-IHS

    • HELP_MSIHS_MSIHSVIEW

    Mail Entry Manual Receipt (MS-IHS) is used to control various processes in the internal mailroom. This can concern the internal sorting for any or special mail items as well as outgoing mail. CodX PostOffice IHS offers all functions required for the control of an internal mailroom. the control of an internal mailroom. On the one hand, it is about a fast processing of the mail and on the other hand about the qualitative delivery of the agreed service level. The following links will take you directly to the corresponding descriptions: Determination of receiver in MS/OS-IHS Function keys Input fields...

  • MS-IHS

    • HELP_POLIBRARY_CONFIRM_CHARGE_SERVICE_DLG

    This dialog is used to determine which of the selected services/articles will be charged to the cost unit (sender). The dialog is automatically displayed if for at least one of the selected services the Property "Charge" as <optional>. is defined for at least one of the selected services. Select the services to be charged by setting the corresponding checkbox (via keyboard with the SPACE key). Buttons OK The entered data is accepted...

  • MV - Additional data

    • HELP_MV_ZUSATZDATEN_DLG

    Additional data on the employee is recorded in this register. Phone number private / mobile / business Fax Occupation Email...

  • MV - Basic data

    • HELP_MV_GRUNDDATEN_DLG

    The most important data of an employee is recorded in this register. Depot: The selection of a depot can influence the access rights to the corresponding employee. Unloading point: If the employee is assigned to an unloading point, the employee is also listed there. (See Carrier Route Management) Person: This entry is only available for BK-plant licenses. This assignment is necessary for employees who are allowed to fill a fill a BK system. UPOC: Automatically assigned...

  • MV - Settlement

    • HELP_MV_ABRECHNUNG

    In this tab, the payrolls per employee can be viewed and edited. With the help of the filter the displayed payroll days can be restricted. Attention: The deletion of payroll days is best done shortly before the payroll is closed, otherwise the payroll data will be generated again by the payroll run. payroll data is generated again by the payroll run. List The list shows the settlement days. The first column contains a symbol in each case. The symbols have the following meaning: Red with white Euro sign Red with white Euro sign...

  • Neopost

    • HELP_Neopost

    Now you can find the manual of this module online on our webserver. This has the advantage that we can incorporate additions and changes more quickly and easily. Link to the manual of your version (PDF file)...

  • New automatic support request

    • HELP_CXSUPPORT_CREATETICKET_AUTO

    This dialog is used to enter a new support request in the ticketing system ZenDesk Input fields Email address: Enter your email address. This is used for identification and feedback. Subject: Enter a subject that is as accurate as possible so that you can find the support ticket again later...

  • New manual support request

    • HELP_CXSUPPORT_CREATETICKET_MANUELL

    This dialog is used to enter a new support request in the ticketing system ZenDesk Input fields Email address: Enter your email address. This is used for identification and feedback. Subject: Enter a subject that is as accurate as possible so that you can find the support ticket again later...

  • no description available

    • HELP_CXREPORT_NONE_REPORT_DESCRIPTION_AVAILABLE

    No description is available for this customer-specific report.

  • Number detail

    • HELP_FAKTURIERUNG_SETUP_FA_CONFIG_DETAIL

    #xx

    The following numbering systems are available for these different types: UPOC Each document type is assigned the corresponding UPOC. Variable For the creation of invoice numbers, month and year numbers can be automatically taken into account. The structure of the numbers can be can be defined. A number that is incremented by one must be included. The start value of the format type Variable can be reset. When saving a lower value, a corresponding message appears, which must be must be confirmed. Number The numbers are incremented by one starting with the stored value. The start value of the format type number cannot be reset. be reset. Customized A function to be defined (in the database) determines the number...

  • OCR sorting IHS

    • HELP_OSIHS_OSIHSVIEW

    Content Introduction Procedure of the acquisition Camera(OCR) / Manual Mode Post processing of consignments...

  • OCR Station v4

    • HELP_OCRStation

    Now you can find the manual of this module online on our webserver. This has the advantage that we can incorporate additions and changes more quickly and easily. Link to the manual of your version (PDF file)...

  • Options

    • HELP_CUSTFIELD_SETUP

    Call via module Settings / General Tab General Function: Display further options.... Select the group specified in the instructions and change the desired value. In many options, the possible variants or units of the value to be entered are given after the identifier in [brackets]. The terms themselves are mostly very technical (mostly English) and are deliberately not translated...

  • Order data

    • HELP_PV_ORDER

    Orders can be entered as well as edited and deleted here. Filter With the filter you can further limit the number of displayed orders. (by date as well as status and order number) The search for certain order numbers. can be done with *(asterisk). This includes any characters in its place. The following formats are possible for the search: AB*, *AB*, *AB List The list shows the orders for the selected person. The first column contains a symbol in each case. The symbols have the following meaning:...

  • Order detail

    • HELP_FAVIEW_AUFTRAG_DETAIL

    Here you edit the order data. If you create a new order, order items are created with the quantity 0 if you have added articles under the settings Administration / Invoicing / Favorite articles. Shipment-related and non-shipment-related order items The order detail view can contain shipment related or non shipment related services. An individual order item is shipment-related or not shipment-related. Shipment-related means that this order item is based on concretely entered shipments (to MS - manual sorting aid or a sorting machine). sorting aid or a sorting machine) are the basis for this order item. You can recognise a consignment-related item by the fact that the "Consignments" button is activated. is activated. Order items from partners (logistics remuneration) Although these order items are shipment-based, the shipment data cannot be changed. You can only make changes can be made to the order items. If the underlying shipment data changes, these items are recalculated in each case...

  • Order detail

    • HELP_UPOCCENTER_UPOCS_PRODUZIEREN_DLG

    UPOCs can be output in three ways: Text - file (CSV) with the two columns UPOC in plain text and UPOC converted for barcode font, column separator is the tabulator. Microsoft - Excel (XLS) file with two columns UPOC in plain text and UPOC converted for barcode font In table "UPOCReportsTempTabel". This allows a report to output the generated UPOCs in any form (e.g. to Zweckform forms). The maximum number of UPOCs per allocation is limited to 50000 (because of MS-Excel). The path name of the output file must be set manually via the file selection dialog manually...

  • Order run / order import settings

    • HELP_FASERVER_CUSTFIELD

    Here you find all settings for the order run and the order import. Below is a list of all available attributes. In the first column is the name of the Attribute, in the 2nd column is the value of the attribute, which can be edited. To edit a value click with the mouse on the corresponding column and change the value. FAServer settings Name (Custfieldname) Value (table ID: 1012, lID = 0)...

  • Overview goods receipt

    • HELP_WE_SUMMARY

    In this overview, for mail types postcon, Cooperation, Lettershop, Mail Aliance SEM Interface, customers, pick-up tour and DIE POST a summary of the last 10 days are displayed. The overview updates itself every 5 minutes as well as after the start of CodX PostOffice. The view of the respective shipment types depends on the available licenses. depends on the available licenses. The status of a group of items is status of a group of mailings is shown by an icon, possible open are open, closed and error. The columns of the overview contain the following information: Column caption Description Shipment type The following shipment types are supported, if the corresponding license is available: - postcon - Lettershop - cooperation - Mail Aliance SEM Interface - Customer (currently not implemented) - Pickup Tour (currently not implemented) - THE POST...

  • P.O. Box Alarm

    • HELP_MAILBOXSYSTEM_ALARMING

    For certain errors there is an alarm via CodX WatchDog there is an alarm. This is triggered in the event of an error and when the corrects itself, the alarm is automatically reset. automatically reset. The available alarms are automatically created by the module Fachanlagen. The following alarms are available. Alarm MBS: Tray open too long If a compartment has been opened and is no longer closed, an alarm is triggered after a number of minutes defined in the settings. an alarm is triggered after a number of minutes defined in the settings. compartments have been open for longer than xx minutes. If a compartment is closed again the waiting time, the alarm is automatically reset. reset. Please note that this alarm only works for trays that have an which have an input status. Alarm MBS: A tray was opened without a command from CodX PostOffice...

  • P.O. Box Assignment

    • HELP_MAILBOXSYSTEMBINASSIGNMENTCTRL

    Here the assignments to mailboxes can be made for the corresponding person or customer/cost center. (Time and service-dependent) In addition, the rights can also be defined. List The preceding symbol indicates the following can be seen:...

  • P.O. Box Assignment

    • HELP_MAILBOXSYSTEMBINASSIGNMENTCTRL_SD

    Here you can make the assignments to lockers for the corresponding person. It is possible to assign several lockers to one person. However, a locker cannot be assigned to several people at the same time. Only one dynamic allocation per person, locker and period can be created. List The preceding symbol indicates the following can be seen:...

  • P.O. Box Collection Settings

    • HELP_MAILBOXSYSTEM_VIEW_SETUP

    This dialog shows the settings for the "Compartment systems collection" dialog. There are only a few settings, among others by means of the "Settings" button. For this purpose, the dialog can be displayed directly from the settings dialog. This settings dialog and the following described dialog will only be displayed if there is still a license "Additional license for access control" is still available and if the name of the workstation on which this dialog is to be displayed occurs in a a compartment system. Operation View Displays the P.O. Box Pickup dialog P.O. Boxes Collection Dialog Since this dialog has no help, it is described here. The dialog has 4 elements, these consist of:...

  • P.O. Box deposit

    • HELP_MAILBOXSYSTEM_DEPOSIT_TAB_DLG

    Intelligent mailbox systems can be used for the protected deposit of parcels, letters, etc. Normally, the post office is not involved in this process. involved. The deposit is carried out directly between the sender and the recipient. Here you define which person(s) as consignor or consignee or recipient may use the deposit: The following entries are necessary for this: - Period - Person is recipient - Person is sender - Person the following options are available for the person : In general, all persons who are present in CodX PostOffice :...

  • P.O. box operation - forced emptying

    • HELP_MAILBOXSYSTEM_HANDLING_FORCE_CLEARING_DLG

    Select mailbox To work in this module, you must always select a mailbox system first. If you are working on a computer that is assigned to a mailbox this system is automatically selected and cannot be changed. Assigning a computer to a P.O. box system can be done by via the button with the pin (top left), or in the Mailbox Management module. Right To perform actions, the rights under Mail Box System mailbox must be set accordingly...

  • P.O. Box XX

    • HELP_MAILBOXSYSTEM_MBS_TAB_DLG

    Here you enter specific settings that only apply to mailbox systems. For mailbox systems without control, the setting for filling and overflow is omitted. Filling Select how the mailbox is filled. Filling from the rear (the compartments are freely accessible at the rear but separated from the pick-up)...

  • P.O. Boxes

    • HELP_MAILBOXSYSTEMDLG

    Here you can make the general definition of a compartment installation. Name Give the mailbox a short but meaningful name. This name will be used for the notification e-mails from 'you have mail'. Comments The remark is only used for internal purposes...

  • P.O. Boxes

    • HELP_MAILBOXSYSTEM_SCHLOSSID

    The lock ID is used for the locker control. The lock ID is used to define which electrical input or output is controlled for the corresponding locker. Depending on the locker control used, different addressing must be carried out. CxNet.CxIO module The CxIO module is a modular control module that was specially developed for compartment systems. Each module is assigned a unique module address. Each module can control 21 or 48 lockers (IO). An output is opened as long as defined in the settings. defined in the settings. If the port has an input, the the duration is shortened until the input is active. The addressing is done according to the scheme module address.IO...

  • P.O. Boxes Law

    • HELP_MAILBOXSYSTEM_RIGHT_DLG

    The entry is made directly in the table. To create a new record, click the Add button. With the selector you choose depending from where you call this dialog, a compartment, a person or a customer/cost center. As a right you select Access or Locked. After clicking the [User Log] button, a dialog box displays the changes made to the selected right. selected right. If you have not selected a right, all deleted rights are displayed. The description of the UserLog can be found in a separate manual...

  • P.O. Boxes Specialist Classes

    • HELP_MAILBOXSYSTEM_SETUP_MBSBIN_CLASS_DLG

    In CodX PostOffice you can define any number of define any number of tray classes for tray attachments. Subject classes are taken into account for persons, if a dynamic subject assignment is defined for the person. person has a dynamic subject assignment defined. Thus you would be be able, for example, to define certain subjects for handicapped persons for handicapped persons. To do this, you only have to assign a assign a name. To add or delete a subject class a button is available for each. If you want to change the name, simply click in the list, change it and then and then click on Save. Each compartment can then be assigned several specialist can be assigned. However, this is not mandatory. For the person, you can then define which subject classes are to be used or not used under Subject attachments. or not to be used. (Mandatory, Preferred, Not)...

  • P.O. Boxes Tray Assignment

    • HELP_MAILBOXSYSTEMBIN_ASSIGNMENT_DLG

    Here you can make the assignment of a P.O. box. If you are unable to make an entry, this is a dynamic assignment that has already been has already been automatically assigned to a box. Such an assignment can only be edited once the box has been emptied. When you enter assignments, the system does not check whether such an entry already exists. Time range For a customer/cost center assignment, the validity period is limited by the validity period of the customer/cost center. validity period. For a person assignment the validity period is limited by the validity period of the person. If a validity period (person/customer/cost center) changes subsequently, the time range of the assignment is automatically adjusted if necessary. Determining the currently valid tray / mailbox system...

  • P.O. Boxes Tray Assignment

    • HELP_MAILBOXSYSTEMBIN_ASSIGNMENT_DLG_SD

    Here you can assign a safe deposit box. If you are unable to make an entry, this is a dynamic assignment that has already been has already been assigned to a locker. You can only edit such an assignment can only be edited once the locker has been deregistered. Several compartments can be statically assigned to one person. However, only a dynamic assignment. Time range For a person assignment, the validity period is limited by the validity period of the person. If the validity period of a person changes subsequently, the time range of the assignment is automatically adjusted if necessary...

  • ParsingRule

    • HELP_CONFIGSERVER_SETUP_PARSINGRULE

    Here you can edit the definitions for a ParsingRule can be edited. A CodeRule can have several ParsingRules which are all used according to a defined order. order. Active A ParsingRule is only taken into account if it is also is also active. Name The name of the ParsingRule...

  • Partner basic settings

    • HELP_CXSYNC_PARTNERSETTINGS

    Here you can make basic settings that apply to each connected mobile device. These values can be overwritten individually for each device in the Edit partner window. Retain registration duration (default 60 min) After this time, without any interaction, the logged on user is user is automatically logged off in the mobile device. Low battery warning (default 30%) If the battery level is lower than this value, a warning is warning is displayed. Primary item search field (default empty) Specified one or more optional search fields for the item search. This is described in detail here. Primary Person Search Field (default empty) Specifies an optional searchfield for the person search.

  • Partner Definitions

    • HELP_PARTNER_CTRL

    Header 2 Header 3 Text See also: Link 1 to WS#...

  • Partner function Definitions

    • HELP_BUSINESS_PARTNER_CTRL

    The settings for the partner functions can be made here. This will take place at the following locations: Customer management: Partner function tab BV: In the depot (Advanced tab) BV: At the transshipment point...

  • Partner Function Performance Mapping

    • HELP_BUSINESS_PARTNER_PAYMENT_PRODUCT_MAP_CTRL

    For more information, see the FA Invoicing or BV-District Administration user guide. The partner function does not exist for is not available. Partner function for courier orders Partner remuneration works differently for courier orders than for shipments. (not via the district data)...

  • Password guidelines

    • HELP_DBSERVER_CHECK_PASSWORD

    The password must be at least 8 characters long. It must contain at least one upper and one lower case letter. It must contain at least one digit and one special character. There should be no parts of the user name in the password.

  • Payment term detail

    • HELP_FA_SETUP_DIALOG_ZAHLUNGSBEDINGUNG

    Designation Give the payment term a short but concise name. Net payment term [dd] Define the number of days until when the invoice must be paid net. Payment period discount 1 [dg] Define the number of days for which cash discount 1 can be deducted, if applicable. Discount 1 [%] Define the percentage that may be deducted for a cash discount 1, if applicable. Payment period discount 2 [dd] Define the number of days for which cash discount 2 can be deducted...

  • PDF viewer

    • HELP_PDF_VIEWER

    General The PDF Viewer displays the desired PDF. The following following functions are available: The displayed invoice is printed on the desired printer. In the print dialog only the following can be set: - Select printer - the pages to be printed - the number of copies ATTENTION:Printer specific settings are not taken over! For example, if you want to print in black and white or in color, you must define the same printer twice in Windows and name it accordingly. accordingly. Once for shcwarz/white and once for colored. Additionally there is an optional print (for example for payment slips): This additional invoice print is executed if under the setting in the CustField TableID=1014 (Invoicing) ID=0 the parameter fInvoiceAdditional Print is set to 1. Of course, the corresponding report must also be available. (Customer-specific.adp)...

  • People

    • HELP_PV

    To find a person, you can enter the search term in the field of the same name and press the Search button. The results are then displayed in the list below. You can also not enter a search term, so that all people, depending on the other settings. If the search result contains more than 2000 persons, a message appears and the first 2000 persons are displayed. This maximum number(lMaxSearchResult) can be changed in the Custfield (lTableID = 1646). However, a larger number leads to the fact that the search also takes longer. Connection character: + Both search terms must occur in one parameter Example: peter+Karl...

  • People identification

    • HELP_PV_IDENTIFIER

    In thisem identifications in the form of PIN codes, RFID cards and user name/password are and user name/password for the selected person, which can be used to used for the recognition of a person in different applications. in different applications. For example, the PIN code or an RFID card can be used to can be used for recognizing the opening of boxes in the mailbox collection dialog can be used. Any number of identifications can be recorded for one person. No duplicate duplicate entries are used, this is checked during entry. checked. The module person import or person administration executes a job, which runs daily at 1:00 o'clock and for all persons who do not yet have a PIN or who have an expired PIN, a new PIN with a validity period defined in the job. defined in the job. Likewise, expired PINs are completely deleted from the system after a lifetime defined in the job. defined in the job. This job "0108:0001 PV: PIN assignment", which was set up as a system job. system job. View On the dialog there is a grid in which all recorded identification entered identification assignments are visible. On the right side of the grid are the function buttons. Please note that the value, i.e. the PIN code. RFID-ID and/or user/password is only displayed as when editing the identifications is only displayed as ********, you will only see the value when you only when re-entering the value, after that it is no longer displayed...

  • Performance Detail

    • HELP_TARIFMODELL_SETUP_LEISTUNG_DETAIL

    Non-shipment-related service / logistics remuneration / courier system services The following settings can be made for non consignment-related services, logistics remuneration and courier system services : Master Specifies who the master is for this record: To manually edit the record, the master must be set to User Interface or <undefined>. To update the update the record with the rate model import, the master must be set to Import or <undefined>. Designation Define a service name that you will encounter again and again throughout the software. This should therefore describe the service briefly, unambiguous and concise. (Multilingual) Short name The abbreviated design ation is used for any imprint on the performance label (multilingual)...

  • Person

    • HELP_PV_DLG

    Here you have the possibility to enter all important data of this person. The only mandatory information is the name, which must be specified so that the person can be added. If they do not assign a customer/cost center to the person, they are simply made aware of it. The private e-mail address is only used in connection with private mail. Namely, the person will be notified when they receive private mail. Web API User Profile: You can only make this setting only if you have the corresponding license. With the User Profile you set which information the person has access to via a a Web application. A change of this setting is only applied after a restart of the service. The definitions of the user profiles can be found under: Settings / Interfaces / Web API User Profiles. Edit person...

  • Person - Customer/Cost Center Assignment Dialog

    • HELP_PERSON_CUSTOMER_ASSIGNMENT_DLG

    Here you can make the assignment from the customer/cost center to a person and vice versa. When entering assignments, there is no check whether such an entry already exists. Time range The range for the time specification is set by the person and the customer/cost center on the basis of the existing validity time ranges. set. If an existing assignment date is outside the range, it is changed so that it lies within the range for the time specification. If you change the customer/cost center or the person, the range for the time specification is also adjusted if necessary...

  • Person - Private delivery address

    • HELP_PV_PRIVATE_DELIVERY_ADR

    Do you want to offer the employee to have his mail to the company and you want to process it with CodX PostOffice you can make the necessary settings here. The employee can then request an address for private mail, which consists of the company address and the delivery address (address ID). This he or she requests from an internal intranet website. Private delivery addresses can be entered here as well as edited and deleted. To do this, however, you must first select the function Delivery of private mail To use this function, the necessary licenses are required. licenses. This is a counting license. You can only use use this function only for a certain number of people. Private delivery addresses...

  • Person Customer/cost center Assignment

    • HELP_PERSON_CUSTOMER_ASSIGNMENTCTRL

    Here, the assignments of customer/cost center can be made for the corresponding person or vice versa. It depends on where they make the assignment. List The preceding symbol indicates whether the assignment is current, whether the assignment is current...

  • Person Customer/cost center Assignment

    • HELP_PERSON_PERSONSGROUP_ASSIGNMENTCTRL

    Here, the assignments of groups of persons can be made for the corresponding person or vice versa. It depends on where they make the assignment. List The preceding symbol indicates whether the assignment is current, whether the assignment is current...

  • Persons Identification Import

    • HELP_PV_IDENTIFIER_IMPORT

    With this task the person identifications are imported. The metalayer Metalayer_PersonIdentification is to be filled first using a transformation rule. Which attributes the metalayer contains can be found in the DB documentation. The data is processed in parallel in several threads. threads. The number of threads can not be set.(See Settings) On the task there is the attribute'Limit old Limit old personal identifications' attribute on the task. (activated by default) This determines whether existing data sets are to be limited. (For existing identifications for same person and same type) Procedure...

  • Pick up calendar detail

    • HELP_ABHOLKALENDER_DETAIL_DLG

    This dialog can be used to enter or edit a pickup tour instance. or edit it. If the dialog has been opened by"Add", the field for the name is a selection list with all standard pickup tours, which are valid for this day, as well as the entry <Special tour>. <Specialtour> is selected. To enter a special collection tour, select <Special tour> , otherwise select the desired standard pick-up tour and the data from the standard from the standard pick-up tour will be taken over. Each pick-up tour can be assigned who will drive the tour. If a pickup tour instance has been changed, it is assigned the status Manual. status and is therefore no longer updated. Change date...

  • Pickup tours Instances Location

    • HELP_ABHOLTOURINSTANZ_ORT_DLG

    Here you can select the customer or the location which should be considered on the pickup tour. The order of the pickup tour is determined on the basis of the "Time from". determined. The data are taken over in the same way as the data which are entered in the customer master as standard. Of course these can also be changed be changed, it should help you and simplify the execution. If you still have information about the collection, this can be entered under Comment can be entered.

  • Pitney Franking

    • HELP_Pitney

    Now you can find the manual of this module online on our webserver. This has the advantage that we can incorporate additions and changes more quickly and easily. Link to the manual of your version (PDF file)...

  • Pitney gang sort

    • HELP_PITNEY_GANGFOLGESORTIERUNG

    The Pitney Gang Sort function retrieves a gang number from a web service. The web service is implemented/operated by Pitney-Bowes and is only available from certain service providers. The sequence number is requested by the modules MS- and OS-AZD before saving a transmission. If a sequence number is available, it will be appended to the SortInfo SIX with a "-" (minus sign) as separator. This SIX is stored to the consignment and printed on the consignment label (if the consignment label is configured accordingly). Requirements The counting license "LIC_C_SQ_PB" must be available...

  • Planning delivery

    • HELP_PZ

    Now you can find the manual of this module online on our webserver. This has the advantage that we can incorporate additions and changes more quickly and easily. Link to the manual of your version (PDF file)...

  • Post office box statistics

    • HELP_RP_MBSStatistic

    The job 0015:0004 MBS: Calculate Statistics of the job engine of CodX PostOffice calculates cyclically (by default every 60 minutes) the statistics data (TrayInfo) and stores them in the database. Explicit tray actions (e.g. filling, etc.) are stored directly at the time of the action in the statistics data (TrayAction, SelfRegister). These statistics data are only available if the Intelligent Mailbox is controlled via CodX PostOffice. 0015:0004 MBS: Calculate Statistics of

  • Power: Settings

    • HELP_TARIFMODELL_SETUP_LEISTUNG_CONFIGURATION_CUSTFIELDS

    In this dialog the Custfields definitions for the services are made in this dialog. Please note, that the settings can be different for each service. For further help on edit custfields, please refer to the corresponding help. Available options Designation (Custfieldname) value (table ID: 2031, lID = X)...

  • Print date

    • HELP_ABO_PRINTDAY

    For each subscription, the persons who have a valid subscription for the current day are known. This makes it possible to determine the district and print out a consignment label. When this dialogue is confirmed, the corresponding consignments are created in the system as a billing basis and the labels or delivery reports are also printed. labels or delivery reports are printed. If the items already exist in CodX PostOffice, they will not be created again, but only the corresponding documents will be printed. documents are printed. All labels for the subscription whose dialog is currently open will be printed. Print date Select the desired day - this corresponds to the planned delivery date. Number of subscribers on this day Shows directly the quantity of labels to be printed for the day selected above.

  • Print layout syntax

    • HELP_CXLETTERSCAN_PRINTLAYOUT_SYNTAX

    Example print layout <?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> <PrintLayout Name="My Print Layout" Remark="My Remark"> < PrinterResolution hDPI="300" vDPI="300"> < PrinterParameter> < Parameter Name="XIJET_QUEUE_DEPTH" Value="2"/> </PrinterParameter> < Canvas Height="38.1" Width="200"> < LoadFont FontNo="1" File="Arial_600x300_12_400_0.XFT" Rotation="0"/> < LoadFont FontNo="2" File="USPSIMBStandard_600x300_16_500_0.XFT" Rotation="90"/> < Image File="image.gif" hPos="50" vPos="30" Height="20" Width="30"/> < Text FontNo="1" String="Hello" Top="50" Left="30" Bottom="70" Right="50" Align="Left" Reverse="0" Wrap="0" Mirror="0" BottomJustify="0"/> < Text FontNo="2" Variable="SIx" Top="150" Left="310" Bottom="170" Right="150" Align="Center" Reverse="0" Wrap="0" Mirror="0" BottomJustify="0"/> </Canvas> </PrinterResolution> </PrintLayout>...

  • Print variables

    • HELP_CXLETTERSCAN_USECASE_SERVICE_VARIABLEDLG

    In this dialog you can enter the values of print variables that are used in the printer layout. There is a defined number of variables which are predefined by the program and, if necessary and, if necessary, can be transferred with data from a processed letter. letter if necessary. However, you can also enter additional variables in this use case and assign values to them. These are then printed on the letter, provided they are used by the printer layout, printed on the letter. Please note that these printer values are for test purposes, because you can only assign the values yourself in the Maintenance use case. View This dialog contains a table with all available values. To the right of this are the buttons with the available functions. This dialog cannot be cannot be changed in size. Operation You can change the values of an existing printer variable directly by clicking with the mouse on the corresponding field in the corresponding field in the 'Value' column. The following functions are available to you:...

  • Printer configuration Label types

    • HELP_DIRECTPRINT_SETUP_LABELTYPE

    In this detail dialog, the previously selected sorter (which corresponds to a workstation) can be assigned to all found printers a label type can be assigned to all printers found. The label types define the medium, format, print mode, preprint etc. The label types are predefined and can be imported and thus updated at any time. The corresponding file can be found on our website, for instructions please refer to the web support article below. View On the dialog is a list that shows all printers found on the workstation assigned to this sorter. These are not only the label printers supported by DirectPrint, but also all Windows printers that are installed. Additionally the the NULL printer is also displayed, which can be selected as an alternative if a label printer is not available. The list consists of the following attributes: Attribute name Description...

  • Printer file status

    • HELP_DIRECTPRINT_PRINTERFILESTATUS

    Shows all images, layouts and, if applicable, fonts that have been loaded on the printer. Here's what to consider: If an image or font is deleted from a table layout in a table layout, this is not immediately apparent when the labels are immediately, as deleted files are not deleted from the printer until you restart CodX PostOffice on the printer.

  • Printer initialization

    • HELP_DIRECTPRINT_INIT

    Printer initialization resets the printer to the default settings. default settings. If you want to reset the printer to the If you want to reset the printer to the factory settings, proceed as follows, depending on the model. depending on the model: Intermec E4 Turn off the printer. Press and hold the "Feed Button" while turning on the you turn the printer back on. Release the "Feed Button" when the printer's LED of the printer flashes green. The printer now calibrates the labels (automatic measurement of the labels). After a short waiting time the test labels are printed. Press the "Feed Button" at least three seconds after the test labels are printed. If you press Ok now, the initialization is started. Turn off the printer...

  • Printer layout details

    • HELP_CXLETTERSCAN_PRINTLAYOUT_DETAIL_DLG

    This dialog is used to edit a printer layout. Name, comment as well as referenced files (fonts and images) can be maintained. A printer layout defines which data is printed in which format on an item. It elements such as static text, variables, barcodes and images are supported. To position these elements, to define their font, etc., settings are required. font, etc., settings are required. This definition of the print layout is done in XML files (see PrintLayout Syntax). All files (fonst/images) referenced in a printer layout must be included in the list! Operation...

  • Printer settings

    • HELP_LABELDEF_PRINTERCONFIG

    Shows/changes the settings for the currently selected printer in the respective printer language. This only applies to printers that are controlled via DirectPrint (COM port) (e.g. Intermec E4, Intermec PC4/PF8/OD5+, Intermec PF4i/PM43c, Sato LT408). No Windows printers.

  • Printer status

    • HELP_DIRECTPRINT_PRINTERSTATUS

    Displays information about the current primary printer.

  • Process cyclic courier order

    • HELP_COURIERSYSTEM_ORDER_ORDERCYCLIC

    Cyclical courier orders are templates for automatically generated courier orders. The entry is the same as for the courier order, only the input field "Acceptance date" is missing, this is set automatically when generating. Additionally there is a button for entering a schedule is available. The number of courier orders to be generated is calculated on the basis of the time schedule and recalculated recalculated daily or when the template is changed. It will be all cyclically generated courier orders that exist from the recalculation onwards and and have not been changed are deleted and created again. created. If the driver is selected in a cyclic courier order, this template and all courier orders created from it are considered to be planned. Please note that if a template is already scheduled, this status is also transferred to the generated courier orders created. However, these will still be deleted, as long as no manual changes have been made to the courier order. Courier orders that have been manually scheduled but generated cyclically are no longer deleted. View The same as the courier order. Operation...

  • Processing BVCustfield classes

    • HELP_BV_CUSTFIELD_CLASS

    The extended attributes in the BV allow the tables listed in the dialog to have customer-specific attributes (parameters) to the tables listed in the dialog, so-called custfield classes, to the tables listed on the dialog. These can either contain their own values (discrete values) or summed values (total). By means of tooltips on the individual buttons indicate what type of enhancement that has been stored. View The upper part of the dialog contains the general information and settings for the BVCustfield class. The UPOC for a new BVCustfield class is automatically assigned by the program. On the right side are the available functions. In the lower part all available CodX PostOffice tables are shown as buttons, for which custom attributes can be added. for which custom attributes can be added. tables are linked to each other by arrows, in the order and direction that they order and direction in which they depend on each other and how they and how they can be summed up. That that is, the values entered are added from the lowest table upwards in the direction of the arrows. direction of the arrows the entered values are added up and stored in the respective upper table as a total. This is done by the BVRecalcServer, a module that recalculates the sums in the background after each change of the BV. change of the BV. Link field (table) In this field, the current attribute to any number of tables as an additional parameter. to any number of tables. If the attribute has been appended to a table, the table will be the table is colored. The definition of the type of link is done in a separate dialog. The link describes describes the data origin. If you move the mouse pointer over one of the table fields table fields, the currently defined data origin is displayed in a tool tip. is displayed in a tool tip...

  • Production

    • HELP_PR

    This module is used to monitor and control production. The module consists of two tabs: Close Districts and Overflow Districts.

  • Production

    • HELP_PRODUKTIONSVIEW_ABSCHLIESSENBEZIRKE

    This tab allows you to close districts for the current production. All consignments which are entered after the production automatically receive the planned delivery date of the next delivery day. You can select the carrier routes to be closed individually, by service provider zone, by service provider or by delivery route. The list below shows all selected districts. Districts which are already closed are shown in grey. Select the districts to be closed. Tip: With the right mouse button on the list you can open a menu, with which the selection of the districts can be simplified.

  • Production

    • HELP_PRODUKTIONSVIEW_UEBERLAUFBEZIRKE

    In this tab you will find a list of the overflowing districts for the selected planned delivery date. The displayed shipment quantities per planned delivery date and carrier route are only counted during entry. Any subsequent changes or transfers are not taken into account here for performance reasons. The consignment editor, on the other hand, counts all individual consignments that are currently assigned to the corresponding carrier route. may occur. To rebook shipments of a select the desired district and press the "Edit" button. This opens the shipment editor with the selection of the corresponding consignments. In this way you can rebook the consignments to a different planned delivery date or to a different district...

  • Production Server Interface

    • HELP_PSI

    Now you can find the manual of this module online on our webserver. This has the advantage that we can incorporate additions and changes more quickly and easily. Link to the manual of your version (PDF file)...

  • Production site

    • HELP_LOGISTIK_PRODUCTIONSITE

    Here, the data is recorded for each production is recorded. This data then applies to all workstations assigned to this are assigned to this location. DIE POST customer data (only with DIE POST license) Here you can enter the customer data of DIE POST. can be entered. This is a prerequisite for using the functions of the module DIE POST module can be used. Area restriction for coverage (only with IHS license) If only certain areas are to be taken into account at the data entry only certain areas are to be taken into account, these areas can can be defined here.

  • Production view Use case description

    • HELP_PRODUKTIONSVIEW_UEBERLAUFBEZIRKE_USECASE

    Sort out shipments from overflow districts with sorting machine The PR Production module can be used to manually rebook shipments in overflow districts. Now these shipments are to be sorted out automatically with a sorting machine in a fine sorting run. This is achieved with the following process: Module PR-Production / Tab 'Overflow districts' select Select overflow district and press 'Edit'...

  • Programming the control unit

    • HELP_CXLETTERSCAN_SETUP_CONTROL-UNIT_PROGRAMMING

    With this dialog, a control unit can be programmed for its be programmed for its use. Either it works as Camera, Print or Sort module. These settings are permanently stored in the EEProm of the control unit and remain there, even if the unit is completely disconnected from the power supply. Please note that improper use of this improper use of this function can lead to faults or even damage to the machine. to the machine. Important! If a control unit has been reprogrammed, CodX PostOffice has to be restarted, because the new configuration is is only read in when CodX PostOffice is started. View A warning is displayed in the first place. This is followed by the programming settings. On the right side side there is the button to send the settings to the previously selected selected control unit and to program them there. program there. Operation First set the desired function for the selected selected control unit, then press the "Program" button. "Program" button...

  • PV group of persons

    • HELP_PV_PERSONENGRUPPE

    To find a group of people, you can enter the search term in the field of the same name. You can work with wildcards in a search term by using the * character. Then press the Search button to trigger the search function. The results are then displayed in the list below. You can also not enter a search term, this will display all person groups, depending on the settings Including inactive person group. If the search result contains more than 2000 person groups, a message appears and the first 2000 person groups are displayed. This maximum number(lMaxSearchResult) can be changed in the Custfield (lTableID = 1646). However, a larger number leads to the fact that the search also takes longer. You can enter, edit or delete groups of persons here. or delete them. Several persons can be assigned to one can be assigned to one person group...

  • RE

    • HELP_RE

    This detail dialogue is used for redressing transmissions. If a shipment is entered with a recipient address that is no longer recipient address, the window Search current address window opens automatically and a selection of addresses matching the recipient name is displayed. From this selection the desired address can be selected. In the input fields the entered (old, invalid) address is displayed. The corresponding name is automatically selected in the Result field. If several addresses appear in the output field address(es), you must check whether the correct address is selected. correct address is selected. If no address(es) appear in the output field Found forwarding address(es), the search criteria can be changed in the input fields can be changed. With the button Search/External Search/eXotargetsVital the search can be restarted. be restarted. View...

  • RE - Correction address

    • HELP_RE_KORREKTURADRESSE

    This dialog is used to enter a new correction address or edit an existing correction address. If an existing correction address is edited, it can also be deleted. View On the dialog you can see all address and data fields which are which are available for a correction address. Below are the buttons with the available functions. Operation...

  • RE - duplicates

    • HELP_RE_DUPPLETTEN

    This dialog shows the details of a duplicate, found during the import of a redress file. You have the option to save or ignore the duplicate. View The current address of the doublet is displayed in a duplicate is displayed. Below this there is a list which shows all already existing forwarding addresses that match the duplicate from the import. from the import. At the end of the dialog are the buttons with the available functions. Operation Yes The displayed duplicate will still be saved as a new forwarding address. address. The detail dialog is closed...

  • RE - Edit forwarding address

    • HELP_RE_NACHSENDEADRESSE_BEARBEITEN

    In this dialog you can edit already entered forwarding addresses can be edited. View In the first place there is a list with all forwarding addresses of the current addressee. An addressee can have more than one forwarding address. This may be due to or during his holidays he would also like to receive his mail and has a holiday and has a holiday address added to the system. Below this are all the attributes of a forwarding address which can be can be edited or are used for information purposes. On the right side are the buttons with the available functions. functions. Operation The following functions are available:...

  • RE - External search

    • HELP_RE_EXTERNSEARCH

    This detail dialog appears after the Redress Search, the external search for a Web service is called. First, a forwarding address is searched for on a defined forwarding address on a defined web page and copy it into the clipboard (e.g. Ctrl-C or mark and copy with the mouse). copy). As soon as the website is closed, this dialog appears this dialog appears and shows the clipboard. In the best case the program recognizes the address directly and copies it to the address fields address fields shown below, otherwise you have to correct the clipboard in the must be corrected in the displayed editor field. Immediately after the correction, the program tries to recognize the address and to fill the address fields. The copied text is pasted into the field "Current clipboard" of the above dialog. clipboard" field of the above dialog and the address is formatted and formatted and validated as far as possible. Likewise special lines and unnecessary text will be removed, empty lines will be ignored ignored, as well as lines that contain only numbers (e.g. telephone numbers). Because of these optimizations of the text in the clipboard address data can be taken from any application and from any web pages. The chance to get a correct and valid address, which can be validated and transferred, is therefore very high. therefore very high. View A text editor with the current clipboard. Below that the detected forwarding address. Operation...

  • RE - Import

    • HELP_RE_IMPORT

    With this dialog you have the possibility, import forwarding addresses. To do this, select a file in CSV format, which contains the forwarding addresses to be imported. to be imported. The exact format of this file can be found in the AdminDoc, chapter 118 Redress Import (import of forwarding addresses). During the import of addresses, a log file is created in the same directory as the import file. directory as the import file. The name of the file is from the name of the import file and the string "_Log.csv". is generated. View At the first position of the dialog there is a status line, which shows the path and file name of the import file selected by means of the button "..." button. Below this a list is displayed which shows forwarding addresses from the import file that are not to be imported. import file. These are invalid addresses or duplicates. On the right side there are the buttons with the available functions. Operation The following functions are available:...

  • RE - New forwarding address

    • HELP_RE_NACHSENDEADRESSE

    If an addressee does not yet exist in the redress database it can be entered using this function. A new entry always requires the specification of the old and the new address. address. View On the left side the old (previous) address with all its address is displayed with all its available attributes, on the right side the new address with all its available attributes is displayed. attributes are displayed. Below this are the buttons with the functions. Operation Address fields old and new address Please enter the corresponding address here. The address entry runs via the standard module address dialog server and supports the geographical data available in the geographical data with auto-completion. Incorrect address data are displayed in red. The address is checked for consistency and duplicates. No addresses are addresses are saved that are invalid or that already exist. already exist. The check for duplicate addresses includes different spellings...

  • RE - Postcon Login

    • HELP_RE_LOGONPOSTCON

    This dialog is the login for the postcon redress database. the postcon redress database. To get access to this online service you have to log in with your DE number and password. View Input fields for the DE number and the password. Operation DE number Enter your DE number...

  • RE - Settings

    • HELP_RE_SETUP

    On this settings page the configuration of the module Redress and Redress processing can be can be edited. There are further specific settings which are only stored in the Custfields in table no. 1034. These are described separately depending on the application. Editing Return to sender if undeliverable Here you can specify whether the return delivery is to be made via delivery or via the collection driver. If an address label is to be printed with the new address, then a check a tick can be set in the corresponding check box. be set. Determine forwarding address If the "Do not print address label if old and new address match" field is activated address are the same" is activated, no new address label will be new address label will be printed. However, in the default settings this field is not activated. Destroy if undeliverable If an item is to be destroyed when undeliverable, an appropriate label can be printed. The text for this can be freely chosen and should provide information about what is to be done with the item...

  • Receiver routing Direct input

    • HELP_IHS_ROUTING_DIRECT_DLG

    This dialog is used to manually select the recipient/delivery destination of a shipment (person/cost unit/logistics unit/district). When opening the dialog, data already entered in MS/OS-IHS are taken over. Each attribute can be selected (binoculars icon) or deleted (delete icon) via the corresponding search function. All attributes are optional, but at least one field must be entered. Ad-Hoc persons Items can also be entered and delivered for people who are not entered in the CodX PostOffice people management. Such persons are called "Ad-Hoc" persons (e.g. temporary employees). Automatic hierarchical capture Data is entered hierarchically, i.e. when data is entered in one field, all subsequent fields that are still empty are filled in automatically. fields are filled in automatically. E.g. by selecting the logistics unit, the corresponding district is also selected automatically if possible. The carrier route structure set in the calling module (MS/OS-IHS) is used to automatically determine the carrier route...

  • Redress addresses

    • HELP_RE_DLG

    This dialog is used to manage forwarding and correction addresses. correction addresses. View At the top of the dialog there is an input field to search for forwarding and correction addresses. Below this is a list with the output of the search result. search result, and below this list all forwarding addresses for a selected for a selected addressee are displayed in the search result list. are displayed. On the right side there are the buttons with the available functions. In the headline of the result list there is also a status information, which indicates if nothing or too much was found. In the result list, the addresses displayed may may contain the following symbols with their meaning:...

  • Redress mass processing

    • HELP_REBULKPROCESSING_VIEW

    County structure During redress mass processing, depending on the defined action of the carrier route code, the set carrier route structure is is used. (Only for second delivery & return to sender). Only valid and active carrier route structures are available for selection. Attention: It is mandatory that a structure must be selected before mass processing can be used. can be used. Handling of this module First sort your returns according to the reason for undeliverability (delivery code). Then scan the delivery code once and then all items for this delivery code (enter UPOC or alternative code). If an alternative code is read with a handheld/radio scanner, the alternative code must uniquely identify the shipment. If the alternative code is captured directly in the module (manually or via wedge scanner), a selection dialog appears if the shipment is not found unambiguously. To perform a "fuzzy" search for alternative code (with wildcards) the character "*" must be entered at the beginning or end of the search term. must be entered. Example: The search term "1ZA17*" finds all shipments whose alternative code begins with "1ZA17". Consignment and address labels are output on the label printer in accordance with the settings.In the case of the Return to sendercode a customer return label may also be printed out. This is the case if in the redress settings the return delivery in the case of undeliverability is not defined via the collection driver but via the delivery. delivery instead of the pickup driver. Once you have scanned all the items in a delivery code, specify the next code and then the corresponding shipments. First sort your returns according to the reason for undeliverability (delivery code)...

  • Redress Mass Processing - Settings

    • HELP_REBULKPROCESSING_SETUP

    In these settings you can define which redress action is to be stored on the items that you scan with a delivery code in the module Redress Mass Processing module with a delivery code. Furthermore, it can be defined here whether the printing of a consignment and/or address label is to take place or not or whether this is to take place according to the global RE configuration. the global RE configuration. This can also be found in the Settings, Production, in the Redress tab. A detailed description of the Redress actions and what they mean exactly can be found in the AdminDoc.

  • Redress Processing

    • HELP_RE_REBEARBEITUNG

    This dialog is used to edit a shipment, to re-address and/or edit various shipment data. edit. A forwarding address is determined as follows: Print customer return label For this customer, a customer return label is to be print Return according to global Configuration...

  • Redress processing - delivery code

    • HELP_RE_ZUSTELLCODE

    In this dialog you can add a delivery code to a selected shipment. to a selected shipment. Thanks to an activation box you have the option of automatically applying this setting to all subsequent consignments you process in redress processing. subsequent consignments that you process in redress processing. automatically. View On the dialog all input fields are visible, which are relevant for the event delivery code. Please fill in these correctly. Operation Delivery code Select an existing delivery code from the display list. from the display list. All shipment-related delivery codes are displayed...

  • Redress processing - delivery info

    • HELP_RE_ZUSTELLINFO

    With this dialog you can directly change the delivery of a shipment directly if necessary. All delivery information available on the current shipment will be pre-filled in this detail dialog in advance. View All delivery information of the carrier route down to the down to the house level. Depending on which entity (house or street) does not exist in the carrier route area or the carrier route itself is present, the corresponding entry is made read-only and is filled with a status message <No house defined> or <No street defined>, filled. Operation Delivery information area and district Fill in the required home delivery information for the area and/or carrier route as required. and/or carrier route as required...

  • Redress processing - district selection for transfer to yellow mail

    • HELP_RE_REDRESSDLG_SELECTGELBEPOSTTARIF

    With this optional dialog the district of the transmission can be overridden. Display The advance disposition of the current shipment is displayed. Below this, the option for the district to be selected for the current shipment can be selected for the current shipment. Operation With the OK button the active selection is confirmed and taken over in the redress processing. If the button "Cancel" button is selected, the transmission is not saved...

  • Redress processing - New broadcast

    • HELP_RE_NEWMAILING

    In the event that a consignment is to be processed without consignment data (thus also without UPOC ®) is to be processed in the red address, then a new shipment (with the old address) can be entered here. be entered. This then only contains the most necessary data. After the input a redress address must be entered directly, in order to obtain a new to receive a new consignment and address label. Consignments entered with "New consignment" do not flow into an order. View All entries relevant to the shipment are displayed are displayed which are necessary to save a shipment correctly. If a shipment is already selected, the data will be pre-filled according to pre-filled according to the shipment. Operation OK Saves the entries if everything has been filled correctly and closes this dialog...

  • Redress processing - returns

    • HELP_RE_RUECKLAUF

    With this dialog you have the possibility to print a print a return label for a shipment or a customer. The condition is that a label printer is connected, which is supported by CodX PostOffice is supported. You can print as many print return labels for different items and/or customers/cost centers. customers/cost centers. View A UPOC input field where the consignment or customer UPOC can be customer UPOC can be entered directly. Below this there is a display, in which the sender address, i.e. the the customer/cost centre address of the consignment of the selected customer/cost centre is displayed. As an option it is displayed whether the entry is to be treated like a scanner entry (direct Enter) or whether the button for printing itself must be selected. must be selected. On the right side are the buttons with the available functions. available functions. Editing UPOC Enter here a shipment UPOC or a customer/cost center UPOC. customer/cost center UPOC. This can also be read in by means of a hand scanner, if such a scanner is available...

  • Redress processing - Select article

    • HELP_RE_ARTIKEL

    In this dialog you can change the the service and the article for the shipment after a district change. assign. To do this, select a service and all the consignment-related Shipment related articles are displayed. View At the top is the combo box with the active the active services. Below this is a list in which all articles for the selected service are displayed. On the right side are the buttons with the available functions. functions. Editing Power Select a service...

  • Redress processing - Shipment detail

    • HELP_RE_SVDETAIL

    This detail dialog shows all events that are stored for the currently selected show. This dialog is only an information dialog, you have no possibility to change the no possibility to change anything in the events. View At the start of the dialog, the shipment UPOC and the customer or input field and below it the customer or the cost centre of the consignment. cost centre of the consignment. Below this there is a list with all shipment events that belong to the selected shipment. belong to the selected shipment. You can sort this list by clicking on the header of a column header. Operation Close Closes this dialog

  • Redress processing setting

    • HELP_RE_CUSTFIELDS

    Here you will find all the Custfields that are required for the modules redress addresses and redress processing as well as for the DPAG blackbox. Designation (Custfieldname) Value (table ID: 1034, lID = 0) 100: Redress processing - Label printing for shipment back to sender...

  • Referenced file for print layout

    • HELP_CXLETTERSCAN_PRINTLAYOUT_ATTACHMENT_DLG

    This dialog is used to edit the files (fonts and images) referenced by a printer layout. Name and comment can be maintained and the file can be imported. Operation NameEnter the name of the referenced file in this field. If this field is empty it will be automatically when a file is imported. CommentEnter a comment about the file in this field...

  • Remuneration Detail

    • HELP_MV_SETUP_VERGUETUNG_DLG

    In addition to the number, text and amount, the remuneration category and wage type must also be selected. Important The most important thing is that the number must be unique for all remunerations. (remunerations as well as lump sum remunerations). Note: If you change the category when editing an allowance, the allowance will be deleted with the old category.

  • Reorganization

    • HELP_CDM0110_MOVEREORGDLG

    In this tab, all automatically imported renaming of instradations are displayed, which have not yet been renamed due to the "Valid from" date. date, which have not yet been renamed. Instradiation renames can also be entered and / or edited manually. The list has a context menu that can be displayed with the right mouse button. In this context menu you have the possibility to select all entries by means of the activation box or to deselect all entries or to reverse the existing selection. invert. View A list is displayed containing all currently imported renames for instradations which have not yet been renamed due to the "Valid from" date. from" date. This list shows the most important information about the imported renames, from which file they originated and when they were imported. file they came from and when they were imported. This information is missing if a renaming was entered manually. On the right side are the buttons with the functions. Manually captured renamings are displayed with a green background color, so that they can be visually distinguished from imported renamings. to be visually distinguished from the imported ones. Renames that have failed are displayed with the status the status "Error" and marked in red. These can no longer be be edited, but they can be deleted. These are also additionally executed again, so that possible corrections can be made. can be made...

  • Report: Account Manager (17429)

    • HELP_RP_17429

    Shows the customer and his assigned account manager.

  • Report: Active customers with/without sales (60889)

    • HELP_RP_60889

    Creates an overview of active customers with or without turnover.

  • Report: Address determination based on consignment images (63401)

    • HELP_RP_63401

    Shows the number and percentage of shipments that successfully or unsuccessfully identified the recipient address from the shipment images.

  • Report: Analysis of undeliverable mail (7894)

    • HELP_RP_7894

    Description The Undeliverable Items Analysis report shows all items that have a delivery error stored. The items are restricted to a period from the entry date of the items, district group, depot, district and reasons for undeliverability. The displayed levels depot/district group, district, reason for undeliverability and address can be selected by the user, as well as the grouping depot/district group or district group/depot. Only districts with delivery errors are displayed by ticking the checkbox. In order for the report to be comparable with other data, the redress view must be used. Otherwise, the figures on the report are not comparable. The items are counted per delivery attempt. Thus, a shipment can be counted multiple times. Requires RE license!

  • Report: Archive shipment details (15132)

    • HELP_RP_15132

    Displays the public broadcast details for the selected broadcast from the archive.

  • Report: Archive Shipment Details Internal (15133)

    • HELP_RP_15133

    Displays the internal shipment details for the selected shipment from the archive.

  • Report: Area data (72952)

    • HELP_RP_72952

    Outputs the area data (country, city, street, house, logistics unit). In the export as CSV file and Excel workbook, further attributes are available, for example UPOC, master, import key, etc.

  • Report: Area without district (11758)

    • HELP_RP_11758

    Displays area data (streets and places in the BV in the Area tab) for the selected postal codes that have not yet been assigned to a district.

  • Report: article list (15134)

    • HELP_RP_15134

    The report lists the articles. The result can either contain all articles or be restricted according to service, VAT rate or merchandise category.

  • Report: Assemblage Overview (14572)

    • HELP_RP_14572

    Description Lists all orders per assemblage. The selection can be restricted using the planned delivery date, the carrier route group, the depot and the carrier routes. The report is grouped by carrier route and assemblage. Within the selected entry date, the following are counted total running time and effective recording time are counted. The number of interruptions is also measured by the defined interval. interruptions are measured. On the basis of the collected data Finally, performance values are calculated and output.

  • Report: Assignment Error (12847)

    • HELP_RP_12847

    Shows whether order items without articles exist in the selected invoice run.

  • Report: Assignment of Overflow Districts (19291)

    • HELP_RP_19291

    Displays settings by original districts with overflow districts assigned.

  • Report: Assignment overview customer/cost center to logistics unit (32891)

    • HELP_RP_32891

    Displays logistics units with or without assignment to customer/cost center, depending on the selection.

  • Report: Assignment Overview House and Logistics Unit (32865)

    • HELP_RP_32865

    Displays streets/house numbers with or without assignment to a logistics unit, depending on the selection.

  • Report: Assignment overview logistics unit to customer/cost center (32884)

    • HELP_RP_32884

    Shows the selected customer or cost center and the logistics units assigned to it.

  • Report: Availability per Tray / per P.O. Box (63462)

    • HELP_RP_63462

    Outputs the availability in percent per tray / mailbox over a specified period of time. Data basis are statistical data. Read more...

  • Report: Bar code list for letters (31875)

    • HELP_RP_31875

    Shows the barcode list for letters (registered mail) from the post office.

  • Report: Bill of Material Overview (30769)

    • HELP_RP_30769

    Outputs the quantities for the previous month per customer client and FARechnungsmandant.

  • Report: Box Pickup Sequence (7886)

    • HELP_RP_7886

    Prerequisite is the scanning of the collection at the customer. The chronological order of the customers approached per employee is displayed with the number of boxes and number of consignments. The date of entry of the event Acceptance at pickup and an employee can be selected.

  • Report: Boxlabel (8591)

    • HELP_RP_8591

    Prints a box label on the box label printer defined for the tray.

  • Report: Business Partner (32227)

    • HELP_RP_32227

    Displays a list of all assigned logistics units.

  • Report: Business Partner (32227)

    • HELP_RP_55421

    Displays a listing of all cyclic items by a grouping of choice.

  • Report: Capacity limit depot (31424)

    • HELP_RP_31424

    Exceeded capacity limits of depots are displayed, grouped by depot and planned delivery date.

  • Report: Capacity limit for delivery staff (31519)

    • HELP_RP_31519

    Exceeded carrier capacity limits are displayed per depot, grouped by depot, carrier and planned delivery date.

  • Report: Capacity limit for district group (31477)

    • HELP_RP_31477

    Exceeded capacity limits of carrier route groups are displayed, grouped by carrier route group and planned delivery date.

  • Report: Capacity limit for transshipment point (31437)

    • HELP_RP_31437

    Exceeded capacity limits of transshipment points are displayed, grouped by transshipment point and planned delivery date.

  • Report: Carrier settlement (12001)

    • HELP_RP_12001

    Creates a carrier accounting list per employee and day.

  • Report: Carrier settlement export (15179)

    • HELP_RP_15179

    Export

  • Report: Check Employee-District Assignment (15152)

    • HELP_RP_15152

    Verify that employee district assignments in the MA are correct for all districts that have mailings during the reporting period.

  • Report: Check Receipt Confirmations (77313)

    • HELP_RP_77313

    Outputs all items per recipient for which a receipt is pending. The services are defined via 'Entry specifications'.

  • Report: client list (12981)

    • HELP_RP_12981

    Creates a list of all entered clients from the client table. The output can be sorted either by name or by number.

  • Report: Collection Locations per Customer (11694)

    • HELP_RP_11694

    Shows all pickup locations with name and address data of a customer.

  • Report: Collection Statistics (15129)

    • HELP_RP_15129

    Four variants are possible (Filter: Miscellaneous). Variant: Event pickup (available) Lists all collection drivers (employees) with the first and last collection, number of customers approached and after sorting with the number of consignments collected. Only consignments with the event 'Acceptance at collection' are taken into account. In summary, an overall statistic is created. Groupings 1 to 3 and details in the Miscellaneous filter have no effect in this variant. Variant: Pick-up calendar (incl. quantity 0)...

  • Report: Comparison of Capacities (31508)

    • HELP_RP_31508

    The maximum capacity limits and any irregularities are shown for selectable entities.

  • Report: compartment box label (25704)

    • HELP_RP_25704

    Prints a tray box label on the box label printer defined for the tray.

  • Report: Complaint analysis per customer or employee (7800)

    • HELP_RP_7800

    The complaint analysis reports the number of complaints assigned to a reason and a cause. The report is grouped by customer or employee.

  • Report: Complaint analysis/rate per carrier route or carrier (14052)

    • HELP_RP_14052

    The complaint analysis outputs the number of complaints assigned to a reason and a cause. The report is grouped by depot, carrier route group, carrier route or carrier.

  • Report: Complaint Detail (15158)

    • HELP_RP_15158

    Detail of the selected complaint

  • Report: Complaint notification for carrier route (7801)

    • HELP_RP_7801

    The complaint message for district displays all information about a complaint, grouped by depot, district or district group. The details can be shown and hidden as required. In addition, the sorting information is printed on the report.

  • Report: Complaints / Returns (60877)

    • HELP_RP_60877

    Creates an overview by employee or district with the number of shipments, complaints and returns (redress).

  • Report: Courier Order (42461)

    • HELP_RP_42461

    Displays all details of the courier order selected in the courier order overview. If no courier order was selected, an error message follows. Images

  • Report: customer card (15146)

    • HELP_RP_15146

    This evaluation issues a certain number of customer cards for the selected customer(s). The customer currently selected in PostOffice a customer read in via UPOC or all customers can be selected. The customers can be further limited via the entry or modification date. Only active customers/cost centres are output. In addition, the number of cards per selected customer can be customer can be selected. The following selection for the output is available: Screen or Printer.

  • Report: Customer list (7820)

    • HELP_RP_7820

    Different customer lists according to the assignments to be made in customer management.

  • Report: Customer Overview (12079)

    • HELP_RP_12079

    This evaluation provides information about sales data for the selected customer and, if selected, his cost centers, shipment quantities, addresses, and complaints over a specified period of time. Period Cost center: Period is not taken into account. Sales data: Period refers to the order date. Shipment quantities: Period refers to the order date...

  • Report: Customer search by order/invoice number (15149)

    • HELP_RP_15149

    Displays customer and cost center after entering the order or invoice number.

  • Report: Customer separation card (9764)

    • HELP_RP_9764

    " Creates a customer separation map for BBH sorters. The Standard Sorter Interface license is required. Important: The separation card must meet the mechanical specifications of BBH for the respective machine type in order to be used on the machine.

  • Report: Customer Status (17253)

    • HELP_RP_17253

    Displays the customer, his cost centers and the status of the customer (lead, active, inactive) on a selectable key date.

  • Report: customer volume (10676)

    • HELP_RP_10676

    This evaluation shows the revenue per customer based on the orders, if desired cost center related.

  • Report: Customer-related redress statistics (10083)

    • HELP_RP_10083

    Displays the number of undeliverable items per customer and error. In addition, the number of redresses per customer is displayed. Filtering is possible according to customer and recording time of the items.

  • Report: Customers with Warning Levels Below (23847)

    • HELP_RP_23847

    All customers and cost centers whose free UPOCs have fallen below the specified warning limit are listed.

  • Report: Customer-specific conditions (15147)

    • HELP_RP_15147

    Lists customer-specific conditions (item prices that differ from the standard price). As a result, this report provides you with a quick and clear compilation of all prices that do not correspond to the standard price.

  • Report: Daily Shift Planning (20755)

    • HELP_RP_20755

    Carrier route statistics are output per employee and carrier route group for a specific home delivery day.

  • Report: Data check for data entry (78065)

    • HELP_RP_78065

    Displays persons and / or customers/cost centers for which it is not possible to record shipments, including the cause.

  • Report: Data entry performance (37216)

    • HELP_RP_37216

    Description The report "Collection performance" refers to the entry performance of the sorters. Within the selected entry date, the following are counted total running time and effective recording time are counted. The number of interruptions is also measured by the defined interval. interruptions are measured. On the basis of the collected data Finally, performance values are calculated and output. Settings: Entry date: Mandatory field; Default value [today]...

  • Report: Data entry performance (37216)

    • HELP_RP_40074

    Description This report generates the posting list P.O. box access of Deutsche Post AG incl. DataMatrix code. This eliminates the need to manual filling out of the PDF template. Filter Entry date: Mandatory field District structure: optional...

  • Report: Data entry performance (39343)

    • HELP_RP_39343

    The report shows the collection performance for a selected period per sorter, employee and performance.

  • Report: Data entry sequence according to employee (13002)

    • HELP_RP_13002

    Report provides the order of the recorded customers/cost centres according to employees. On request, the individual shipments are also output.

  • Report: Delivery List (9484)

    • HELP_RP_9484

    Shows the deliveries of one day. The delivery list can be sorted either by the depot name, by the district name or by the sorting information. sort information. The restriction is made to planned delivery date, delivery information and service. With the filter option "different SIx definition" in the filter Miscellaneous, a SIx definition different from the standard can be used. This is stored in the settings of the respective client for the service provider zone (Settings -> Extras -> Service provider -> (Edit service provider) -> Settings -> RP9484 Different SIx definition). The following attributes, which are known from the SIx formula, can be used: <%SIAuslieferour%>, <%SIDepot%>, <%SIBezirkStruktur%>, <%SIBezirkGruppe%> and <%SIBezirk%>.

  • Report: Delivery list per driver (13478)

    • HELP_RP_13478

    Prints a daily delivery list for each delivery driver with the number of copies to unload

  • Report: Delivery note according to command code (10820)

    • HELP_RP_10820

    Creates a delivery note for shipments of the current event corresponding to the selected command. The delivery note can be created for selected services.

  • Report: Delivery note district (13711)

    • HELP_RP_13711

    Prints delivery notes for the district selected in the form limited and grouped by date

  • Report: Delivery note for consignment quantities to partner (13847)

    • HELP_RP_13847

    The shipment quantity is displayed for each customer and article. The shipment quantity is limited to a planned delivery date and partner. Optionally, customer group and customer can also be filtered.

  • Report: Delivery note to the depot (13716)

    • HELP_RP_13716

    Delivery note per depot, with number of pallets and weight per order

  • Report: Delivery rounds overview list (9863)

    • HELP_RP_9863

    Creates an overview list of the delivery tours. Can be restricted according to delivery tour groups and delivery tours.

  • Report: delivery ticket (13760)

    • HELP_RP_13760

    Displays command codes and delivery codes. The selection of the codes is free.

  • Report: delivery times (42936)

    • HELP_RP_42936

    Displays the minimum, average, and maximum delivery time of shipments. A shipment is considered delivered if it has a delivery attempt event with a positive parameter. The last event of the delivery attempt type applies. The output can be grouped according to the following attributes: District structure (designation) District group (designation) District (name)...

  • Report: difference list delivery shipment (10818)

    • HELP_RP_10818

    Displays all items in a delivery district that have not been picked up by the scanner from the carrier. (Basis: planned delivery date)".

  • Report: Difference list for home delivery (10815)

    • HELP_RP_10815

    Displays all items in the desired time period that have not been scanned by the deliverer with the scanner for delivery. (Basis: planned delivery date or entry date). For the groupings, the average of the differences is displayed on the right-hand side. The differences can be determined in the following variants: Difference between the entry time of event 1 and the entry time of the shipment: The selection at event 2 is ignored. Difference between entry time for event 1 and scheduled delivery: The selection for event 2 is ignored. Difference in recording time between event 1 and event 2: The selection for event 2 is taken into account.

  • Report: Difference list notified shipments (32095)

    • HELP_RP_32095

    Shows notified shipments that have not been delivered for an entry period. Irrespective of the filters set, only consignments for which an alternative code is stored are taken into account.

  • Report: Difference list plan delivery / acceptance to redress (10810)

    • HELP_RP_10810

    Shows the transit time of undeliverable items from the carrier back to redress processing. (Basis: difference of the time from the scheduled delivery date to the event 'Acceptance to Redress').

  • Report: Dispatch list Swiss-Express (31995)

    • HELP_RP_31995

    Shows the Swiss Post Swiss-Express dispatch list.

  • Report: Distribution Papers (18704)

    • HELP_RP_18704

    Prints the following reports: Assemblage, Delivery List per Driver and Delivery Note District for all orders that have not yet been printed and marks the order as printed.

  • Report: District Allocation (12998)

    • HELP_RP_12998

    Shows the district assignment from the employee's point of view.

  • Report: District Capacity Limit (31475)

    • HELP_RP_31475

    Exceeded capacity limits for carrier routes are displayed, grouped by carrier route and planned delivery date.

  • Report: District overview (76081)

    • HELP_RP_76081

    This report in the Carrier route overview group displays all the data relevant to the carrier route.

  • Report: District overview according to postal code, street or gang order (9909)

    • HELP_RP_9909

    List of streets and street sections in a delivery district with all delivery information. Optionally, the overview can be printed grouped and sorted as desired. Note: If no grouping is selected at all, the result will be incorrect.

  • Report: district statistics (21331)

    • HELP_RP_21331

    Displays the data from the carrier route statistics for each carrier route and planned delivery date. The report data is based on the district statistics and is determined by a background process. Further information on this can be found in the AdminDoc. The settings for the carrier route and home delivery categories assigned to the carrier routes form the basis for this.

  • Report: Districts in Depot (15140)

    • HELP_RP_15140

    The report lists all the carrier routes for the selected securities account.

  • Report: documents of postal delivery orders (15177)

    • HELP_RP_15177

    Prints certificates of postal delivery orders in the upper right corner with a UPOC.

  • Report: DPAG posting list (21771)

    • HELP_RP_21771

    Generates the list 'Deposit slip additional services national and international' of Deutsche Post AG. Regardless of the filters set, only consignments that meet the following characteristics are taken into account: 13- or 16-digit alternative code is stored the entered service has a valid value in the "RP21771 DPAG service" setting the service provider of the service provider zone for sorting the district is yellow post (clientID = 1000)

  • Report: DPD delivery note (27628)

    • HELP_RP_27628

    Delivery note of the DPD shipments grouped by production location.

  • Report: Duration of use per person / per customer (63460)

    • HELP_RP_63460

    Outputs the usage time in days, hours and minutes per person or customer / cost center over a specified period of time. Data basis are statistical data. Read more... The time given for groupings and total are average values.

  • Report: Employee Assignment (12999)

    • HELP_RP_12999

    Shows employee assignment from the district's perspective.

  • Report: Employee Assignment (72966)

    • HELP_RP_72966

    Shows all employee assignments per district and district group.

  • Report: Employee Assignment Overview (20346)

    • HELP_RP_20346

    Displays an overview of employee assignment from the district's perspective.

  • Report: Employee Commission (7869)

    • HELP_RP_7869

    Returns the employee commission on the invoices created in the selected period.

  • Report: Employee ID Card (15151)

    • HELP_RP_15151

    This evaluation issues a certain number of employee ID cards for the selected employee(s). One or more employees can be employees can be searched and selected, or found via UPOC. Furthermore, you can either select all employees, if desired with a restriction to the hiring or change date can be selected. Only active employees are displayed. In addition, the number of badges per selected employees. The following selection for the output is available: Screen or Printer.

  • Report: Employee List (7967)

    • HELP_RP_7967

    Employee list according to different criteria. Also shows supervisors and their employees.

  • Report: Evaluation of address research (15139)

    • HELP_RP_15139

    Evaluates the researched items over the specified time period according to successful/unsuccessful research and shows the proportion of undeliverable items in the first delivery attempt in relation to all items (basis: item entry date).

  • Report: Evaluation of database size (53154)

    • HELP_RP_53154

    Description This report shows the size in MB per table of the PostOffice database.

  • Report: Evaluation of Digitization Follow-Up Process (70009)

    • HELP_RP_70009

    Evaluates the digitization follow-up process for a configurable period of time.

  • Report: Evaluation of test letters (8583)

    • HELP_RP_8583

    Statistical evaluation of test letters per service and district, with restriction to generation date.

  • Report: Export offer (18843)

    • HELP_RP_18843

    Exports details of the quotation

  • Report: Export SDM order (15826)

    • HELP_RP_15826

    Display data from the last export to the *.sdm text file. Within the selected entry date, the following are counted total running time and effective recording time are counted. The number of interruptions is also measured by the defined interval. interruptions are measured. On the basis of the collected data Finally, performance values are calculated and output.

  • Report: Export to MS Excel (8990)

    • HELP_RP_8990

    Creates an Excel spreadsheet with the data of the selected sorting system and all its compartments (incl. UPOCs).

  • Report: Formatting for Mail Merge (15135)

    • HELP_RP_15135

    Export of customers and contact persons according to different criteria in Excel.

  • Report: Forms and Templates (15145)

    • HELP_RP_15145

    Opens or prints Word and Excel files.

  • Report: forwarding addresses (8582)

    • HELP_RP_8582

    List of forwarding addresses, broken down by customer and cost center. The output depends on the selection of the usage type and whether forwarding to third parties is permitted. The period is based on the last sorting of the items.

  • Report: Frequency of forwarding addresses used (10084)

    • HELP_RP_10084

    Evaluation of the frequency of the forwarding addresses used per customer and cost centre. The restriction is made according to the time of the last event of the shipment and customer.

  • Report: GLS Export (14241)

    • HELP_RP_14241

    Export shipments of a definable service to a file.

  • Report: Home delivery history (10738)

    • HELP_RP_10738

    Evaluation for the delivery data that a delivery person has recorded with the scanner. The sequence of the delivered items is displayed. (Basis: Time of delivery)

  • Report: Home delivery list IHS (39016)

    • HELP_RP_39016

    Shows the shipments for a period including signature fields. The restriction takes place after capture time alternatively after achievement, district and/or customer.

  • Report: home delivery overview (14010)

    • HELP_RP_14010

    Evaluation for the delivery data that a delivery person has recorded with the scanner. The sequence of the delivered items is displayed. (Basis: Time of delivery)

  • Report: Import SDM order (15825)

    • HELP_RP_15825

    Display data from the last import from *.sdm text file. Within the selected entry date, the following are counted total running time and effective recording time are counted. The number of interruptions is also measured by the defined interval. interruptions are measured. On the basis of the collected data Finally, performance values are calculated and output.

  • Report: incoming shipments per customer, depot or district group (8555)

    • HELP_RP_8555

    This evaluation shows the number of consignments per customer, depot or district group. It can be limited by recording time of the shipment, customer and depot or district group. The output of the article and material group can be defined.

  • Report: inventory list (34098)

    • HELP_RP_34098

    Displays the balance per entity and box type for a given key date.

  • Report: Invoice Overview (15192)

    • HELP_RP_15192

    Overview of created invoices according to different criteria.

  • Report: Jobs with open shipments (34610)

    • HELP_RP_34610

    Displays jobs with open shipments.

  • Report: Lettershop items by order and planned delivery date (8889)

    • HELP_RP_8889

    Creates a summary of mailings from all LetterShop jobs, grouped by job and plan delivery date. Output can be restricted by import date and customer.

  • Report: Lettershop job overview (8888)

    • HELP_RP_8888

    Creates an overview of LetterShop, Postcon and Mailalliance jobs. The output can be restricted by import date and customer. In addition, details such as items can be grouped by job and plan delivery date. Output can be restricted by import date and customer.

  • Report: License Overview (34152)

    • HELP_RP_34152

    Overview of the licenses in use. Optionally, only active licenses can be prepared and the sorting can be determined.

  • Report: License Usage (50841)

    • HELP_RP_50841

    List of license usage in a selected period. In addition, the maximum usage can be limited in percent.

  • Report: List of persons (31780)

    • HELP_RP_31780

    Lists persons as well as assignments to work center (logistics unit), mailbox facility, and customer/cost center. Filter: Miscellaneous Priority A person with priority has at least one valid assignment with priority to a work center (logistics unit) or a mailbox facility. Active / Inactive...

  • Report: Maintenance Work (70926)

    • HELP_RP_70926

    Displays all maintenance tasks per CxLetterScan.

  • Report: Manual Sorting (19292)

    • HELP_RP_19292

    Shows all items that are physically sorted differently than in CodX PostOffice.

  • Report: Messenger sheet per district (13717)

    • HELP_RP_13717

    Gives the delivery person the necessary information for the delivery on the current day.

  • Report: Minimum / maximum number of items per tray / P.O. box system (63458)

    • HELP_RP_63458

    Outputs the minimum and maximum number of transmissions over a specified period of time. Data basis are statistical data. Read more...

  • Report: Monthly Report (15153)

    • HELP_RP_15153

    Monthly report for the customer, in which he can log the quantities transferred to the service provider.

  • Report: Non-scanned return slips and certificates (10827)

    • HELP_RP_10827

    The report displays the shipments from the entry period for which no document has yet been stored as an image in the database.

  • Report: Not scanned delivery lists (10741)

    • HELP_RP_10741

    The report displays the UPOCs of the delivery lists from the selected delivery period for which no document has yet been stored as an image in the database.

  • Report: Number of collections per compartment / per P.O. box (63455)

    • HELP_RP_63455

    Outputs the number of collections per tray / P.O. box over a specified period of time. Data basis are statistical data. Read more...

  • Report: Number of deposits per compartment / per P.O. box system (63467)

    • HELP_RP_63467

    Outputs the number of deposits per tray / P.O. box over a specified period of time. Data basis are statistical data. Read more...

  • Report: Number of dispatches per tray / per P.O. box system (63468)

    • HELP_RP_63468

    Outputs the number of dispatches per tray / P.O. box over a specified period of time. Data basis are statistical data. Read more...

  • Report: Number of faults per compartment / per P.O. box (63461)

    • HELP_RP_63461

    Outputs the number of faults per tray / mailbox over a specified period of time. Data basis are statistical data. Read more...

  • Report: Number of fillings per compartment / per P.O. box (63454)

    • HELP_RP_63454

    Outputs the number of fills per tray / mailbox over a specified period of time. Data basis are statistical data. Read more...

  • Report: Number of forced discharges per person / per customer (63466)

    • HELP_RP_63466

    Outputs the number of forced drains per person or customer / cost center over a specified period of time. Data basis are statistical data. Read more...

  • Report: Number of items per tray / per P.O. box (63457)

    • HELP_RP_63457

    Outputs the average number of transmissions over a specified period of time. Data basis are statistical data. Read more... The time and percentages for groupings and total are average values.

  • Report: Number of maintenance operations per compartment / per P.O. box system (63465)

    • HELP_RP_63465

    Outputs the number of maintenance operations per tray / mailbox over a specified period of time. Data basis are statistical data. Read more...

  • Report: Number of pieces overview for home delivery (15168)

    • HELP_RP_15168

    Displays the number of items per delivery person

  • Report: Number of self-register transactions per mailbox system (63464)

    • HELP_RP_63464

    Outputs the number of self-register operations per mailbox over a specified period of time. Data basis are statistical data. Read more...

  • Report: Number of shipments (7775)

    • HELP_RP_7775

    Shows the number of items in delivery districts including the average per day. Multiple deliveries (redresses) are listed several times. In addition, the totals per depot and district group are output. The grouping can be freely selected independently of the filters. Images Filter Variable: Period Period...

  • Report: OCR License Overview (49938)

    • HELP_RP_49938

    Description Overview of the OCR licenses in use.

  • Report: ÖPAG posting list registered mail (54807)

    • HELP_RP_54807

    Generates the list 'Einlieferliste Einschreiben' of Österreichische Post AG.

  • Report: Order (34876)

    • HELP_RP_34876

    Description follows...

  • Report: Order (7771)

    • HELP_RP_7771

    Description follows...

  • Report: Order evaluation by material group (15138)

    • HELP_RP_15138

    Displays an overview based on orders sorted by material group and product.

  • Report: Order items list (14093)

    • HELP_RP_14093

    All order items, with number of copies per location, per order

  • Report: Order Overview (7770)

    • HELP_RP_7770

    Displays the orders with the items, quantity and price over all customers or for the selected customer. The restriction is made to the order date and can be sorted by customer name, customer number, order date or order number. Images

  • Report: Order overview courier order (47116)

    • HELP_RP_47116

    Shows the courier orders with associated data such as client, driver, stops and services. The restriction is made to the order date and the external order number. Images

  • Report: Orders in process (15137)

    • HELP_RP_15137

    This report lists all orders that are currently being processed.

  • Report: Outgoing Post Book (10804)

    • HELP_RP_10804

    Represents a customer's shipments over the desired time period. (Basis: Shipment entry date)

  • Report: Outgoing Post Book (48707)

    • HELP_RP_48707

    Creates an overview with various shipment data for a desired period and further filter options. The overview can also be used to document the delivery (confirmation of receipt / proof of delivery).

  • Report: Overdue Complaints (62278)

    • HELP_RP_62278

    Creates an overview of overdue complaints. Hours / days since entry, last processing and days since waiting until can be specified.

  • Report: Overview ClientSetup Configuration (14494)

    • HELP_RP_14494

    Displays an overview of the Client Setup for the selected user.

  • Report: Overview List (7803)

    • HELP_RP_7803

    The overview list displays all information on a complaint, grouped by customer, depot, district, district group or employee. The details can be shown and hidden as required.

  • Report: Overview Maintenance of Specialized Systems (76200)

    • HELP_RP_76200

    Displays all trays per mailbox system that have the status 'Inactive' or 'Maintenance'.

  • Report: Overview of Allocations per Person (65369)

    • HELP_RP_65369

    Displays the details visible in the people management for the selected people. The following assignment can be issued:

  • Report: Overview of Capacity Limits for Supervisors (32027)

    • HELP_RP_32027

    Shows the supervisor all carriers who have exceeded their own capacity limits or the capacity limits of one of their carrier routes.

  • Report: Overview of cleaning compartment systems (76201)

    • HELP_RP_76201

    Displays all trays per mailbox system that have the status 'Cleaning'.

  • Report: Overview of Cost Centers (15169)

    • HELP_RP_15169

    Lists all cost centers for the selected customer.

  • Report: Overview of Courier Orders (40919)

    • HELP_RP_40919

    Displays the courier orders with order number, order date and status of the courier drivers. The report can be selected by time period. Images

  • Report: Overview of deliverers above warning limit (15171)

    • HELP_RP_15171

    Displays all carriers per wage group whose wage is higher than the warning limit.

  • Report: Overview of Overflow Districts (21078)

    • HELP_RP_21078

    Shows the carrier routes per planned delivery date that have exceeded the warning limit.

  • Report: Overview of subsidized districts (9924)

    • HELP_RP_9924

    Creates a summary list of all subsidized districts. It can be restricted by district group, depot and districts.

  • Report: Overview of subsidized districts (9924)

    • HELP_RP_HTML_CSS

    In some labels or reports, HTML and CSS formatting can be applied to some data. Supported HTML tags Hyperlinks: <A HREF> Fonts: <FONT> Header, format and block elements: <H{n}>, <DIV>, <SPAN>,<P>, <DIV>, <LI>, <HN>...

  • Report: Overview of superiors (22869)

    • HELP_RP_22869

    Displays supervisors and their employees.

  • Report: Overview Standard Pickup Tour (11449)

    • HELP_RP_11449

    Prints the overview of a standard pickup tour. This contains the data of the individual locations and the associated customer / cost centre addresses. cost centre addresses.

  • Report: Overview Standard Pickup Tour (15170)

    • HELP_RP_15170

    For each customer, all blocks are listed with the number of UPOCs total, delivered, blocked, blocked delivered and multiple delivered. delivered. The customer can be selected and also whether invalid blocks should be displayed and blocked ones.

  • Report: Packaging (14237)

    • HELP_RP_14237

    Lists make-up items with delivery organization, with weight and price, per order. Within the selected entry date, the following are counted total running time and effective recording time are counted. The number of interruptions is also measured by the defined interval. interruptions are measured. On the basis of the collected data Finally, performance values are calculated and output.

  • Report: Period of use per compartment (63456)

    • HELP_RP_63456

    Outputs the usage time in days, hours and minutes and the occupancy in percent of a compartment over a specified period of time. Data basis are statistical data. Read more... The time and percentages for groupings and total are average values.

  • Report: Person Detail (31815)

    • HELP_RP_31815

    Displays the details of the person visible in the person management.

  • Report: Person import difference (35173)

    • HELP_RP_35173

    Displays the differences of the last person import.

  • Report: Pickup Tours per Customer (11692)

    • HELP_RP_11692

    Prints a specific pickup tour instance and provides information on when the corresponding locations will pick up a customer. A time range can be selected for the pickup days.

  • Report: Pickup Tours per Employee and Day (11693)

    • HELP_RP_11693

    Prints pickup routes for a specific pickup day and employees, according to which the various locations can be approached.

  • Report: Pickup without shipments (11695)

    • HELP_RP_11695

    Prints all customers who were called on a particular pickup day but did not bring any shipments.

  • Report: Postal code in delivery area (14844)

    • HELP_RP_14844

    Shows all postal codes with city name in the delivery area.

  • Report: postal code/city and assigned districts (15154)

    • HELP_RP_15154

    Provides an overview of districts in the specified postcode area

  • Report: Postal delivery note (13877)

    • HELP_RP_13877

    Prints a delivery note with quantity and weight for the postal depots including postal fee

  • Report: Postal Labels (13710)

    • HELP_RP_13710

    Labels for parcels to be delivered to the post office

  • Report: poster recording (42919)

    • HELP_RP_42919

    Displays shipment quantities and cost/turnover. The output can be grouped according to the following attributes: District structure (designation) District group (designation) District (name)...

  • Report: Posting Details (34113)

    • HELP_RP_34113

    Shows the booking details for the desired period.

  • Report: power separation chart (9525)

    • HELP_RP_9525

    Creates a capacity separation map. If a Standard Sorter Interface license is available, a power separation card can also be created for BBH sorters. Important: This must meet the mechanical specifications of BBH for the respective machine type in order to be used on the machine.

  • Report: Print quotation (13709)

    • HELP_RP_13709

    Prints the selected quote and marks it as printed

  • Report: Production Report (11256)

    • HELP_RP_11256

    Creates an overview of the capture process during a specific time period. Period Incoming mail: Entry time of the item is taken into account. Capture path: Capture time of the shipment is taken into account. Post-processing: Entry time of the consignment is taken into account...

  • Report: Proof of delivery for courier order (47108)

    • HELP_RP_47108

    Displays the proof of delivery for the opened courier job. Images

  • Report: Purchase orders (20512)

    • HELP_RP_20512

    Displays all orders with status and applicable information

  • Report: Quality assurance digitization (73564)

    • HELP_RP_73564

    Creates an overview with status of digitization per shipment incl. summary.

  • Report: reasons for return (73454)

    • HELP_RP_73454

    Displays all shipments that have the events Return to Sender and Delivery Attempt stored.

  • Report: Redress rates (76291)

    • HELP_RP_76291

    Shows consignment quantities, redress quantities and quotas are determined even if the consignments for them are no longer available in the online database. The output can be grouped according to the following attributes: District structure (designation) District group (designation) District (designation)...

  • Report: result list (15144)

    • HELP_RP_15144

    Shows a list of the programmes found in the archive

  • Report: result list (29917)

    • HELP_RP_29917

    Shows a list of the programmes found in the archive

  • Report: Return Receipt IHS (40757)

    • HELP_RP_40757

    Description Shipment label for DirectPrint Format: 90 mm x 142 mm Label type: Label 90x142 NoStick (CxArtNr.: 41074) Variable content: The text block on the top left is determined based on the label definition of type Label-Layout. The logo on the top right is taken from the report configuration and can be overridden by adding the type Image in the label definition...

  • Report: Routes for Courier Drivers (40918)

    • HELP_RP_40918

    Displays the routes of the currier orders and their stops. The report can be selected by period, employee and status. Images

  • Report: Sales analysis (9902)

    • HELP_RP_9902

    For each customer, VAT rate, price group and customer group, the net amount of the invoices is output. The invoices can be filtered by order date, customer, VAT rate, price group, customer group and employee. You can choose to sort by customer name, number or final amount.

  • Report: Sales by article (7818)

    • HELP_RP_7818

    Displays the sales by article over a period of time. Split period In the tab "Miscellaneous" of the settings the option "Split period" can be activated. In the export as Excel workbook and CSV file, quantity and turnover are then split as additional columns according to the selected interval.

  • Report: sales summary (15148)

    • HELP_RP_15148

    The customer master sheet provides detailed information about the selected customer.

  • Report: Scan performance digitization (70911)

    • HELP_RP_70911

    The report shows the acquisition performance for a selected period per service.

  • Report: Scanned home delivery lists per carrier route (14028)

    • HELP_RP_14028

    Displays all scanned delivery lists per carrier route. The delivery lists can be filtered by carrier route, carrier route group, carrier route structure, depot and planned delivery date of the items.

  • Report: SDM Import File (15827)

    • HELP_RP_15827

    Display data of the *.sdm import or export text file. Within the selected entry date, the following are counted total running time and effective recording time are counted. The number of interruptions is also measured by the defined interval. interruptions are measured. On the basis of the collected data Finally, performance values are calculated and output.

  • Report: SDM Statistics (19012)

    • HELP_RP_19012

    Displays the SDM statistics. Within the selected entry date, the following are counted total running time and effective recording time are counted. The number of interruptions is also measured by the defined interval. interruptions are measured. On the basis of the collected data Finally, performance values are calculated and output.

  • Report: Securities account overview (15141)

    • HELP_RP_15141

    The report shows all depots to which districts are currently assigned, or vice versa. Optionally, you can also group by carrier route structure and carrier route group.

  • Report: Services performed per customer (62101)

    • HELP_RP_62101

    Displays the billed quantity per customer and service. All selected services are shown regardless of whether quantities are available or not. In the tariff model, services can be excluded for this report with the CustField "RP62101:Exclude services".

  • Report: Shipment Detail List (48069)

    • HELP_RP_48069

    Displays UPOC, barcode, alternative code, recipient, district, service provider, format, weight, service, article, additional service, additional article, type, delivery code, order date, entry date and planned delivery date of the items. The grouping can be freely selected independently of the filters. The restriction is possible by entry period of the shipment, by order date or by planned delivery date. In addition, by district, depot, district group, district structure, by customer, cost center, customer group, customer function, FA invoice client, by production location, sorter, by event type, delivery code or by service. The output to the screen or to Excel is sorted according to the selected grouping. Either the online database, the archive database or both can be queried.

  • Report: Shipment Detail List (9886)

    • HELP_RP_9886

    Displays UPOC, recipient, district, service provider, format, weight, service, article and entry and planned delivery date of the shipments. Grouping is by customer and cost center. Restriction is possible by entry period of the shipment, by district, depot, district group and by customer. The output on the screen or in Excel can be sorted by postcode, entry time, district, service provider or service.

  • Report: Shipment Details (15161)

    • HELP_RP_15161

    Displays the public broadcast details for the selected broadcast. If there is an image available for the shipment, the green file icon is displayed on the report. In addition, the [Show Image] button appears on the Access toolbar. By clicking on the button the image of the broadcast can be displayed.

  • Report: Shipment Images Export (24320)

    • HELP_RP_24320

    Exports the images of a broadcast.

  • Report: Shipment Images per Customer (10920)

    • HELP_RP_10920

    Displays shipment screens for a customer. It can be restricted by customer, cost centre, customer group, customer function, FA invoice client and entry date of the shipment or by a specific shipment with its UPOC. In addition, one or more (with the shift key) image types can be restricted.

  • Report: Shipment run from customer in postal code (15163)

    • HELP_RP_15163

    This evaluation shows the postal codes with the number of items for which a customer had mail volume.

  • Report: Shipment volume per customer (15160)

    • HELP_RP_15160

    Displays the volume of shipments per customer in the specified time period per day and on average.

  • Report: Shipments by activity (9907)

    • HELP_RP_9907

    Displays UPOC, recipient, date of receipt, date of delivery and service of a shipment. The shipments can be restricted according to the entry date of the shipment, services and customer.

  • Report: Shipments for subsequent process (54432)

    • HELP_RP_54432

    Description This report contains all consignments that have to be forwarded to one of the possible subsequent processes.

  • Report: Shipments in postal code (15159)

    • HELP_RP_15159

    Displays the number of items per postcode/postal routing region for the selected postcode area. (Basis consignment entry date)

  • Report: Shipments not cleared (70843)

    • HELP_RP_70843

    Shows which shipments have not yet been invoiced in the selected invoice run.

  • Report: Shipments without delivery area (10814)

    • HELP_RP_10814

    Displays all shipments that have not been assigned a delivery area or item. (Basis: Shipment entry date)

  • Report: shipping documents (15131)

    • HELP_RP_15131

    Prints the following reports: Post Labels, Post Delivery Note, and Order Line Items Bulletin de Commande for any orders that have not yet been printed and marks the order as printed.

  • Report: Sort information district group/district/location (14661)

    • HELP_RP_14661

    Overview of the sorting information postal code/city within a district group.

  • Report: Sort information in postal code (15166)

    • HELP_RP_15166

    Alphabetical listing of streets and their house number ranges in a postal code with sorting information for the district group, county and city levels.

  • Report: sort plan detail (32567)

    • HELP_RP_32567

    Overview of the district with the sort plan, subject descriptions and subject numbers

  • Report: Sort plan overview (32486)

    • HELP_RP_32486

    Overview sorting plan with the contained districts, subject designations and subject numbers

  • Report: sorting performance - activity report (7874)

    • HELP_RP_7874

    The time of the first and last sorting, the number of items, sorting time, non-sorting time and number of items per hour are displayed per employee and day. The employee, the performance and the entry date of the event can be filtered. The interval for the break time can also be specified.

  • Report: Special Conditions (15164)

    • HELP_RP_15164

    Displays the article, quantity scale, price, normal price and price group. The price group can be filtered and sorted according to price group, article number or article description.

  • Report: Special Price by Customer (15194)

    • HELP_RP_15194

    Article price evaluation within a price region per customer

  • Report: Specialist labelling for specialist systems (70880)

    • HELP_RP_70880

    Shows all compartments with barcode from UPOC for the selected compartment system. The report uses the labels with the Cx article number 41780.

  • Report: Standard Customer Export (9165)

    • HELP_RP_9165

    Exports customer data from all active customers.

  • Report: Standard FIBU Export (15167)

    • HELP_RP_15167

    Export data of final invoices to Excel or text file (financial accounting).

  • Report: Standard Receipt Label (43527)

    • HELP_RP_43527

    Description Shipment label for DirectPrint Format: 40 mm x 20 mm Label type: Label 40x20 Variable content: The text block is determined based on the label definition of type Label-Layout...

  • Report: Standard Return Receipt (ReturnReciept_Default)

    • HELP_RP_RETURNRECEIPT_DEFAULT

    Prints the return receipt for the entered item (additional print). Images

  • Report: Standard Shipment Label (42316)

    • HELP_RP_42316

    Description Shipment label for DirectPrint Format: 80 mm x 40 mm Label type: Label 80x40mm (CxArtNo.: 41076 / 41115) Variable content: The text block middle / bottom is determined based on the label definition of type LabelLayout. The logo in the upper right is taken from the report configuration and can be overridden by adding the type Image in the label definition...

  • Report: Standard shipment label (alternative code above) (53061)

    • HELP_RP_53061

    Description Shipment label for DirectPrint The text block is below and above the alternative code as a bar code with plain text. Format: : 40 mm x 15 mm and 40 mm x 20 mm Label 40x20mm (both formats are addressed via the same label type)...

  • Report: Standard shipment label (alternative code below) (53062)

    • HELP_RP_53062

    Description Shipment label for DirectPrint The text block is the alternative code at the top and bottom as a bar code with plain text. Format: : 40 mm x 15 mm and 40 mm x 20 mm Label 40x20mm (both formats are addressed via the same label type)...

  • Report: Standard shipment label (text box only) (53063)

    • HELP_RP_53063

    Description Shipment label for DirectPrint Just the text block. Format: : 40 mm x 15 mm and 40 mm x 20 mm Label 40x20mm (both formats are addressed via the same label type)...

  • Report: Standard Shipment Label (UPOC above) (53059)

    • HELP_RP_53059

    Description Shipment label for DirectPrint The text block is the UPOC at the bottom and at the top as a barcode with plain text. Format: : 40 mm x 15 mm and 40 mm x 20 mm Label 40x20mm (both formats are addressed via the same label type)...

  • Report: Standard Shipment Label (UPOC below) (53060)

    • HELP_RP_53060

    Description Shipment label for DirectPrint The text block is the UPOC at the top and bottom as a barcode with plain text. Format: : 40 mm x 15 mm and 40 mm x 20 mm Label 40x20mm (both formats are addressed via the same label type)...

  • Report: Standard Shipment Label Digitization (74489)

    • HELP_RP_74489

    Description Shipment label for DirectPrint Format: : 80 mm x 40 mm Label 80x40mm (CxArtNo.: 41076 / 41115) Fixed content: Dispatch UPOC middle / top and centered for the largest possible quiet zone. Variable content: The text block middle / bottom is determined based on the label definition of the type LabelLayout...

  • Report: Standard Shipment Label with Sub-Label (64296)

    • HELP_RP_64296

    Description Shipment label for DirectPrint Format: : 80 mm x 40 mm and 80 mm x 40 mm with 15 mm x 40 mm Label type: Label 80x40mm with sub-label 15x40mm Variable content: The text block Middle / Bottom is determined on the basis of the label definition of the type LabelLayout...

  • Report: Standard SubLabel (65053)

    • HELP_RP_65053

    Description Shipment label for DirectPrint Format: : 40 mm x 20 mm Label type: Label 40x20mm Images

  • Report: Status List (7802)

    • HELP_RP_7802

    The status list displays the number of complaints per status (Created, In Process, Waiting and Closed), grouped by customer, depot, district, district group or employee.

  • Report: Status Overview (10692)

    • HELP_RP_10692

    Evaluates tracking data according to a wide range of criteria.

  • Report: Subscription Detail Overview (64013)

    • HELP_RP_64013

    Displays the details of the selected subscription.

  • Report: Subscription Overview (64012)

    • HELP_RP_64012

    Outputs the existing subscriptions.

  • Report: Subscription shipment label (55076)

    • HELP_RP_55076

    Description Shipment label for DirectPrint Format: : 80 mm x 40 mm Label type: Label 80x40mm (CxArtNo.: 41076 / 41115) Recipient address is printed at the text block. The logo on the top right is taken from the report configuration and can be overridden by adding the type image in the label definition...

  • Report: System Tasks (62252)

    • HELP_RP_62252

    Outputs the system tasks in the job engine.

  • Report: Task directory packages (31876)

    • HELP_RP_31876

    Shows the mailing list of parcels from the post office.

  • Report: Test address label (45386Address)

    • HELP_RP_45386Address

    Description Shipment label for DirectPrint Format: A4 Label type: A4 Variable content: None. All DirectPrint variables are output with name and value...

  • Report: Test letter (19338)

    • HELP_RP_19338

    Generates a single letter to the manufacturer from the current complaint and enters the shipment into the DB.

  • Report: Test return label (45386Return)

    • HELP_RP_45386Return

    Description Shipment label for DirectPrint Format: A4 Label type: A4 Variable content: None. All DirectPrint variables are output with name and value...

  • Report: Test Shipment Label (45386MailItem)

    • HELP_RP_45386MailItem

    Description Shipment label for DirectPrint Format: A4 Label type: A4 Variable content: None. All DirectPrint variables are output with name and value...

  • Report: Time use of the P.O. box system (63463)

    • HELP_RP_63463

    Outputs the time usage per tray / mailbox over a specified period of time. Data basis are statistical data. Read more...

  • Report: TNT Orders (14057)

    • HELP_RP_14057

    Shows a list of all postcon jobs.

  • Report: TNT shipments per district (14058)

    • HELP_RP_14058

    sDisplays a list of the items per district. Only districts which contain postcon items are specified and the share of postcon items is output as a percentage.

  • Report: Tray assignment per P.O. box system (63459)

    • HELP_RP_63459

    Outputs the compartment occupancy as a percentage over a specified period of time. Data basis are statistical data. Read more... The time given for groupings and total are average values.

  • Report: UPOC award envelope C4 (15172)

    • HELP_RP_15172

    UPOC award with envelope format C4

  • Report: UPOC award envelope C5 (15173)

    • HELP_RP_15173

    UPOC award with envelope format D5

  • Report: UPOC award envelope DIN long (15174)

    • HELP_RP_15174

    UPOC award with envelope format DIN long (DL)

  • Report: UPOC award envelope Stielow 5954 (15175)

    • HELP_RP_15175

    UPOC award with envelope for Printer Stielow 5954

  • Report: UPOC award Purpose Form 3657 (15176)

    • HELP_RP_15176

    UPOC allocation with form Zweckform 3657

  • Report: UPOC blocks per customer (23793)

    • HELP_RP_23793

    In the display "UPOC blocks per customer" all blocks are listed per customer with the number of UPOCs total, delivered, blocked, blocked delivered and multiple delivered. delivered. The customer can be selected and also whether invalid blocks should be displayed and blocked ones. In the display "UPOCs per customer", all customers are listed who have entered a target quantity and/or have a valid UPOC block that has not yet been completely delivered and is not blocked. and not blocked UPOC block.

  • Report: UPOC blocks without assigned customers (23871)

    • HELP_RP_23871

    Outputs start, end UPOC, number of UPOC's, valid to, power and articles of UPOC blocks that are not assigned to a customer.

  • Report: UPOCs from customers (23808)

    • HELP_RP_23808

    For each customer and cost centre, all blocks are listed with the number of UPOCs total, delivered, blocked delivered and multiple delivered. delivered. All customers are listed who have entered a target quantity and/or have assigned a valid UPOC block that has not yet been completely delivered and not blocked UPOC block.

  • Report: UserLog (41082)

    • HELP_RP_41082

    Shows the entries from the UserLog according to the selected filters.

  • Report: UserLog (41082)

    • HELP_RP_42961

    Displays the number and costs per merchandise group, service and article for DIE POST items.

  • Report: UserLog (41082)

    • HELP_RP_42966

    Displays the number and cost by customer reference and directory number for DIE POST items.

  • Report: UserLog (41082)

    • HELP_RP_47021

    Shows all DIE POST articles which have DIE POST as master import and source or for which the setting Rp42961Include is activated.

  • Report: Workload Courier Driver (40920)

    • HELP_RP_40920

    Displays the workload of the courier drivers. The report can be selected by employee and by period. Images

  • Report: You have mail: Statistics (74670)

    • HELP_RP_74670

    Displays the number of recipients per You have mail message. The report can be selected according to the creation date.

  • Reports

    • HELP_UPOCCENTER_REPORT_TAB

  • Review Reports

    • HELP_CXREPORT_VALIDATEREPORT

    The reports are checked for consistency checked. Select the reports to be checked. To check check all reports, do not select a line. Incorrect reports are then no longer available.

  • Routing of incoming shipments

    • HELP_IHS_ROUTING

    The routing of incoming mail depends on the capture process and the CodX PostOffice modules used. The routing described here only applies to manual or OCR-based capture, but not to items that are captured via the LS-LetterShop module or by sorting machines. or by sorting machines. CodX PostOffice Capture shipments The consignment is entered into the system using the MS-IHS (manual entry) or OS-IHS (OCR-supported entry) module. In both cases, an attempt is made to determine a valid recipient on the basis of the input or recognised recipient address. This can be a person entered in the person database or a customer or cost center. In the case of manual entry, the customer selects the relevant person or customer. In the case of OCR-supported entry, the selection takes place automatically, if this could be clearly recognized. Otherwise, the definitive selection is also made by the user...

  • R-Scan

    • HELP_SN_AZD

    Machine-readable letters are franked with the franking machine. The letters are then scanned again via the scanned again via the R-Scan module. The franking value, barcode of the sender the sender, the cost centre or a file number and the item number (for and the consignment number (for registered mail) are read and linked together. In addition, the recipient's address is recognised and read in. The recognition of all elements of a letter can be flexibly defined by means of an defined by means of an image parser rule and can thus be adapted to any letter format and position. position of the elements of a letter. In order to handle errors during the recognition, it is possible to define by means of the setting how the item information should be processed, whether as a fixed setting whether it should be used as a fixed setting or read from the letter item. should be read from the letter item. In case of an error the scanning process can be aborted by means of a setting. View The dialog is divided into 3 units. The top part of the dialogue consists of the settings for the module R-Scan, which shows the different settings by means of a tab. settings by means of a tab. The middle part contains the scanner dialogue with which the the consignments are read in and displayed. In the lower part which can be adapted in its size by means of a splitter, is the user log in which the scanning and sending processes of the and sending processes of the module are logged continuously. R-Scan process The R-Scan process is as follows:...

  • Scanner Commands Format/WeightHeder 2

    • HELP_CENTORMAIL_SCANNERCMDFORMATWEIGHTDLG

    In the weighing modes "Static weighing" and "Never weighing" a format and/or a weight must be entered in the Centormail module. must be entered. This can be done as for the weighing mode switching via scanner commands. Scanner commands Format In this dialog, the scanner commands for the formats C4, C5 and C6 can be entered. C4: The scanner command for the format C4 C5: The scanner command for the format C5 C6: The scanner command for format C6 ATTENTION: Please note that the scanner must be configured to send an "F4" key before the desired command. Scanner Commands Weight In this dialog, the scanner commands for max. 10 different weights can be entered. Column weight to: The weight to be set can be entered here Scan command column: The scanner command for the corresponding weight can be entered here. ATTENTION: Please note that the scanner must be configured to send an "F4" key before the desired command. See also: Link to the manual of your version (PDF file)

  • Script for RFID

    • HELP_HANDHELD_SETUP_DLG_RFID_SCRIPTING

    On this dialog you can change the script that is executed for the data processing of RFID readers, edit/create and test. By default no script is then the read UID of a RFID card is simply forwarded. will be forwarded. If you want to process the data e.g. from a Legic data block you have to do this with this VB-Script. RFID scripting is only supported by the RFID reader Elatec RFID Reader RFID readers. RFID Scripting With this script you are supposed to process your data from a card in the same way as you will pass it on to the program and the program and use it as a unique identifier. used. For this you have several variables with contents, which you process accordingly. The following is a description of the available variables: Variable name...

  • Search

    • HELP_WILDCARD

    Search dialogs list items from the database that correspond to keywords or characters. In some dialogs, multiple keywords are split into sub-keywords (Delimiter: Whitespace character). All leading and trailing occurrences of whitespace characters and asterisk are removed/trimmed. Wildcards A wildcard character is a placeholder represented by a character...

  • Search addresses

    • HELP_ADRESSDLGSERVER_SEARCHADDRESS

    With this standard address search dialog you can find any address stored in the CodX PostOffice database. You can distinguish between universal addresses and other addresses when searching. You can define yourself which attributes you want to search for. want to search. You can search for multiple search terms that occur within an attribute. Furthermore, you have the option of using a Fuzzy search. In this case, the system searches for similarities within a term that must be at least 60% applicable. Please note that depending on the size of the address database, the fuzzy search can take a long time. This dialog can be called up in any address dialog with ALT-S. Please note that a maximum of 10000 addresses can be displayed. can be displayed, if more are found, a hint will be displayed. will be displayed. View The upper part contains the search terms with restrictions of the address types and the search options within the "Search" box. Below you see the list in which the addresses found are displayed. In the heading of the address list you can see the number of addresses found. addresses found. On the right side are the buttons with the available functions. For further refinement of the search you have the possibility to filter function in the list to further filter the addresses found. Operation Search First enter the keywords you want to use to search for an address in the search field. Set the radio button for "All" or "Universal addresses only" as required search field, set the radio button for "All" or "Universal addresses only". If you can't find an address, you can check the "Fuzzy search" box. "Fuzzy search", this will also find addresses where the search terms do not match 100 percent. By pressing the button the search will be executed with the entered search terms and the selected options. Please note that that you have to enter at least 2 characters in the search term, otherwise the search will not be executed. If no addresses are found are found, this will be indicated by a message dialog...

  • Search and select person

    • HELP_COMMONTOOLS_PERSONSEARCHDLG

    In this dialog, persons can be searched and selected. To search, enter one or more search terms separated by spaces. The search function also supports wildcards and the special characters for concatenation and exact match of search terms (see IHS Server Settings). The search starts automatically with a slight delay when entering search terms. The persons found are displayed in the results list. This list can be sorted accordingly by clicking on a column heading. sorted accordingly...

  • Search depot

    • HELP_BV_DEPOTSEARCH

    You can search for the desired securities account by entering one or more search terms. Select it and click the [Apply] button to use it.

  • Search for customers, cost centers and templates

    • HELP_KKSSELECTORSERVER_KKSDLG

    Wherever in CodX PostOffice customers, cost centers and/or templates can be used, they are selected using the dialog shown here. dialog shown here. Depending on the module, this dialog is displayed in different ways. Display You have the option to display the results of a search in two different ways. You select this option in the group"Display / Presentation" via the option button Tree view or List view. option button. In the tree view, customers and their associated cost centers or templates are displayed hierarchically. If the mouse pointer is positioned on an entry, an information text with additional attributes of the corresponding entry is displayed. tree view...

  • Search group, tour and depot

    • HELP_BV_AUSLIEFERTOUR_SEARCH_DLG

    By entering one or more search terms you can search for the desired group, tour and depot. Select it and click the [Select] button to use it.

  • Select article

    • HELP_COMMONTOOLS_ARTICLESELECTOR

    This is the article selector, which is used by various modules in CodX PostOffice. It exists in 2 display variants, which differ in the selection of articles. Either you can select only one article, or you can select more than one article, which will be can be selected by means of an activation box at the beginning of the list entry. The articles can be searched by means of a search term, whereby a fuzzy search is used, i.e. also articles which have a similarity with the entered search term can be found. similarity with the entered search term will be displayed. To search for an article, all attributes displayed in the list are used, i.e. from the are used to search for the article, i.e. from the UPOC to the service description. In addition, you can activate the filter in the list to filter individual attributes. View An input field for the search term is displayed as well as the list with the articles found. On the right side you will find the buttons with the available functions. Operation Search Enter one or more search terms in the "Search" input field and press the "Search" button. You can also use the ENTER key instead of the button, which has the same functionality. Apply Depending on the search mode, one or more items are selected. If the multiple selection is active, first activate the checkbox displayed at the beginning of the list entry for all desired articles and then press the "Apply" button. the activation box displayed at the beginning of the list entry for all desired articles and then press the "Apply" button. If you want to select only one article, you can select it directly in both variants of the article selector by double-clicking on the corresponding list entry. to select it. After the "Select" function the dialog is closed...

  • Select depot

    • HELP_COMMONTOOLS_DEPOTAUSWAHL

    You can search for the desired securities account by entering one or more search terms. Select it and click the [Apply] button to use it.

  • Select house / logistics unit

    • HELP_COMMONTOOLS_HAUSORLOGISTICUNITDLG

    With this dialog houses and/or logistics units can be searched and selected. Only the first 1000 search results are displayed. search results are displayed, if more are found, a corresponding warning message appears. When you assign a work center to a customer/cost center or person, only logistics units can be selected. can be selected. The search results can be sorted and filtered by clicking on the corresponding column header. The individual search terms are logically AND linked, i.e. the more search terms are recorded, the more the result is limited. limited. The same special characters for word combination and word termination can be used for the search terms as for the search in MS/OS-IHS. word endings can be used for the search terms as for the search in MS/OS-IHS:...

  • Select image

    • HELP_SV_SEL_IMAGE_DLG

    Images that are attached to a shipment are listed here. To view one of these images, select it and then click the [View] button. From the window that opens, the images can also be rotated, mirrored and exported. If an image is listed but not displayed, this may be due to the fact that a certain age of the images has been exceeded in the access management. of the images has been exceeded. This may be specified by your system administrator. In this case, please contact him.

  • Select logistics unit/district

    • HELP_POLIBRARY_SELECT_LU_AND_BEZIRK_DLG

    This dialog is used to manually select the delivery destination (logistics unit/district) of a shipment. When you select the logistics unit, the carrier route is also selected automatically, if possible. The prerequisite for this is that the logistics unit is assigned to a carrier route in the current carrier route structure. The carrier route structure is adopted by the calling module (MS/OS-IHS). The carrier route can also be selected explicitly, overriding the indirect selection via logistics unit. If logistics unit/district are already selected in the calling module (MS/OS-IHS), they are preselected. Input fields...

  • Select printer

    • HELP_DIRECTPRINT_PRINTERSELECTION

    A label to be printed is first printed on the primary printer and then on the secondary printer, provided that a definition has been made for the label and the printer.

  • Selecting Blocking Tasks

    • HELP_JOBENGINESERVER_SETUP_SELBLOCKEDGUID

    In this detail dialog you can select jobs, that block the job you are currently working on. This means that if you want job XY to run and you do not want your job to start while it is running job should not be started, then select the job XY and activate the checkbox. activate the checkbox. You can select several jobs that block the job you are currently working on. Attention. Be careful not to set up endless blockades, i.e. jobs block each other. Think carefully about which job should block which one. In the rain, blocking only makes sense if a job has an influence on the processing of the job that is to be blocked. processing of the job that is to be blocked. View On the screen there is a list with all jobs that exist in the system, regardless of whether they are active or inactive. Next to it are the buttons with the available functions. Operation...

  • Selection schedule

    • HELP_JOBENGINESERVER_SETUP_SELSCHEDULE

    Select an existing schedule by marking it and then clicking on [Apply]. If an existing schedule is selected in this way and this is edited in the subsequent dialog, these new settings apply to all jobs, that use this schedule. Alternatively, a new schedule must otherwise be created.

  • SEPA mandate

    • HELP_KV_DIALOG_SEPAMANDATE

    Master Specifies who the master is for this record: To manually edit the record, the master must be set to User Interface or <undefined>. To update the update the record with the mandate import, the master must be set to Import or <undefined>. SEPA type Specifies the type of SEPA: CORE, B2B or COR1 Creditors ID Lists the creditor ID entered in the basic settings of the FA invoice client. If required, this can be changed here. Address Lists the creditor address entered in the basic settings of the FA invoice client. If required this can be changed here...

  • Sequencing

    • HELP_BV_TAB_BEZIRKDLG_SEQUENCER

    The Sequencer is a system, which calculates the optimized the optimized sequence of gears based on different road based on different road sections. CodX PostOffice offers a standard interface for data the data exchange with the Sequencer. This leads to the fact that practically every product can be connected, as long as the interface is supported. CodX PostOffice offers various possibilities to control the sequence optimization. With these settings, the Sequencer is controlled in such a way that the optimal aisle the optimal aisle sequence optimization for the respective delivery area. can be calculated. View The "Sequencing" tab contains the settings for controlling the sequencing process. settings for controlling the sequencing process. On the right side buttons with the available functions in this settings dialog. in this settings dialog. The two buttons "Calculate and "Delete" are only active when sequencing is activated. Operation Calculate Starts the job in the background, which creates the sequencing data and calculates it per carrier route...

  • Sequencing for cooperation partners

    • HELP_KO_SETUP_SEQUENCING

    In this dialog you set how to handle received district number ranges which originate from a Sequencer should be handled. These settings can be made per partners who are connected to the CNDB network and from whom you receive from which you receive district data. View A list is displayed in which all cooperation partners in the CNDB network send data to you are available. are present. Please note that normal cooperation partners outside the network are not shown here, because you have to change the same settings on the cooperation partner in the tab District data tab. As information the UPOC and the name of the cooperation partner are displayed in column 1 and 2. cooperation partner are displayed, in the 3rd column you can set the option which data should be imported. Operation Select the desired cooperation partner and set in the 3 column one of the following selection options:...

  • Service assignment for extended shipment attributes

    • HELP_TARIFMODELL_SETUP_LEISTUNG_SBBCUSTFIELD

    Each shipment can have extended shipment attributes. attributes. With this function these can be assigned in the entry modules to a specific service in the entry modules. This means that the extended shipment attributes can only be edited if they match the shipment's with the service of the consignment, provided that an assignment is assignment is made here. Only the extended shipment shipment attributes are displayed in the entry modules, which either no service or exactly the service defined in the shipment. defined in the shipment. This dialog allows the assignment to be edited. be edited. View This dialog contains an editable list which contains all assignments of extended shipment attributes to the of the service to be edited. This list can be supplemented as desired with existing extended shipment attributes. On the right side of the list are the buttons with the available functions. available functions. The following fields with the following described below are available in the assignment: Column...

  • Service provider

    • HELP_CONFIGSERVER_SETUP_MANDANT_DETAIL

    General The service provider ID and the UPOC are assigned automatically. Each service provider must be assigned to a service provider group. If a service provider is newly entered and all service providers of the same service provider group are already blocked partners of a customer in the advance allocation, the partner block for the corresponding customer also applies to the new service provider. Provided that a zone is assigned to the service provider and this zone is assigned to a district as service provider / zone for the sorting. The same applies if the service provider group of the service provider is changed. If not all service providers of the new service provider group are blocked, nothing is changed in the partner block settings. A name must be assigned to each service provider. The partner number serves as an identifier for Interface...

  • Service provider / Zone: Settings

    • HELP_TARIFMODELL_CF_DLZONE

    In this dialog the Custfields definitions for the service provider / zone are made. Please note, that the settings per service provider / zone can be different. For further help on edit custfields, please refer to the corresponding help. Available options Designation (Custfieldname) value (table ID: 2045, lID = X)...

  • Set custom fields

    • HELP_CUSTFIELD_ADMIN

    In the Set Custom Fields window, you can define your own new fields by choosing Add. You can change existing fields, or you can delete them with Delete. AttentionIf you delete a field here, this field will be deleted from all used records. data records used and thus also all data entered for this field! Add / Edit Enter a simple designation that corresponds to the meaning. NoteThis name must also be used to identify the field in your own reports, for example, so keep it simple and do not change it later. kept simple and should not be changed later. You can define a language-dependent translation for this designation. Select the desired line and then click on the the flag symbol. Subsequently, the language-dependent label will always be used if available and only if not available, the label is displayed. In the Data type field, select the desired type of the field. Do not change the type of a field if data already exists for it! already exist! The correct data type forces the user to enter consistent and correct data...

  • Setting - IHS Web Interface

    • HELP_IHSSERVER_SETUP_WEB_INTERFACE

    Item data for shipping form The IHS Web Service Interface allows a third-party system to request shipment data. This function is particularly important for the creation of shipping forms. For the IHS Web Service to be able to correctly, the following settings must be made for the item data: Power: Power selection Power:...

  • Setting - IHS Web Interface

    • HELP_WEBAPI_SETUP_TAB_COMMON

    General With the Web API CodX PostOffice offers an interface for controlling and querying data. The interface is particularly suitable for developing intranet / internet Internet solutions, which exchange data with CodX PostOffice. Changes to these values are applied each time you log in to the Intranet WebApp. In the AdminDoc you will find more information about the interface. General settings...

  • Setting - Service provider

    • HELP_CONFIGSERVER_SETUP_MANDANT

    All service provider groups and service providers are listed here. These can be edited and imported here. Service Provider Group Each service provider must be assigned to a service provider group. These can be entered and edited here. Add The detail dialog for adding a new service provider group appears. service provider group Edit First select a service provider group to edit it in the edit it in the detail dialog...

  • Setting - Web API User Profile

    • HELP_WEBAPI_SETUP_TAB_USERPROFILE

    User profiles can be used to control which information is accessible to the web application via the web API. Here you can create the user profiles and make their settings. Important: The number must be unique. It is used as a reference when importing persons. A standard user profile cannot be deleted. The same applies to user profiles that have been assigned to persons. Changes to these values are applied each time you log in to the Intranet WebApp...

  • Setting FA Invoice Client

    • HELP_FA_SETUP_CF_RECHNUNG_MANDANT

    Here you can make additional settings for FA invoice clients. Values: 001: Invoice per order ID: The same setting is also available in customer management / master data. If a definition exists on the customer, this is valid, otherwise the definition of the corresponding FA invoice client. (see Customer Management Invoice Definitions) You have three options: - Do not take order ID into account (as before) - One invoice with/without order ID: One invoice is created for each order (invoice for all orders with order ID; invoice for orders without order ID) - One invoice per order ID 002: mail alliance E-ZUP: (partner number) If you have an additional license for mail alliance Clearing Interfac (FA_RM) this setting is also taken into account during the shipment export. setting is also taken into account. If an E-ZUP is defined for the FA invoice client, items whose customers are assigned to this FA invoice client are exported to a different file. exported. The file name contains this E-ZUP in each case. For details see: Mail Alliance Clearing Interface.

  • Settings - Articles

    • HELP_TARIFMODELL_CF_ARTIKEL

    #DIE-POST #DIE-POSTTarifmodell

    Additional settings for the article can be made here. Especially for the DIE POST module. General settings P2 Article description Service Level Text KAT Specification text KAT...

  • Settings - CodeParser

    • HELP_CONFIGSERVER_SETUP_CODEPARSER

    The CodeParser is a component of CodX PostOffice to recognize and evaluate codes. This is used among for the recognition and evaluation of alternative codes. used. With the recognition of the code the suitable CodeRule is searched after the defined sequence until the first one fits. Then the code is evaluated with the code is evaluated with the matching ParsingRule. All necessary definitions can be entered and edited. The list shows all existing CodeRules are listed. Testing If you press Test, the cache is reloaded with the CodeRule is reloaded and a dialog for the test is displayed. Here you have the possibility to enter a code and check if the rules work...

  • Settings - DVS interface

    • HELP_TNTINTERFACE_SETUP

    Execution of district export You can set whether the district export is to be carried out daily at a specific time, automatically each time the BV data is changed, or manually. or manually. It is recommended to start the BV export manually during commissioning. When the process has run smoothly in both directions the carrier route export can take place automatically on a daily basis. County structure Only valid and active district structures are available for selection. The carrier route structure selected here is exported. Execution of order import...

  • Settings - FA Config

    • HELP_FAKTURIERUNG_SETUP_FA_CONFIG

    The basic settings of the invoicing system include the number of decimal places to be displayed and the number range definitions to be used. number range definitions to be used. Number of decimal places The set decimal places are used for the display of monetary amounts, discounts and quantities in lists. However, when editing these values (item data, order item & invoice item), 4 decimal places are always displayed. Invoice verification (only with appropriate license)...

  • Settings - General - Startup

    • HELP_CONFIGSERVER_SETUP_GENERAL

    Right To be able to make changes here, the rights must be set accordingly under General Settings / General must be set accordingly. Code page The StartupServer sets the code page during the startup of CodX PostOffice. The code page is a set of characters for a specific language. With this setting, it is possible to display and use character sets of a specific language in CodX PostOffice to display and use fonts of a specific language. The code page can be defined here. The setting is saved in the database and therefore applies to all workstations. Changes will only be applied after a restart of CodX PostOffice...

  • Settings - Goods receipt

    • HELP_WE_SETUP

    In the settings of the goods receipt it is exclusively about the overflow districts. This defines what is to happen to consignments shipments when an assigned district is full. Shipments are assigned to the defined district (default) The shipments are assigned to the valid district based on the address Additional shipments are assigned to the overflow district...

  • Settings - Job Engine

    • HELP_JOBENGINESERVER_SETUP_JOB

    The JobEngine is a module that can be used with the free configurable jobs with any number of the defined tasks can be executed for free configurable times. The basic concept for the JobEngine was the implementation of a scheduler system for the universal import / export server. However, since the approach is generic, it can also be used for other processes that need to be executed in CodX PostOffice that need to be executed. There is a setup page to define the jobs and tasks as well as the schedules. There is a JobEngine view for monitoring and review. The JobEngine contains a script engine that executes scripts defined as tasks. The JobEngine also contains a command engine that can execute any system command. Jobs that are executed with errors can be reported via CxWatchDog to trigger an alarm. A feature of jobs and tasks is that they can be identified with a GUID. View The dialog consists of a list of all jobs available in the system system and a filter to display these jobs filtered. displayed. On the right side there is a button with the available functions. Operation The following functions are available with the buttons are available to you:...

  • Settings Acquisition

    • HELP_CAPTURE_CONSTRAINTS_DLG

    Restrictions can be defined at different levels for the various acquisition modules. The global default values are defined in the Settings: Production, [Workstations] tab, [Global Settings] button. In addition, restrictions can be defined per workstation (sorting system, computer), service and customer/cost center or. The defined settings are applied according to the following priority:...

  • Settings Advanced Shipment Attributes

    • HELP_CONFIGSERVER_SETUP_SBBCUSTFIELDMANAGEMENT

    This settings page is used to manage Advanced Shipment Attributes. These can be entered, edited and deleted. Please note that this dialog is only visible with the the appropriate permissions and the functions are available are available depending on the authorisation. View The screen displays a list of all all available extended shipment attributes. The columns in the list represent all available options for an extended shipment attribute. Existing extended shipment attributes that already have values on shipments are displayed with a green green background color. On the right side of the list are the buttons with the available functions. Functions The following buttons are available:...

  • Settings CEP DPD

    • HELP_KEP_SETUP_DPD

    Enter the settings for your DPD account (DELIS account) here. A corresponding account is a prerequisite for using DPD as a service provider. The first step in using DPD Web-Services is to apply for access data. If you would like to use DPD Web Services, please apply for your access data from the relevant contact person at your DPD depot. The settings entered here must match the DPD specifications. Further information can be found under WS#46431: Commissioning and configuration DPD module and directly at DPD...

  • Settings CEP FedEx

    • HELP_KEP_SETUP_FEDEX

    Enter the settings for your FedEx account here. A corresponding account is a prerequisite for using FedEx as a service provider. For information about your account, please contact your account manager/contact person at FedEx. The settings entered here must match the FedEx specifications. For more information, see WS#46434: Commissioning and Configuration FedEx Module and contact FedEx directly...

  • Settings CEP GLS Germany

    • HELP_KEP_SETUP_GLS_GERMANY

    #xxxxx

    Enter the settings for your GLS Germany account here. An account with GLS Germany is a prerequisite for using GLS Germany as a service provider. Information about your account (UserID, password, contact ID) can be obtained from the GLS Germany account manager/contact person. The settings entered here must comply with the specifications of GLS Germany. Designation Value 001: UserID for authentication Username, you will receive this from GLS Germany...

  • Settings CEP GO!

    • HELP_KEP_SETUP_GO

    Enter the settings for your GO! account here. An account with GO! is a prerequisite for using GO! as a CEP service provider. You can obtain information about your account (user ID, password, customer number, station) from your GO! customer advisor/contact person. The settings entered here must match the GO! specifications. Further information can be found in the AdminDoc. Designation Value 001: UserID for authentication Username, you will receive this from GO! ATTENTION: Note upper/lower case (Case sensitive)!...

  • Settings CEP service provider (courier/express/parcel)

    • HELP_CONFIGSERVER_SETUP_KEP

    Enter all settings for the CEP service providers here. The settings can be made per CEP service provider in each case per production site and/or cost unit (customer/cost center) and/or individually. In the MS/OS-AZD data acquisition modules, either an individual definition or automatic determination of the setting can be selected. Priority of the automatic determination of the settings Cost center level Customer level Production site level...

  • Settings CEP TNT Express

    • HELP_KEP_SETUP_TNTEXPRESS

    Enter the settings for your TNT Express account here. A corresponding account is a prerequisite for using TNT Express as a service provider. For information about your account, please contact your account manager/contact person at TNT Express. The settings entered here must match the specifications of TNT Express. You can find further information under WS#46462: Commissioning and Configuration TNT Express Module and directly at TNT...

  • Settings CEP UPS

    • HELP_KEP_SETUP_UPS

    Enter the settings for your UPS account here. A corresponding account is a prerequisite for the use of UPS as a service provider. For information about your account, please contact your UPS account manager/contact person. The settings entered here must match the UPS specifications. For more information, see WS#46103: Commissioning and Configuration UPS Module and directly at UPS...

  • Settings CodeRule DIE POST

    • HELP_CONFIGSERVER_SETUP_CODERULE_DIEPOST

    Here you must enter the IDs for the delivery client, service and client which are used for a DIE POST consignment. is used. You get the IDs from the following tables: - lDelivery clientID: Table - lPerformanceID: Table Performance - lMandantID: Table client...

  • Settings Confidentiality level

    • HELP_CONFIDENTIAL_LEVEL_SETUP_DLG

    Any confidentiality level can be defined in CodX PostOffice. A confidentiality level is a rule definition. If the defined rule applies, the corresponding confidentiality level applies. Example of rules: Keyword 'Confidential', recognition with at least 90%. Keyword 'Personal', recognition with at least 80%. Recipient name before company name...

  • Settings Cooperation Partner (KoP)

    • HELP_KO_SETUP_SETUPDETAILDLG

    On the dialog for entering the KoP settings, you can see the different settings for the different collaboration modules. These settings may change depending on the features of your installation (e.g. for CodX PostOffice Enterprise or KoP Client). The following global data must be defined for each KoP: Client (partner service provider) Selection from all defined clients Customer All incoming shipments from this KoP are assigned to the set customer (important for billing). General settings...

  • Settings CxNet

    • HELP_DISPLAYMODUL_SETUP

    #CxNet #CxIO #FTDI #CxIOModule #CxIOModule-Mini #BoardTest

    All information about the connected CxNet hardware is visible in this dialog. CxNet hardware is visible (#CxNet). All distribution boxes, the CxIO modules (#CxIO module) and CxIO module mini (#CxIO module mini) connected to this computer are displayed. All hardware modules can be removed and and reconnected during operation. The settings that can be made using buttons should only be used by trained personnel, as they can as they can change the configuration of all connected modules. As soon as a setting or a property of one of the connected devices changes, the view is updated. When the CodX PostOffice module is running as a service and the CxNet module is also running in the service, all displays and settings that run via the CxNet module are exchanged between the service and the desktop application via the CxWebserver. Since this interface is somewhat slower than direct data transfer, there may be slight delays between the display and the modules. Please note that currently only the first distribution box is supported, i.e. all displayed modules are controlled only via the distribution box with the number 0. Please note that the control of the CxIO Mini modules only runs directly and not via a web service. runs...

  • Settings DBMaintenance

    • HELP_DB_MAINTENANCESERVER_SETUP

    #DBMaintenance #CxWatchDog #Test

    The task of the module DBMaintenance (#DBMaintenance) is to provide a reliable backup for all CodX PostOffice databases and to perform a regular optimization of the databases by reindexing. regular optimization of the databases by reindexing. It also archives the database backups to a user-defined drive and defined drive, and as a third level of security, a transfer of the database backups to an FTP server. Obsolete backups on the backup drive and on the FTP server are automatically deleted after a freely definable expiration time. Thanks to this concept the SQL Agent of the Microsoft SQL Server is no longer required. The execution of the different elements of DBMaintenance are guaranteed by the JobEngine. This also allows a flexible planning of the individual execution times is possible. These system tasks are only executed on the application server. The execution of the tasks is independent of how the database servers are organized, i.e. whether the various databases are located on different database servers or if several databases are running on the same database server. If something does not work with a job, the following is done will be alerted by means of WatchDog (#CxWatchDog). Likewise a detailed logging is led in the user log, system log and Datalogger. Switch test system mode Depending on whether it is a test system (#Test system) or not, the button is labeled accordingly. To change the mode you need administrator rights. IMPORTANT: After you have changed the mode you must restart CodX PostOffice on all your PCs and restart the and restart the CodX PostOffice service!...

  • Settings digitization

    • HELP_DIGITAL_SETUP

    In this dialog all relevant settings settings which are required for the digitization, can be set. Changed settings must be explicitly saved with the Save" button, otherwise they will be lost. lost. Operation To set the logistics unit for archiving archiving, destruction and digitization, call up the logistics selector using the button "button next to the display field and select the corresponding logistics unit. The name of the selected logistics selected logistics unit is displayed. Settings Designation...

  • Settings district administration: General

    • HELP_BV_SETUP_ALLGEMEIN

    Data relationships By selecting "A transshipment point must be delivery route" and "A depot musthave a transshipment point". musthave a transshipment point", you can define whether a transshipment point a transshipment point must be defined for a delivery tour/depot or not. or not. Is"The unloading point may only be delivery route."is not selected, an unloading unloading point can be assigned to several delivery tours. Display options If the box is ticked, the house number ranges of the house number ranges of the streets are displayed...

  • Settings Employee Administration: Employee Functions

    • HELP_MV_SETUP_MITARBEITERFUNKTION

    The employee functions are defined in this tab. Various functions are predefined in the system and are used by the system. These functions can be renamed, but not deleted. Only functions that are no longer used (not assigned to an employee) can be deleted.

  • Settings for customer/cost center

    • HELP_KV_CF_STAMMDATEN

    Here, additional settings can be made for customers as well as for cost centers. Available options Designation (Custfieldname) Value (table ID: 2015, lID = ID from table KKS)...

  • Settings for employee administration: Reasons for absence

    • HELP_MV_SETUP_EMPLOYEEABSENCEREASON

    The reasons for absence are defined in this tab. You can only delete absence reasons that are no longer used (not assigned to an employee's absence).

  • Settings for employee administration: Wage group

    • HELP_MV_SETUP_LOHNGRUPPE

    The wage groups for the employees are defined in this tab. A wage group can only be deleted if no employee uses it. Warning amount / maximum amount The warning amount and maximum amount are only used for the report "Overview of carrier over warning limit". This report shows all employees who exceed the wage warning amount for the selected payroll period. Flat-rate remuneration...

  • Settings for invoice verification

    • HELP_FA_SETUP_VERIFY_BILL

    General After creating the invoice (calculating all amounts), the invoice can be checked for correctness. For this purpose, you can select from various tests. If an invoice does not meet the test, a warning is generated. In the invoice overview you can filter for invoices with warnings. When you open an invoice there is a Warning' button. A symbol on the button tells you if there are any warnings. If you press this button, the individual warnings are shown in a list. list...

  • Settings for order run and order import

    • HELP_FASERVER_SETUP

    Here you can only make a few settings for the order run can be made here. All settings for the job run can be viewed and changed via the button Settings button to view and change them. Order run in general The order run is responsible for ensuring that orders are created from all shipments that are to be settled. The order run runs on the application server as a service. The delay set has an influence on when an order is created from a shipment. an order is created. The setting 'dtNextOrder run' (see Settings) contains the time at which the next order run is executed. If this value is in the past, the order run starts, provided that the the conditions for this are fulfilled. (no other activities with order calculation) After each successful order run, this setting is increased by one day. If an error occurs during the order run, the date of the next order run is not increased. next order run is not increased. ('dtNextOrderRun') The order run is therefore restarted at the next opportunity. If there is an older date in 'dtNextOrderRun', the order run is perhaps run is currently active or the service is no longer running. anymore. You can get more information by starting the datalogger and looking at the logs of the service. of the service. (Filter by Profile FAServer) Order run settings Time of execution: Here you can specify the Start time of the job run can be specified. (Custfieldname: lOrderRunHour & lOrderRunMinute)...

  • Settings for Payroll Accounting: General Configurations

    • HELP_MV_SETUP_ABRECHNUNGSERVER

    In this tab the settings for the accounting run can be defined. Below is a list of all the data required to create the payroll run. payroll creation. Procedure for entering the basic payroll data The settings are saved with the "Apply" button or by exiting this tab. If settings have been have been changed, the accounting run is started. The following settings can be made: Remuneration Here you can select whether shipment data, courier data and/or flat rates are to be taken into account during the settlement run. Unit number based (consignment and courier order data)...

  • Settings for Payroll Accounting: Wage Type

    • HELP_MV_SETUP_LOHNART

    The wage types that are used for payroll data creation are defined in this tab. The wage type can be used in external payroll accounting to determine whether the remuneration is deduction-free or not. or not. For this purpose, the remuneration or the flat rate is provided with the corresponding wage type. You can only delete wage types that are not assigned to a remuneration or flat rate. The parameter wage type(export) is used as an identifier for the export.

  • Settings for Payroll: Compensation

    • HELP_MV_SETUP_VERGUETUNG

    This tab defines the remunerations per article and remuneration category that are used for the creation of settlement data. used. This defines what a delivery person receives per shipment or courier driver. (according to the article) For this purpose, the user selects a remuneration category (filter) and assigns a remuneration to the corresponding article. To delete an allowance, select the desired article/allowance category and press the "Delete" button. The entry remains in the list but the icon changes. List The list shows the allowances. Depending on the filter, all remunerations or only those per selected compensation category...

  • Settings for Payroll: Compensation Category

    • HELP_MV_SETUP_VERGUETUNGKATEGORIE

    This tab defines the remuneration categories that are required for payroll data creation. There is at least one compensation category (standard compensation category) assigned to all districts. However, additional remuneration categories can be entered. This gives you the option of allocating different remunerations for carrier routes by assigning the required remuneration category to the carrier route. Different remuneration categories can also be used for courier drivers. These are assigned to the employee in the Employee Administration tab page Additional Data. For each remuneration category, the remunerations must then be assigned to all articles...

  • Settings for Payroll: Flat-Rate Remuneration

    • HELP_MV_SETUP_PAUSCHALVERGUETUNG

    This tab defines the flat-rate remunerations that are used for payroll data creation. Flat-rate allowances can be assigned in a number of different places: Employee, Pay Grade, District, and Compensation Category. These flat-rate remunerations are then settled accordingly for the employees during the payroll run. Important: During the payroll run, a flat rate is only settled once per day! Only those flat-rate remunerations can be deleted which are not assigned anywhere.

  • Settings for pickup tour groups

    • HELP_ABHOLTORGRUPPE_TAB

    In CodX PostOffice you can create as many collection create as many pickup groups as you like. Each standard pickup must be assigned to be assigned to such a pickup tour group. The settings are only accessible if you have the user right KV Settings / Aboltour. With the buttons"Add","Edit" and "Delete" you can and"Delete" the pickup source groups can be edited. can be edited. Please note that you can only delete pickup tour groups which are not are not assigned to a standard pickup route.

  • Settings Format Server

    • HELP_OS_SETUP_FORMATSERVER

    The calibration of the format camera is fully automatic. Here you can test how the result turns out with the respective broadcasts. Proceed as follows: Place an item on the scale plate and press Test Format. The format recognition image and the dimensions of the broadcast are displayed.

  • Settings- FrontDesk

    • HELP_FRONTDESK_SETUP

    Here you make the settings that are required for the FrontDesk module. That the Frontdesk module is available at all, the corresponding license must be available and the desired workstation must be configured as such. (Two settings) This is done in the settings under Production / Workstations / Workstations. (See Settings) FrontDesk Custfields Designation (Custfieldname)...

  • Settings Handheld Scanner

    • HELP_BE_SETUP

    A list of connected scanners is shown here. The selection field Scanner is held in the hand can be used to specify whether the scanner is operated by hand (HandHeld-Mode, Standard) or whether it stands in the holder and the items are guided past it (HandFree-Mode). Supported scanners The BE - Image Acquisition module is not restricted to a specific scanner type. Basically, a general interface is used, which can also be can also be operated by different scanner types. However, the software was tested with the following scanner, which can also be obtained from CodX Software AG :...

  • Settings Handheld Scanner

    • HELP_HANDHELD_CONFIGURATION_CUSTFIELDS

    This dialog is used to enter settings for all handheld scanners. Available settings: Name Type / Permitted values Default value Description Name...

  • Settings IHS Server

    • HELP_IHSSERVER_SETUP_DLG

    #IHS

    #IHS cache For information and details on the function of the IHS server, see Receiver Determination in MS/OS IHS. The IHS server enables the fast search of persons / logistics units and cost units based on search terms (tokens). ATTENTION: The blacklist and all other settings apply system-wide for all computers!...

  • Settings IHS Server

    • HELP_IHSSERVER_SETUP_DLG_KEYWORD_FAULT_TOLERANCE

    Button "Error tolerance of keywordsDisplays the dialog for defining the error tolerance. The error tolerance defines a tolerance value (in percent) per keyword group. The higher this value is, the more errors a search token may have when comparing it to the keywords in order to be considered a hit (similarity search). Decrease this value if too many "wrong" hits are displayed in the search result. See also: Determination of receiver in MS/OS-IHS

  • Settings IHS Server

    • HELP_IHSSERVER_SETUP_DLG_KEYWORD_MINLENGHT

    Button "Minimum keyword lengthDisplays the dialog for defining the minimum keyword length. The minimum required keyword length can be defined per keyword group. per keyword group. Only keywords with at least the length defined here are included in the IHS cache. See also: Determination of receiver in MS/OS-IHS

  • Settings IHS Server

    • HELP_IHSSERVER_SETUP_DLG_KEYWORD_WEIGHTING

    Button "Keyword weighting Displays the dialog for defining the weighting. The weighting of keywords can be defined per keyword group. See also: Determination of receiver in MS/OS-IHS

  • Settings KEP DHL Express

    • HELP_KEP_SETUP_DHL_EXPRESS

    Enter the settings for your DHL Express account here. An account with DHL-Express is a prerequisite for using DHL-Express as a service provider. For information about your account, please contact your DHL Express account manager. The settings entered here must comply with DHL's specifications. For more information, see WS#46106: Commissioning and Configuration DHL Express Module and www.dhl.com/express...

  • Settings KEP DHL Parcel

    • HELP_KEP_SETUP_DHL_PAKET

    ATTENTION: The service provider DHL Paket is only available within Germany (shipments from Germany to Germany) available! Only parcel shipping for business customers is supported, "Day Definite" (DD) is implemented as shipping method! Enter the settings for your DHL Paket account here...

  • Settings KO - Cooperation

    • HELP_KO_SETUP_SETUPDLG

    On this settings dialog you will find an overview of all entered cooperation partners, except for the client that is set as a KO-Enterprise, if the current client is a partner of an enterprise network. The Global settings in this dialog are valid for all entered cooperation partners system-wide. Attention: These settings are crucial for the functioning of KO. Incorrect entries can make data exchange impossible! Please consult your IT department and CodX Software support if you want to make changes here. Global settings The settings of the KO - Cooperation module are made on the CodX PostOffice server. Attention: These settings are crucial for the functionality of KO. Incorrect entries can make the data exchange impossible! Please consult your IT department and CodX Software support if you want to make changes here. KO - Cooperation...

  • Settings mail alliance SEM interface

    • HELP_MAILALLIANCE_SEM_INTERFACE_SETUP

    System overview See mail alliance SEM interface. Configuring the mail alliance SEM interface Configure all mail alliance system partner number Select the county structure whose county data is to be exported to mail alliance...

  • Settings OCR Server

    • HELP_OS_SETUP_OCRSERVER

    The ROI (Region of Interest) settings must be made once during commissioning and are described in more detail in the AdminDoc.

  • Settings Pakadoo

    • HELP_PAKADOO_SETUP_TAB_DLG

    With Pakadoo you are able to exchange data between CodX PostOffice and the Pakadoo service. In order to exchange data with Pakadoo, you also need also a corresponding license for CodX PostOffice. In the Pakadoo tab, you define the settings required for successful data exchange with Pakadoo. successful data exchange with Pakadoo. Designation (Custfieldname) Description(Table ID: 2705, lID = 0)...

  • Settings Pickup Tours Server

    • HELP_ABHOLTOUR_SETUP

    The settings are only accessible if you have the Pickup Tours / Settings user right. Here you define the time at which the daily generation of the pickup tour of the pickup tour instances takes place. You also set the number of days in advance for which the pickup pickup tour instances are generated in advance and after how many days they are they are deleted again. If you start"Regenerate Pickups", the pickup tour instances for all standard pickup tours are regenerated for all standard pickup trips, provided they have not yet been edited or deleted.

  • Settings production site

    • HELP_SORTIERPLANEDITOR_SETUP_PRODUKTIONSSTANDORT

    Right To make changes here, the rights must be under Production view / Settings / Production location must be set accordingly. Production site In the list you can see all production locations.

  • Settings ROI (Region Of Interest)

    • HELP_OS_SETUP_CAMERA_ROI_DLG

    The ROI (Region of Interest) determines the image section that is cut out of the full camera image for image processing (OCR; format recognition). camera full image for image processing (OCR; format recognition). Due to the reduced amount of data, further image processing is optimized and executed much faster. It is very important to make these settings carefully so that the OCR and format recognition work reliably. If image saving is activated, the reduced image section is saved for transmission (not the full image). The settings must be made once per image type, for further details see AdminDoc...

  • Settings SaveSendungServer

    • HELP_SAVESENDUNGSERVER_SETUP

    This dialog shows the current status of the module "SaveSendungServer". The module processes and stores items that are transferred from external sorting systems via SSI (Standard Sorter Interface) to CodX PostOffice via SSI (Standard Sorter Interface). Transmissions via SSI are stored in a buffer and from there into the live database. Status The "Status" group indicates the current processing status. The data is automatically updated every 30 seconds...

  • Settings tariff model

    • HELP_TM_SETUP_TAB_ZA

    Cyclical articles are used to charge for services that are not quantity-based but are to be charged at a certain interval. are to be billed. These are defined in the register "Cyclic articles". A distinction is made between cyclical articles for orders (ZAA) and invoices (ZAR). If there are dependencies between cyclic items, this can be defined with the sequence. The cyclic articles are always based on a consignment-independent article defined in the tariff module. The cyclic article whose service is no longer valid (date range) is highlighted in red...

  • Settings tariff model performance

    • HELP_TARIFMODELL_SETUP_LEISTUNG

    The services are defined in this register. Operation Functions Search Enter the name of a service in the "Search" line and press the "Search" button. You can work with wildcards in a search word by using the * character. With Including inactive services you can control whether only the active services or also all services that are no longer used are to be displayed. The [Add] button can be used to create new services. The system automatically assigns a UPOC. This UPOC is used in particular for the entry of shipments. The following can be added: Consignment-related services Non-broadcast services Services for logistics remuneration Additional services Services for the courier system. You can see these criteria in the existing services in the respective columns. Consignment-related services...

  • Settings tariff model value added tax

    • HELP_TM_SETUP_MWST

    This tab is used to define the VAT rates. These VAT rates are then assigned to the individual items. For each VAT record, an account number, a tax key and a tax key and a tax key for VAT-exempt companies. can be stored. These attributes are transferred with the FiBU-Export to the Financial Accounting (third party system). The two attributes must be set according to your FiBU system. Attention: It is mandatory that a VAT is defined as VAT-exempt, otherwise no invoices will be created. Additional attributes for eInvoices (UNTDID 5305 code & UNTDID 5305 code VAT exempt & reason for VAT exemption) For eInvoices it is mandatory to have a code for the VAT feature. The following codes from the code list UNTDID 5305 must be used: (This list is not complete, you can find more codes on the Internet if you search for UNTDID 5305 ) (Bold: set by default in CodX PostOffice)...

  • Settings transformation rules

    • HELP_IMPORTEXPORTSERVER_SETUP

    This overview lists all transformation rules that are included in CodX PostOffice. With the preceding image in front of the transformation rule, it is distinguished whether the transformation rule is a standard rule or a user-specific transformation rule. The GUID is needed when you create an import or export job in the JobEngine. With the buttons displayed on the right side you can edit the transformation rules. Operation Update Refreshes the list of all transformation rules, this is reloaded from the database and displayed. The last visible selection remains retained. Add Import and export transformation rules can be added, either with a wizard or by importing a transformation rule from a file. These options are displayed on this button using a menu. Both wizards have their own help. When adding a transformation rule from a file, the file selector is opened. Here you select the transformation rule and open it. The file is checked and validated. Afterwards you will be asked if the rule should be opened with an installed an installed XML editor and whether it should be edited before saving. Afterwards the rule is directly The name of the transformation is either specified with the attribute attribute "Name" from the import file or if this is not available with available with "Import from file [filename]". Edit First select a transformation rule from the list and press either this button or double-click directly on the corresponding transformation rule. Then the XML editor registered on your computer opens with the selected transformation rule. Edit it and save it again. Afterwards the changed transformation rule will be validated and if it is correct, it will be overwritten in the database if it is correct...

  • Settings UPOC Center

    • HELP_UPOCCENTER_SETUP_DLG

    Header 2 Header 3 Text See also: Link 1...

  • Settlement date

    • HELP_MV_ABRECHNUNGTAG

    All associated items are listed for a settlement date. A settlement day cannot contain several items from the same the same remuneration or flat-rate remuneration. The date can only be selected if this dialog was opened by "Add"; the current date is then set. If one selects but now a settlement day for which settlements already exist, this is displayed and the date can no longer be changed. Settlement positions can be added or existing ones can be edited. Preview items are not displayed. These are items that are created when payroll is run to determine the expected monthly expected monthly wage. List The list shows the settlement day items. The first column contains a symbol in each case. The symbols have the following meaning:...

  • Settlement date item

    • HELP_MV_ABRECHNUNGTAGPOS

    In this dialog, the individual parameters of the settlement item can be changed. New position To create a new position it is best to use the button"Search" to select a remuneration/flat rate remuneration. to select. If you do not know the name of the remuneration, leave the search field empty and press Search. Now all existing remunerations or lump sums are displayed. Then select the desired remuneration with Apply. This takes you back to the Payroll Day Item dialog and you can enter the other parameters. Parameter Number (number of allowances or flat-rate allowances)...

  • Shipment Editor

    • HELP_SBBEDITOR

    With the shipment editor, any number of shipments can be edited at once without having to load and adjust each shipment individually. and adjust them. Mutations made will be applied to all shipments displayed in the shipment editor that are selected. Most of the attributes of a shipment including the shipment custfields can be customized individually. This allows for efficient adjustment of shipments is possible. The changes that are made in a shipment are displayed in the system event "Shipment editor", the attribute the attribute: old value -> new value. If the number of changes does not fit in one line, as many events of this type are events of this type are appended as necessary to display all changes. are displayed. It is possible that the shipment attributes are preset by an external module which calls the the shipment editor. This happens for example for example in the production view when reposting the overflow districts. These attributes can be changed or deleted by the user at any time. change or delete them again. Please note that the number of transmissions which are displayed is limited. This limit can be be set, please read System settings. All consignments to be processed are saved in the background by a job on the application server. changed. Due to a setting in the Custfield for drilldown reporting, the jobs are divided into packages with a certain number of shipments (default value is 1000). This is done so that a single processing run with a large number of items does not take too long. take too long...

  • Shipment editor SIxDef

    • HELP_SBBEDITOR_SIXDEF

    With this dialog you can determine the SIxDef for a shipment. shipment, which is used to recalculate the shipments to be changed in the Shipment Editor to be recalculated. To determine the attributes for the SIxDef the existing receiving address is used to search for the district. If no carrier route is found with this, the available, the system uses the old carrier route to determined. The generated SIx based on the entered SIxDefs is then then saved on the transmission. If no SIx could be generated it is stored empty and a log entry is made in the data logger. is made. Operation You have the possibility under 2 option to select how you want to use a SIxDef. SIxDef from client Select a client from the dropdown list displayed to the right of this option. selection list displayed to the right of the option, select a client whose SIxDef you want to use. you want to use. After selecting a client, the corresponding SIxDef is displayed in the input line below. SIxDef User-specific In the input field displayed to the right of this option, you can enter your own you can enter your own SIxDef, please note the syntax of the SIxDef...

  • Shipment entry

    • HELP_MDEApp_Capture_FormAppInfo

  • Shipment entry

    • HELP_MDEApp_Capture_FormDataEntry

  • Shipment entry OCR output (OS-AZD)

    • HELP_OSAZD_OSAZDVIEW

    Content Introduction Camera(OCR) / Manual Mode New entry / postprocessing Sequence of the automatic acquisition...

  • Shipment tracking

    • HELP_SR

    Now you can find the manual of this module online on our webserver. This has the advantage that we can incorporate additions and changes more quickly and easily. Link to the manual of your version (PDF file)...

  • Shipment/Box/Bundle Detail

    • HELP_SBBDETAIL

    In this dialog you will find all data and events that are assigned to the shipment. Some data are immediately visible, others can be found by opening further dialogs. Depending on the user rights it can be that some buttons are not available. are not available. Please note that regardless of the search in the online database or archive database, this dialog is always used to display the detailed data is always used. Of course, in the case of an archived broadcast, fewer details will be displayed. View The view of the dialog is divided into 2 halves, where the upper half contains most of the details of the shipment/box/bundle and the lower half contains the events belonging to the shipment. and the lower half contains the events associated with the show. The buttons are arranged so that they are next to the list, to which the button or function refers. Shipment/Box/Bundle Details In the first place are the status displays...

  • Show broadcast images

    • HELP_IMAGEVIEWER_PREVIEW

    This dialog shows a list of all available broadcast images and documents that belong to the selected broadcast. Thereby can be of the following types: Shipment image, delivery list, return receipt, OCR image, format image, complaint document, customer document, image capture and/or Postal Document. The image formats can be the common formats such as JPG, JPEG, BMP, TIFF, etc., as well as PDF documents. View The dialog is divided into 2 parts by a splitter bar, which can be moved by the user. Thereby the two halves are repositioned according to their size. The splitter bar is shown as a grey bar, which is displayed in the horizontal line of the dialog. of the dialog...

  • Show reports

    • HELP_CXREPORT_VIEW

    In this module you can launch the different reports of CodX PostOffice. The reports are grouped by processes or topics to ensure clarity. Only the reports for which you have the print rights are displayed. have. If you select a report, you will find a short help on the corresponding report in the Description area. Please pay particular attention to the data masters and filters used. These are important for understanding the report. You can find a list of all available reports in the index. Operating elements...

  • Show shipment images in detail

    • HELP_IMAGEVIEWER_PREVIEW_DETAIL

    This dialog shows the details of a broadcast image, and also allows the user to make some modifications. View There are 4 detail attributes displayed from the consignment image: Image type, the consignment UPOC, the date the image was captured, and the comment for the image. The remark is the only field that can be changed by the user depending on the authorization. The image is displayed with the menu of the image editor and can be changed in the view. These changes in the view have no influence on the saved image. Operation...

  • Signature

    • HELP_POLIBRARY_SIGNATURE_DLG

    If a signature pad is connected to the computer connected to the computer, a signature can be read in as an image and saved. stored as an image. When the Signature dialog is displayed and you have button, the Signature Pad is ready for you to enter the signature. the signature. Dialogue The following functions are then available in the dialog:...

  • Sort plan - Editor

    • HELP_BV_TAB_SPDLG

    The sorting plans for the connection of various sorting machines are managed here. With a sorting plan, the previously entered districts can be assigned to the compartments on the sorting machines. In order to edit sort plans, the corresponding rights must be available for the logged-in user. Buttons "Add": A new sorting plan is entered and the detail dialog is opened. The name of the sorting plan is suggested as "Sorting plan <date Time>" is suggested as the name of the sort plan...

  • Sort plan detail for private service providers

    • HELP_BV_SP_DETAIL

    Sorting plan Each sort plan can be provided with a designation and a remark. This allows the individual sorting sorting plans can be quickly and easily distinguished from each other later. Filter displayed districts With these filter settings you can limit the display of the respective districts in the lower half of the dialog. You can filter according to various criteria. If multiple criteria are specified, only the districts that match ALL criteria will be displayed. When you have defined the defined the desired filters, click on the [Apply] button to update the display of the subjects...

  • Sort Plan Editor - Move Subject Assignment

    • HELP_BV_SP_SHIFTASSIGNMENT

    You can use this dialog to move the compartment assignments of an entire sort plan. You can define from which tray number and by how many trays the shift should be carried out. You can also define whether the shift is to take place in ascending or descending order. Special subjects that you have defined in the Settings -> Logistics -> Sort plan -> Special subject are not affected by a shift and are skipped by the other compartments. Moves that you make here are saved directly to the sort plan. Shift in direction...

  • Sorter settings

    • HELP_SORTIERPLANEDITOR_SETUP_TAB_SORTER

    Right To make changes here the rights must under Sorter / Settings must be set accordingly. Sorting systems In the list, you will only see the workstations that are are defined as sorting systems. You can make these settings under Production / Workstations. To do this, select the corresponding workstation and set a check mark at Defaults Entry . .. under Sorting system...

  • Sorting plan detail

    • HELP_SORTIERPLANEDITOR_DETAIL_DLG

    A sort plan is used to sort shipments into compartments. These can be sorting compartments of a sorting machine or sorting shelves. The sort plan defines the criteria that apply to the corresponding items for each sort compartment. Sorting plan The sorting plan has a name and a remark. These can be freely chosen. However, the name can give hints about the use of the sort plan (e.g. 'Coarse sort plan A'). Fans There are three types of subjects:...

  • SortTree Info

    • HELP_SORTTREE_READER_INFO

    This status dialog informs you about the the current status of the data files required by the system for the SortTree and the IHS server. SortTree and the IHS server. The dialog is updated cyclically every 5 seconds. seconds, so that ongoing changes can be observed. can be observed. View In the main part of the dialog you will find a list with all information attributes which are available. In the the first column is the name of the information and in the the second column the information itself. Below this is a status text about the current state of the running process of the data files. In front of this status text there is an icon, which shows at a glance the status of the map files, either Information, Warning or Error. On the right side are the buttons for operation. Designation...

  • SortTree Info

    • HELP_SORTTREE_READER_SETUP_DLG

    In this dialog the settings for the SortTreeReader are made. To change these settings you need administrator rights. There are the general settings per country specific tokenizer and the global settings, which are valid as default, as well as a name black list for the determination of the recipient address. For the country specific tokenizer "Default", which is not assigned to any country but is the default setting for countries without a specific tokenizer assignment, the possibility to delete a value is disabled, because they should be applicable in any case. General settings: Designation (Custfieldname) Value (Table ID: 1005, lID = 0)...

  • Sources of complaints

    • HELP_RM_SETUP_RMSOURCE

    On this page you can manage complaint sources yourself, i.e. you can create new complaint sources, edit them and delete them again. delete them. Always one source of complaint must be defined as a standard this is always selected as the first one when entering new complaints. selected first. View In the entire visible area you see the list with the existing complaint sources, and next to it the available functions. Operation The following functions are available:...

  • Sources of complaints

    • HELP_RM_SETUP_RMSOURCEDETAIL

    In this dialog you edit a complaint source that is new or existing. View You will see all available fields, including those which are only informative. In addition, the available functions on the right side. Operation Edit the following input fields:...

  • Specialist equipment configuration

    • HELP_MAILBOXSYSTEM_CONFIG

    In this module, they make the basic settings for a compartment system. Depending on what kind of compartments the system has, it is called a post office box system, a locker system or a post office box system without control. A mailbox system has at least one compartment of the letterbox or parcel compartment type. However, it can also have lockers. P.O. boxes are drop-off points where delivery is centralized, as opposed to inboxes at the workplace. A locker system only has lockers of the locker type...

  • Specialist plant management

    • HELP_MAILBOXSYSTEM_MANAGEMENT

    This module can be used to manage compartment installations. This includes the following functions: Assigning compartments to person and customer/cost center Assignment of access rights to subjects Query and set the subject status...

  • SQ - Sequencer settings

    • HELP_SQ_SETUP

    This dialog contains all the Custfields that are available for the are available for the SQ Sequencer module. View A list of all existing attributes is displayed for editing. The first column contains the name of the The second column contains the value of the attribute that can be edited. To edit a value click with the mouse on the corresponding column and change the value. SQ-Sequencer CustFields Designation (Custfieldname)...

  • SSI settings

    • HELP_SSI_SETUP_DLG

    This dialog contains settings for the SSI interface (Standard Sorter Interface). General settings Designation Description 101: Export districts defined at country level to sorting systems...

  • Standard job for calculating the planned delivery dates

    • HELP_JOB_0100_0004_ZUSTELLTAGE_BERECHNEN

    General CodX PostOffice calculates delivery calendars based on various delivery calendars based on various strategies. The delivery calendars determine on which on which calendar days a delivery is made for certain units. will be delivered. The delivery calendar is calculated for a certain time in advance. calculated in advance. This job performs these calculations for all entities that have have changed or whose home delivery calendar has changed. In addition a cleanup is performed after the calculation, i.e. all delivery that means all delivery calendars which are greater than the set value in the past are deleted. Likewise orphaned entries are deleted. This job should run at least once a day so that all changes in carrier route management are taken into account and the are taken into account and the corresponding home delivery can be determined. Calculate settings for delivery calendar Apart from the schedule, there are no settings that can be made on the job itself. settings that can be made. However, there are some Custfields, which are considered with the computation of the delivery days and which have an influence on the calculation...

  • Standard pick up tour

    • HELP_TAB_STANDARD_ABHOLTOUR

    General The mail service provider collects the mail from the customer and brings it to the sorting centre. The collection usually takes place regularly. The collection rounds module now provides the user with an instrument to plan the collection tours of his customers and to give the collection driver a list of all list with all customers to be picked up. Regular pick-up tours, so-called standard pick-up tours, can be managed, can be managed, as well as short-term changes can be recorded. A server component generates the daily pick-up tour instances from the standard pick-up tours. pickup tour instances that can be found in the pickup calendar. In order to process pick-up tours, an FA license is is required. To use this module, you need the appropriate access rights. (User right pickup tours / standard pickup tours) In process...

  • Standard pick up tour detail

    • HELP_ABHOLTOUR_DETAIL_DLG

    With this dialog a standard pickup tour can be can be entered or edited. Each standard pick-up tour can be assigned who will drive the tour. Each standard pickup tour must be assigned to a pickup tour group. to a pickup tour group. Weekdays" defines on which days the tour will be driven. the tour will be run. Functions Print This means that this standard pickup tour can be can be printed...

  • Standard pickup tour location

    • HELP_ABHOLTOUR_ORT_DLG

    Here you can select the customer or the location which should be considered on the pickup tour. The order of the pickup tour is determined on the basis of the "Time from". determined. Further you define on which days the pickup should take place. For a new location the days are already selected, for which the standard pickup tour is defined. Of course, these can also be changed, it should help you and simplify the execution. If you still have information about the pickup, this can be be entered under comment.

  • Standard shipment image export

    • HELP_JOB_0112_0001_ITEM_IMAGE_EXPORT

    0112:0001 Image CaptureServer: Default Shipment image export General With this job the broadcast images can be exported from the image database into a directory. Shipment images whose flag fHostExported = 0 are exported. After successful export, this flag is set to 1. If the image changes, the flag fHostExported is set to 0 again. is set to 0 and the changed image is exported again. Possibly the already exported image will be overwritten with the new one, depending on the depending on the variables used for the output path and the filename. filename were used. The job has the name: 0112:0001 Image CaptureServer: Standard Shipment Image Export...

  • Status bar

    • HELP_POEXPIRYLICENSEDLG

    The dialog displays all licenses that will expire in the next few days in the form of a list. Table This lists the licenses that will expire. Support request If you have the necessary rights, you can create a support request directly with this button.

  • Status bar

    • HELP_POSTATUSVIEWDLG

    The status bar is divided into three areas. User details, login area and license / client display. User(CodX PostOffice / Windows) Here the logged in CodX PostOffice employee, the PC name and the Windows user are displayed. If no user is logged in, the font is red. Login area Here you can log in to CodX PostOffice, log out and change the password...

  • Status bar

    • HELP_STARTUPSERVER_ADVANCED_FUNCTIONS

    The dialog shows further possible functions. Delete local settings Here all local settings are deleted from the registry.

  • Status of courier orders

    • HELP_COURIERSYSTEM_ORDER_STATUS_MACHINE

    The status of a courier order can be changed by various activities on the CodX PostOffice user interface, by the MDE or by the system itself. The system ensures that consistency is maintained at all times.

  • Status scale / ELFK

    • HELP_WAAGEELFKSERVER_WAAGESTATUS

    This dialog shows the status of the ELFK and the scale. The individual fields are usually self-explanatory and purely for information purposes (e.g. in the event of any problems for the support). If no scale is detected, this dialog can still be displayed can still be displayed, in which case the status line will show that no scale has been detected. Please note that for the use of the scale a license "CodX PostOffice Alibi memory" must be available in sufficient number otherwise the weighing function will be acknowledged with an error message. error message. Format recognition The individual boxes symbolize the sensors on the weighing pan of the ELFK. If a sensor is covered, this is shown here with a tick. This allows the function of each individual sensor to be can be checked...

  • Street search

    • HELP_ADRESSDLGSERVER_STREETSEARCHDLG

    In this dialog you can search for streets (addresses). This can be helpful, if the address indicated on the consignment does not seem to be correct. This dialog can be opened manually via the F3 key or opens automatically if the OCR was unable to assign a unique address could be assigned. The street search compares the address information entered with the area data available in the database. Thereby automatically makes various suggestions as to what might be a suitable address. For comparison, phonetic comparisons, similar spellings phonetic comparisons, similar spellings, number or letter transpositions and other algorithms are used to offer you the widest possible range of possible results. possible results. When entering data, a distinction is made between "exact" and "inexact" searches. These are described on the corresponding pages described. The column labeled "%" shows the probability of the corresponding search result...

  • Street search Exactly

    • HELP_ADRESSDLGSERVER_ADDRENTRYEXACTLYTAB

    In the exact search, the individual attributes (postcode, town, district, street and/or house number) are entered exactly in the corresponding fields. The search is then also carried out on the terms in exactly these fields. If the city is not specified or not known, a radius search is performed based on the postal code. If the assignment cannot be made exactly or if an address from another source is to be searched for by copy/paste, the imprecise search is recommended. Alt key The key combination [Alt] + underlined letter can be used to jump directly to the corresponding input field, to make any necessary corrections...

  • Street search imprecise

    • HELP_ADRESSDLGSERVER_ADDRENTRYINEXACTLYTAB

    With the imprecise search, the individual attributes (postcode, town, district, street and/or house number) can be entered as required in the search field. in the search field. The search is then applied across the individual terms. A term is therefore searched for in all attributes. If the city is not specified or not known, a radius search is performed based on the postal code. If too many results are returned, it is advisable to restrict the search as much as possible or - ideally - to use the exact search. Alt key The key combination [Alt] + underlined letter can be used to jump directly to the corresponding input field, to make any necessary corrections...

  • Subscriber management

    • HELP_ABO_TAB_ABONNEMENT

    Introduction In the "Subscriptions" module, journal subscriptions are assigned to persons or logistics units. These subscriptions can be limited in time, edited or even deleted again. In this module, subscriptions can be entered and assigned topersons or logistics units. For the subscriptions, an article is specified for the billing. For the persons or logistics logistics units, a personal subscription number and a validity period can be defined. Subscriptions In the Subscriptions tab, you can search and filter for the desired subscriptions...

  • Subscriber management

    • HELP_ABO_TAB_ABONNENT

    Introduction In the "Subscriptions" module, journal subscriptions are assigned to persons or logistics units. These subscriptions can be limited in time, edited or even deleted again. In this module, subscriptions can be entered and assigned topersons or logistics units. For the subscriptions, an article is specified for the billing. For the persons or logistics logistics units, a personal subscription number and a validity period can be defined. Subscribers In this tab you can search for subscribers, add new ones, edit or even delete them...

  • Subscription Detail

    • HELP_ABO_SUBSCRIPTIONDETAIL

    In the Subscription no. field, you can enter the recipient's subscription number for the corresponding newspaper/magazine. The comment can be freely assigned as required. With the From/To period you can define from when to which date the recipient should receive this medium. should receive this medium. The delivery days can also be specified if the recipient only wants the medium on certain days of the week (e.g. because the recipient is only present on certain days). (e.g. because the recipient is only present on certain days). A delivery block can be created, for example, if the recipient is on holiday and does not want delivery. delivery.

  • Subscription Details

    • HELP_ABO_TAB_ABO_DETAIL

    Here you enter the details of the subscription, which is then added to the respective person. This is where you enter the details of the subscription, which is then added to the person in question. Editable columns are displayed here with a small blue triangle in the upper left corner. In addition, the selected persons from the existing subscribers are marked and selected in the subscription details. Delete added subscribers Assigned subscribers can be deleted directly. This can be done individually or, if desired, several subscribers can be deleted at once. several subscribers at once. To do this, the subscribers can be marked with a tick in the boxes and then removed by clicking on the button on the button [Delete]...

  • SV - Recalculate shipment

    • HELP_SBBEDITOR_DETAILDLG_RECALCSBB

    In this dialogue you can determine whether the district of a shipment is to be recalculated, whether the planned delivery date date and whether capacity planning is to be recalculated. should be recalculated. View There are 3 activation boxes on the dialog, with which the attributes of the consignment(s) to be recalculated can be determined. can be determined. For the attribute "Recalculate district" an additional a district structure must be specified in addition, in which the receiving the receiving address to be searched for is located. On the right side you will find the available functions. Operation The following settings are available:...

  • SVServer: Delivery and holidays

    • HELP_SVSERVER_SETUP

    Shipments without district Shipments that are saved without a district and/or without an article can be corrected/recalculated on the basis of the data they contain. be corrected/recalculated. The settings page displays the corresponding information: - Total number of consignments without a district - Total number of items without article - Status of the current retro-billing If a recalculation run is already active, this is indicated with the text "Corrections are currently running for consignments without district and without article..." is displayed. The button "Correction" is deactivated in this state. To recalculate consignments without district and/or without article click on "Correction". Buttons Correction Opens the dialog for correcting transmissions...

  • Swiss Post GLS

    • HELP_DIEPOST_GLS

    With Swiss Post GLS you can send your parcels quickly and and reliably to anywhere in Europe. This product (service) is suitable for goods shipments up to 50kg. The transport price includes tracking and tracing and delivery against signature. delivery against signature. Europe is divided into four zones. Further information like country zones and much other you can find here: Swiss Post GLS...

  • Swiss Post GLS additional services

    • HELP_DIEPOST_GLS_ZUSATZLEISTUNG

    AddOnInsurance/Additional Insurance You have the option of insuring your package against all risks. Each parcel is insurable up to a maximum amount of EUR 5000.00 (without deductible). The insurance of our partner covers all risks from door to door. Details please refer to the insurance conditions. (see further information) In addition, you can insure the customs duties and foreign VAT and thus also fully cover this risk of loss. fully covered. You can find more information here: Swiss Post GLS additional services...

  • System Camera Settings

    • HELP_CAMERA_SETTINGS_SYSTEM

    The camera settings can basically be made on three levels. If a setting is not defined on one level, the setting on the next lower level is used. Hierarchy: Profile Workplace System Profile Workplace System...

  • System settings

    • HELP_CONFIGSERVER_SETUP_SYSTEM

    On this dialog you will find Custfields, which are needed for the the system settings. View A list of all existing attributes is displayed for editing. The first column contains the name of the The second column contains the value of the attribute that can be edited. To edit a value click with the mouse on the corresponding column and change the value. Designation Value Designation...

  • System tasks

    • HELP_SYSAUFG

    Now you can find the manual of this module online on our webserver. This has the advantage that we can incorporate additions and changes more quickly and easily. Link to the manual of your version (PDF file)...

  • Tariff model

    • HELP_TM

    Now you can find the manual of this module online on our webserver. This has the advantage that we can incorporate additions and changes more quickly and easily. Link to the manual of your version (PDF file)...

  • Task Detail Dialog

    • HELP_JOBENGINESERVER_SETUP_SCHEDULE

    To execute jobs or to perform other tasks that need to be performed at regular intervals, there are there are the schedules. With these it is possible, start times and operating times in the most different variations. Schedules can be combined, that means that means several schedules can be assigned to one task, which is then executed at the calculated times of one schedule or from the combination the combination of several schedules. Overlapping or duplicate times from multiple schedules assigned to a task assigned to a task are not a problem, since a task can only be executed once within a task can only be started once within the same time time, so such duplicates are ignored. In the header at the beginning of the dialog indicates whether the displayed schedule schedule is a schedule for execution or for an operating time. Attention! The job engine always calculates the active start times of jobs for one start times of jobs. When PostOffice is started, the current hour is current hour is determined as the start time for the calculation. Jobs before the start of CodX PostOffice will not be executed (except with the option executed (except with the "Repeat missed jobs" option). This information is especially important when start times are are calculated daily with frequencies. Please note that a schedule can be assigned to several tasks, so a change tasks, so a change to such a schedule may affect the start time of other tasks. can affect the start time of other tasks. Operation...

  • Task Detail Dialog

    • HELP_JOBENGINESERVER_SETUP_TASK

    In this detail dialog of a job, the individual processes belonging to the job are defined. A job can execute any tasks that have different tasks. We differentiate between the tasks in 3 categories. The 1st category are Tasks that execute a predefined process with variable parameters (for example parameters (example: SQL Task, Script Task, FTP Task, etc.). etc.). The 2nd category are tasks that execute a predefined process In a module that is implemented in a fixed way. (Example: Update SortTree map files or unlock districts). These predefined processes usually have no parameters. The 3rd category are whole jobs that can be executed by a task. can be executed. All tasks of each category can be reused in a job. can be reused in a job. With this principle we have a modular system, according to which we can compile jobs. The detailed description of the possible tasks of the 1st category can be found please refer to the AdminDoc. However, we ask that you only changes if you understand the CodX PostOffice processes and the processes and understand the functionality of the job engine. understood. View The dialog is divided into two sections, the first one the first contains the general task data, the second is the list with the the extended attributes that are passed to this task for execution. for execution. Depending on the task, these attributes are required to guarantee a correct execution of the task. correct execution of the task. On the right side are the buttons with the available functions for operating the dialog. operating the dialog...

  • Test print address label

    • HELP_DIRECTPRINT_TEST_ADDRESS

    Prints according to the number of address labels and fills the variables with the configured values. See also: DirectPrint Variable definition

  • Test print consignment label

    • HELP_DIRECTPRINT_TEST_SENDUNGSLABEL

    Prints according to the number of shipment labels and fills the variables with the configured values. Which label is used depends on the selected service and customer/cost centre. See also: DirectPrint Variable definition

  • Test print return label

    • HELP_DIRECTPRINT_TEST_RUECKLABEL

    Prints according to the number of return labels and fills the variables with the configured values. See also: DirectPrint Variable definition

  • Text block detail

    • HELP_CONFIGSERVER_SETUP_TEXTBLOCK_DETAIL

    In this detail dialog, a text block is either edited or newly entered. The dialog cannot be resized. View All attributes which can be edited are displayed. In addition, a list is displayed with all available labels which can be assigned to this text block. A label corresponds to a text block button. The labels should be be defined in such a way that their use is clear, i.e. in which module and in which dialog of this module. Editing Menu text Here you enter the text that appears in the menu below the text button for selecting the text block. Please use a name so that no misunderstandings occur when selecting the text block. The maximum length of the menu text can be 254 characters. but it makes sense to use as short a name as possible so that the text block menu is displayed clearly...

  • Text blocks

    • HELP_CONFIGSERVER_SETUP_TEXTBLOCK

    Right To be able to make changes here, the rights must be set accordingly under General Settings / General must be set accordingly. General Text blocks are always reusable texts that can be used in different modules of CodX PostOffice. Instead of entering the same texts over and over again, they can be entered once in a central location and then inserted into the text in the modules that support text blocks by selecting them. text blocks can be inserted into the text by selecting them. The modules, which support text blocks, each contain a text block button, which is represented by a small button with an arrow pointing downwards. This looks like the following:...

  • THE POST

    • HELP_DIEPOST

    #DIE-POST

    With this module the consignment data is exported to DIE POST depending on the location. In addition, it is possible to search for posting documents that have already been received and print them out. (#DIE-POST) Selection In this section you can see the current definitions that are used for the export. (Selection). It is mandatory to select a location. To do this, click the Selection button. Only only those locations are available for which the user has the rights "THE POST" or "Administrator" rights. These rights can be set under Access rights for BV / Settings / Production Location / Location X...

  • THE POST - Export

    • HELP_DIEPOST_SETUP_EXPORT

    #DIE-POST

    Here you can define which service types are to be included in the BMZ export. (#DIE-POST) Letters with proof of delivery (BMZ) Packages SwissExpress There is a separate job for export in the system tasks...

  • THE POST - Import

    • HELP_DIEPOST_SETUP_IMPORT

    #DIE-POST

    There are four jobs in the system tasks for importing. (#DIE-POST) 0200:0004 ThePost: Delivery List Import 0200:0005 ThePost: Delivery List-SEEB-Import 0200:0001 ThePost: Task Directory Import 0200:0002 ThePost: BMZ Reports-Import...

  • THE POST - Product

    • HELP_DIEPOST_SETUP_PRODUCT

    #DIE-POST

    In this tab you can link the product group to a CodX PostOffice service. (#DIE-POST) See also: In the AdminDok under DIE POST: How to set up the DIE POST module

  • THE POST Courier URGENT Business Document Goods

    • HELP_DIEPOST_KURIER_URGENT

    With URGENT courier, your documents and goods will reach their destination reach their destination extra quickly, even with a delivery guarantee if desired. Collection from your domicile is included. The same applies to the Track & Trace electronic tracking and tracing for all shipments and destination countries. Document Document counts as: What is written on paper or depicted in any (printed, copied, typed, or handwritten) is not permitted handwritten) Has no commodity value...

  • THE POST Export Selector

    • HELP_DIEPOST_SELEKTOR

    #DIE-POST

    Here you can define what is to be exported. The date range is also valid for the display of the task directory. (#DIE-POST) Location: (It is mandatory to select a location) Date range: (Default is the current day) To export: There are four product types to choose from here: AVZO; BMZ; Parcel and Swiss Express. Individual shipments:...

  • THE POST Import

    • HELP_DIEPOST_IMPORT

    #DIE-POST

    This module is used to import shipments from delivery lists which are provided by DIE POST. (#DIE-POST) A distinction is made between the ZLP Import (csv file) and the ZLP-SEEB import (Excel file). First an import file must be selected and then the import can be started. The associated log data is displayed in the list. The description of the UserLog can be found in a separate manual...

  • THE POST PostPac International

    • HELP_DIEPOST_POSTPAC_INTERNATIONAL

    For PostPac International, a distinction is made between ECONOMY and PRIORITY. These two products (services) are suitable for shipments up to 30kg. With ECONOMY you can send parcels abroad at a reasonable price. With PRIORITY you can send parcels abroad more quickly. You can find more information here: PostPac International ECONOMY PostPac International PRIORITY ATTENTION: Requirements in CodX PostOffice!!!...

  • Title

    • HELP_CAMERA_DEVICE_PROPERTIES_DLG

    This dialog lists camera-specific properties. These properties are exclusively informative, they cannot be edited (Read-Only). See also: Settings cameras System Camera Settings Workstation Camera Settings

  • Title

    • HELP_CXLETTERSCAN_SETUP_FEEDER

    Here you will find all available settings for the external feeder. View A list with all available attributes for editing is displayed. The first column contains the name of the attribute, the second column contains the value of the attribute which can be edited. To edit a value, click with the mouse on the corresponding column and change the value. Feeder settings Designation...

  • Title

    • HELP_DISPLAYMODUL_SETUP_BOARDTEST

    This dialog allows you to test a CxIO module Mini and check the available functions. The test is activated/deactivated by means of a radio button. The test functions in such a way that every 200 milliseconds the status of the device is status of the device is queried and displayed every 200 milliseconds. and the values set by the user for output, PWM 1 and 2 and the LED are transmitted to the device. and the LED are transmitted to the device. View In the uppermost part of the dialogue you will see a warning that you should pay attention to. Below this is a option field with the designation Board test, by means of which you can switch the Boardtest on and off. Below this there are 2 groups of Input and output fields. The group Outputs shows the possible outputs of the hardware, which we can control by software. Next to it is the group Inputs, which are measured on the module measured and displayed on the module. Operation Dig_Out_1 This selection box controls the digital output 1 on the CxIO module Mini, which can be switched either on or off...

  • Title

    • HELP_FTDI_SETVENDOR

    Before CxHardware can be used correctly with CodX PostOffice certain information must be stored on these modules in the modules in the EEprom, so that it can be used correctly by the modules can use it correctly. For this purpose we set the following data: Attention Only use this function if you are 100% sure. Otherwise, hardware may be damaged which cannot be made functional again...

  • Title

    • HELP_HANDHELD_SETUPRFID_FIRMWAREUPDATE

    This dialog is used to update the firmware and scripts on an Elatec RFID reader of type TWN3 and/or TWN4. The firmware can be updated as often as desired, only condition is that the reader is connected. Please make sure that you update the firmware correctly and use the correct firmware, otherwise it can otherwise the device may not be recognized and the firmware will have to be the device is no longer recognized and the firmware must be updated again. After updating the firmware, it is necessary for the that the Handheld module reinitializes the connected devices. devices, which is done automatically after exiting this dialogue if an update has been performed. Please also note that an update can only be can only be done once, after that this dialog must be closed and after be closed and reopened after the devices have been re-initialised. again. View At the top of the screen you will see you will see a label indicating the current type of Elatec RFID reader selected. reader selected. If no such device was found, e.g. because there is no firmware from CodX Software AG on this device, Unknown device is displayed. This is followed by a warning about the proper use of the offered function. Below this is the group with the device type, these are settings that you can only make if no RFID reader has been detected and you are performing a firmware update. firmware update Based on the assumption that you know which device is connected. After that the selection of the firmware, either standard which is delivered by CodX Software AG, or a firmware which you can choose yourself. you can choose yourself. At the bottom, after the the button to leave the dialog and the help button. help button...

  • Title

    • HELP_HANDHELD_SETUP_DEVICESUPPORTDLG

    On this dialog you can set which device group you want to support as well as the wedge functionality and settings. Activate only the device device groups you really need, this will speed up the discovery process. faster. You have the option to detect all devices and then deactivate the device types not found in this dialog by clicking the deactivate the device types that were not found. The devices that are supported by CodX PostOffice are displayed in a list which can be edited. View On the left side you can see all available device groups currently supported by CodX PostOffice. On the right side you will find the buttons for the functions that are available to you. Operation Activate or deactivate the desired Activate or deactivate the desired device groups using the checkboxes...

  • Title

    • HELP_RM_DETAIL

    In this dialog the complaint is displayed with all possible possible data is displayed and processed. Further details can be found in the old help which is available in PDF format. available. View In this detail dialog of the complaint you can see all the detailed information on a complaint. This is divided into general data and groups, which are each located on different different tab pages. Operation Source When a new complaint is entered, the complaint source defined as standard is automatically selected here. standard complaint source is automatically selected here. Select the desired complaint source using the down arrow...

  • Title

    • HELP_SCRIPTMANAGEMENT

    On this dialog you can and test it. The scripts are each assigned to a entity of CodX PostOffice and cannot be used on their own. on their own. So there is always a button somewhere that you can use to open this dialog. This description is general and does not refer to a specific script. specific script. View The screen consists of 2 parts, in the upper part there is a grid is a grid with the available script variables and their script variables and their values. These values can be changed. be changed. In addition, the values which are changed by the script are displayed. In the lower part is a line-oriented editor, which displays the script used for this entity. is used. This script can be edited as desired. On the right side are the functions, which are available...

  • Title

    • HELP_SV_SENDUNGSLISTE

    This detail dialog is used to import transmissions in the form of a text file. a text file, to assign the corresponding consignments to the the consignment UPOC's or alternative codes contained in the text file and then contained in the text file and then use these as filters to search. You can either select a text file or select a list of consignment consignment UPOC's directly into the list using Copy & Paste. View At the beginning of the dialog you will find the display and selection option of the import file, below that the list with the transmissions. On the right side are the buttons with the available functions. the available functions. Operation ... With this button a file selection dialog appears, by means of which you can select a file containing the desired desired consignment UPOCs and/or consignment alternative codes. are to be included. The file should be in a standard text format with cariage return and linefeed as end of line. The file can contain as many lines as you like, but please consider that the larger the file, the longer the processing time. The file may also contain several UPOC's or alternative codes per line, but in this case they must be they must be separated by the semicolon ';'...

  • Title

    • HELP_WE_SETUP_CF

    On this settings page you can set the available Custfields for the module Goods Receipt can be set. For a detailed description of the individual Custfields, please refer to the following list please refer to the following list: Designation (Custfieldname) Value (table ID: 1093, lID = 0) 0100: Overflow district strategy This setting is only readable, because it is set on another setting page via an input field. This setting is only readable can be set...

  • TNT Interface

    • HELP_TNT_SETUP

    Now you can find the manual of this module online on our webserver. This has the advantage that we can incorporate additions and changes more quickly and easily. Link to the manual of your version (PDF file)...

  • Track and Trace (DHL Express)

    • HELP_SV_TRACKANDTRACE_DHLEXPRESS_DLG

    Depending on the service provider, Track and Trace enables external shipment tracking through an interface provided by the service interface provided by the service provider. For DHL Express, this is a web interface that provides a website with the relevant information. is provided. As information for the shipment, the shipment barcode is used, which is stored in CodX PostOffice in the shipment as an alternative code. stored in the shipment. View In the upper part of the dialog you see the two service providers of a shipment, first the delivery service provider, i.e. the recipient of the shipment, and next to it the delivery service provider, i.e. any service provider who delivered the shipment. First you see the delivery service provider, i.e. the recipient of the shipment, and next to it the posting service provider, i.e. the service provider who delivered the shipment. At least one of the two service provider is a valid service provider, otherwise the button for Track and Trace in the detail dialog of the shipment would not be activated. activated. If a service provider is valid, the name of the service provider is displayed, otherwise the description "No service provider available". The service providers are provided with a radio button so that you can switch between the service providers if both are valid. The detail dialog of the track and trace interface corresponding to the service provider is displayed under each service provider, in this case a web browser. case a Web browser. Operation Use the radio button to select the desired service provider if both are valid service providers...

  • Track and Trace (DHL parcel)

    • HELP_SV_TRACKANDTRACE_DHLPAKET_DLG

    Depending on the service provider, Track and Trace enables external shipment tracking through an interface provided by the service interface provided by the service provider. For DHL Paket, this is a web interface that provides a website with the relevant information. provides. The information used for the shipment is the shipment barcode, which is stored in CodX PostOffice in the shipment as an alternative code. stored in the shipment. View In the upper part of the dialog you see the two service providers of a shipment, first the delivery service provider, i.e. the recipient of the shipment, and next to it the delivery service provider, i.e. any service provider who delivered the shipment. First you see the delivery service provider, i.e. the recipient of the shipment, and next to it the posting service provider, i.e. the service provider who delivered the shipment. At least one of the two service provider is a valid service provider, otherwise the button for Track and Trace in the detail dialog of the shipment would not be activated. activated. If a service provider is valid, the name of the service provider is displayed, otherwise the description "No service provider available". The service providers are provided with a radio button so that you can switch between the service providers if both are valid. The detail dialog of the track and trace interface corresponding to the service provider is displayed under each service provider, in this case a web browser. case a Web browser. Operation Use the radio button to select the desired service provider if both are valid service providers...

  • Track and Trace (GLS Germany)

    • HELP_SV_TRACKANDTRACE_GLSDE_DLG

    Track and Trace enables external shipment tracking through an interface provided by the service provider. At GLS Germany this is a website with the corresponding information. The consignment barcode is used as the key for the consignment (Track&Trace-ID), which is is stored in CodX PostOffice as alternative code is stored. View In the upper part of the dialog you can see the two service providers of a shipment. On the left the delivering service provider, on the right the posting service provider (service provider who posted the shipment). If a service provider is valid, the name of the service provider is displayed, otherwise the text the text "No service provider available". You can switch between the two service providers via the radio button (if possible). The lower part shows the corresponding track & trace information of the shipment. Operation Service provider Use the radio button to select the desired service provider...

  • Track and Trace (The Post)

    • HELP_SV_TRACKANDTRACE_DIEPOST_DLG

    Depending on the service provider, Track and Trace enables external shipment tracking via an interface provided by the service provider. interface provided by the service provider. For "Die Post", this is a web interface that provides a website with the relevant information. provides. As information for the shipment, the shipment barcode is used, which is stored in CodX PostOffice in the shipment as an alternative code. stored in the shipment. View In the upper part of the dialog you see the two service providers of a shipment, first the delivery service provider, i.e. the recipient of the shipment, and next to it the delivery service provider, i.e. any service provider who delivered the shipment. First you see the delivery service provider, i.e. the recipient of the shipment, and next to it the posting service provider, i.e. the service provider who delivered the shipment. At least one of the two service provider is a valid service provider, otherwise the button for Track and Trace in the detail dialog of the shipment would not be activated. activated. If a service provider is valid, the name of the service provider is displayed, otherwise the description "No service provider available". The service providers are provided with a radio button so that you can switch between the service providers if both are valid. The detail dialog of the track and trace interface corresponding to the service provider is displayed under each service provider, in this case a web browser. case a Web browser. Operation Use the radio button to select the desired service provider if both are valid service providers...

  • Track and Trace (The Post)

    • HELP_SV_TRACKANDTRACE_DPD_DLG

    Depending on the service provider, Track and Trace enables external shipment tracking via an interface provided by the service provider. interface provided by the service provider. For "DPD", this is a web interface that provides a website with the relevant information. information. As information for the shipment, the shipment barcode is used, which is stored in CodX PostOffice in the shipment as an alternative code. stored in the shipment. View In the upper part of the dialog you see the two service providers of a shipment, first the delivery service provider, i.e. the recipient of the shipment, and next to it the delivery service provider, i.e. any service provider who delivered the shipment. First you see the delivery service provider, i.e. the recipient of the shipment, and next to it the posting service provider, i.e. the service provider who delivered the shipment. At least one of the two service provider is a valid service provider, otherwise the button for Track and Trace in the detail dialog of the shipment would not be activated. activated. If a service provider is valid, the name of the service provider is displayed, otherwise the description "No service provider available". The service providers are provided with a radio button so that you can switch between the service providers if both are valid. The detail dialog of the track and trace interface corresponding to the service provider is displayed under each service provider, in this case a web browser. case a Web browser.

  • Track and Trace (The Post)

    • HELP_SV_TRACKANDTRACE_FEDEX_DLG

    Depending on the service provider, Track and Trace enables external shipment tracking via an interface provided by the service provider. interface provided by the service provider. For "Fedex", this is a web interface that provides a website with the corresponding information. provides. The shipment barcode is used as information for the shipment, which is stored in CodX PostOffice in the shipment as an alternative code. stored in the shipment. View In the upper part of the dialog you see the two service providers of a shipment, first the delivery service provider, i.e. the recipient of the shipment, and next to it the delivery service provider, i.e. any service provider who delivered the shipment. First you see the delivery service provider, i.e. the recipient of the shipment, and next to it the posting service provider, i.e. the service provider who delivered the shipment. At least one of the two service provider is a valid service provider, otherwise the button for Track and Trace in the detail dialog of the shipment would not be activated. activated. If a service provider is valid, the name of the service provider is displayed, otherwise the description "No service provider available". The service providers are provided with a radio button so that you can switch between the service providers if both are valid. The detail dialog of the track and trace interface corresponding to the service provider is displayed under each service provider, in this case a web browser. case a Web browser.

  • Track and Trace (The Post)

    • HELP_SV_TRACKANDTRACE_TNTEXPRESS_DLG

    Depending on the service provider, Track and Trace enables external shipment tracking via an interface provided by the service provider. interface provided by the service provider. For TNT Express, this is a web interface that provides a website with the relevant information. information. The shipment barcode is used as information for the shipment, which is stored in CodX PostOffice in the shipment as an alternative code. stored in the shipment. View In the upper part of the dialog you see the two service providers of a shipment, first the delivery service provider, i.e. the recipient of the shipment, and next to it the delivery service provider, i.e. any service provider who delivered the shipment. First you see the delivery service provider, i.e. the recipient of the shipment, and next to it the posting service provider, i.e. the service provider who delivered the shipment. At least one of the two service provider is a valid service provider, otherwise the button for Track and Trace in the detail dialog of the shipment would not be activated. activated. If a service provider is valid, the name of the service provider is displayed, otherwise the description "No service provider available". The service providers are provided with a radio button so that you can switch between the service providers if both are valid. The detail dialog of the track and trace interface corresponding to the service provider is displayed under each service provider, in this case a web browser. case a Web browser.

  • Track and Trace (UPS)

    • HELP_SV_TRACKANDTRACE_UPS_DLG

    Depending on the service provider, Track and Trace enables external shipment tracking through an interface provided by the service interface provided by the service provider. For UPS Post, this is a web interface that provides a web page with the relevant information. information. The information used for the shipment is the shipment barcode, which is stored in CodX PostOffice in the shipment as an alternative code. stored in the shipment. View In the upper part of the dialog you see the two service providers of a shipment, first the delivery service provider, i.e. the recipient of the shipment, and next to it the delivery service provider, i.e. any service provider who delivered the shipment. First you see the delivery service provider, i.e. the recipient of the shipment, and next to it the posting service provider, i.e. the service provider who delivered the shipment. At least one of the two service provider is a valid service provider, otherwise the button for Track and Trace in the detail dialog of the shipment would not be activated. activated. If a service provider is valid, the name of the service provider is displayed, otherwise the description "No service provider available". The service providers are provided with a radio button so that you can switch between the service providers if both are valid. The detail dialog of the track and trace interface corresponding to the service provider is displayed under each service provider, in this case a web browser. case a Web browser. Operation Use the radio button to select the desired service provider if both are valid service providers...

  • Transfer locations to KO partner

    • HELP_BV_KOMULTISELDLG

    With this dialog, the responsibility of area data and the corresponding district data to a cooperation cooperation partner, or to cancel responsibility that has already been responsibility that has already been transferred can be cancelled. That means, that the cooperation partner is responsible for the maintenance of the responsible for the maintenance of the area and district data and these are KO module. Within the country the previously assigned to the selected location in the area management, one or more selected for which the responsibility can be transferred. responsibility can be transferred. There is the possibility to import a file with postcodes and to activate these postcodes contained in the file. file, or to add new postcodes. View In the upper part of the dialog you will find the information field and the selection button to select the cooperation partner or the own client. Below this information field there is a search field to limit the search by postcode or postal codes or towns. Below this list with all localities found in the selected country. country. On the right side there are the buttons with the the functions. The localities are displayed in different text colors. These mean the following: Black - A location that has already been captured and is under your own responsibility...

  • UAD Newspaper import

    • HELP_ZEITUNGSIMPORT

    Prerequisites for the import So that you can start the newspaper import you must you must make the following entries: Select the import file Select a customer/cost center to which the orders are requests will be booked. (This will be proposed at the next import again) The file name is automatically taken over as the as the job name. However, you can also enter your your own job name here...

  • UNC path

    • HELP_UNC_PATH

    The so-called UNC path (UNC = Universal Naming Convention) can be used to address any target in a networked computer environment. In a Windows environment, the UNC path always begins with two backslashes: "\\". This is followed by either the name or the IP address of the target computer. A directory must be shared on the target system (share). A share name is also assigned, under which the share is addressed. This share name is entered next. The subdirectories up to the desired target object can then follow. Example \servername_or_IP\share_name\folder_level01\folder_level02

  • Universal addresses

    • HELP_UNIVERSALADRESSE_VIEW

    Universal addresses are normal address entries in the CodX PostOffice database, which are not linked to any other entity (e.g. cost center, person, courier order, etc.). other entity (e.g. cost center, person, courier order, etc.). Addresses of this type can be entered and searched for in any address dialog in any address dialog. You can define yourself which which attributes you want to search for. You can search for several search terms that occur within an attribute. occur. You also have the option of using a fuzzy search. to be used. The system searches for similarities within a term, which must be at least 60% true. Please note that depending on the size of the address database, the fuzzy search can take a long time. View This dialog displays a list of all available universal addresses. No other address types are displayed. In the upper part there are the search terms with the search options within the box "Search". On the right side of the list are the buttons with the available functions. Operation Please note that a lock is used to edit and/or delete universal addresses. That means, if another user other user edits or deletes a universal address, it is locked for all other users. In this case a message dialog appears, telling you whether a universal address is being edited or deleted. This also applies if several universal addresses are edited or deleted at once. or deleted at once. For the list, the filter function can be displayed by right-clicking on the list header. universal addresses displayed by means of a filter...

  • Update firmware/bootloader

    • HELP_FTDI_FIRMWAREUPDATE

    This dialog is used to update the firmware and/or the bootloader on a CxLetterScan control unit, a CxIO module and/or a CxIO module mini. You have the option to select the latest firmware that is shipped with CodX PostOffice, or any other firmware. Please note that improper use of this function can lead to errors or even damage to the hardware. Please note that currently CxDisplayModules are not supported. View There is a large conspicuous notice on the dialog warning against improper use of this function. Please note that you can destroy a module with an incorrect use of this function. Below this dialog there is a status line with the information which hardware type is used, the ID of the CxIO module if necessary, the current version of the firmware and the bootloader as well as the currently latest available version of the firmware and the bootloader. This shows whether it makes sense to update them. The checkbox below is for the option to search for the old bootloader V1.1 if the new bootloader could not be started. This option is only useful when updating CodX PostOffice from at least V2019.03.00 to at least V2020.03.00. Below this is the firmware selection with the function to update and exit this dialog. Below the firmware selection there is a log window where the operations during the update are logged...

  • UPOC Center

    • HELP_UPOCCenter

    Now you can find the manual of this module online on our webserver. This has the advantage that we can incorporate additions and changes more quickly and easily. Link to the manual of your version (PDF file)...

  • UPOC Center

    • HELP_UPOCCENTER_GET_UPOC_TAB

    In the Request UPOC tab, new UPOCs can be created and saved to files. For this purpose, the UPOC type, the number (maximum 100,000), the output format (text file or Excel) and the file are selected. The various UPOC types are described in chapter 5 Universal Postal Code.

  • UPOC Center

    • HELP_UPOCCENTER_INFO_DLG

    The detail dialog shows the following information: Customer / cost center (UPOC, name, customer number) Status (delivered, inbound, blocked, multiple inbound) The attributes are output in a list form (similar to the shipment detail). If a shipment exists, a button 'Shipment detail' is offered, with which the shipment detail dialog for the corresponding shipment is opened. for the corresponding consignment.

  • UPOC Center

    • HELP_UPOCCENTER_VERGABE_TAB

    When assigning UPOCs for prelabeling, UPOCs are created as blocks organized in CodXPostOffice (UPOC pool). These blocks are already assigned the customer and optionally a service and an article. Basically, we know two processes of how UPOCs are assigned: Mass production and subsequent allocation Direct production and allocation Productions: Mass production and subsequent allocation...

  • UPOC Tool

    • HELP_UPOCCENTER_UPOC_TOOL_TAB

    The UPOC tool can be used to check and convert the UPOC. For this purpose theUPOC is entered and the desired button is selected.

  • UPS Documents Only Extended Shipment Attribute

    • HELP_SBB_CF_UPS_DOCUMENTS_ONLY

    Optional field, only relevant for international shipments (country of sender is different from country of recipient). ATTENTION: This information is important for the correct determination of the shipment price! The field indicates whether the shipment contains only documents (handwritten or printed information) WITHOUT commercial value. value. If the checkbox is not set or undefined it means that the shipment contains goods or documents WITH commercial value. are contained. Default value (flag is undefined): The transmission has a commercial value...

  • UPS Saturday Delivery Extended Shipment Attribute

    • HELP_SBB_CF_UPS_SATURDAY_DELIVERY

    Optional field, define if the UPS service option "SaturdayDelivery" should be set for the current shipment. shipment should be set. Note that the option you set may affect the price of the shipment. If you have any questions, please contact our support team at http://support.codx.ch.

  • UPS Saturday Delivery Extended Shipment Attribute

    • HELP_SBB_ESOURCE

    Enumeration, Module in CodX PostOffice that created the mail item. Value Description 0 undefined...

  • Use of <license>

    • HELP_CXLIC_HISTORY

    The Usage History function is not used in this product. This window does not display any data.

  • Use-Case Capture IHS Settings

    • HELP_CXLETTERSCAN_USECASE_CAPTURE_SETUP

    These settings are used when searching in InHouse mode (IHS) for persons, logistics units, and customers/cost centers. Thus, the search result can be optimized to achieve the highest possible hit rate. View A list of all existing attributes is displayed for editing. The first column contains the name of the The second column contains the value of the attribute that can be edited. To edit a value click with the mouse on the corresponding column and change the value. Designation Value/Description...

  • Use-Case Maintenance

    • HELP_CXLETTERSCAN_SERVICE

    This use case is used for service and maintenance is used. When this use case is set, no transmissions are stored. shipments are saved. However, the whole process of a transmission is executed as for another use case, i.e. from importing the image to the final processing depending on the module composition. module composition. Sort module The sort module is supported in a test mode. If the option "Sorting module test (ejection 1 - n)" is activated, all connected sorting compartments are connected sorting compartments are used in the logical order. View In this view there is only the setting for image processing, with which a read-in letter can be sorted according to the various elements such as recipient address, franking value, alternative code, etc. Additionally there is a button for the user log on these settings, which can be used to start a non-modal dialog with the user log. This contains the entries resulting from the processing of a shipment in the use case 'Maintenance'. consignment in the use case 'Maintenance'. Please note that the input fields are deactivated as soon as the machine is running! Please note that the following elements PrintLayout, Variables and Print are only visible if the hardware of a print module is of a print module is connected...

  • Use-Case R-Scan

    • HELP_CXLETTERSCAN_USECASE

    Print module The print module is supported as hardware but the letters are not printed. Sort module The sort module is supported if available. Tab General...

  • Use-Case Scan

    • HELP_CXLETTERSCAN_SCAN

    This use case is used for simple scans. It can be determined with which ImageParser rule the letter should be the letter should be processed and how the data should be stored. should be saved. This use case supports the normal process of CxLetterScan. Elements which do not directly belong to the letter will be stored in the shipment as shipment busfields. At least one storage type must be active, but it is also possible to have both storage types may be active. If the transmissions are to be stored in a file file, a directory must be selected. must be selected. Print module The print module is supported as hardware is supported, but the letters are not printed. View In this view there are only the settings for the image parser rule and how the broadcasts should be should be saved. Additionally there is a button for the userlog on top of these settings, which displays a non-modal dialog with the userlog. This contains the entries resulting from the processing of a transmission in the use case 'Scan'. shipment in the use case 'Scan'...

  • Useful life and operating time of safe deposit box systems

    • HELP_MAILBOXSYSTEM_TIME_TAB_DLG

    These settings only affect lockers of type Locker. This defines how long the lockers can be used. It also defines when the user of a reserved safe deposit box is notified that he must release the safe deposit box again and what happens when the period of use or the operating time has expired. At least one schedule must be entered for the operating time, because dynamically assigned lockers can only be opened during operating time. Useful life This defines how long a dynamically allocated locker can be used. (hours / minutes)...

  • User Interface Settings

    • HELP_CONFIGSERVER_SETUP_UICONFIG

    HotKey Mapper In this dialog you can set the keyboard settings for function keys. There are several modules in CodX PostOffice, which support this special keyboard handling. The list shows all keyboard settings that are available. Right In order to be able to make changes here, the rights under under General Settings must be set accordingly. View...

  • User login

    • HELP_POSTATUSVIEW_SETUP_DLG

    Here you can define with which employee data the user can use to log on to CodX PostOffice. can log on. You can choose from the following: UPOC Employee no. (personal no. of the employee) Ext. employee no. (Ext. pers. no. of the employee)

  • UserLog Customer management

    • HELP_USERLOG_KV

    Changes to customer data are logged in the user log: The following customer data is taken into account: Master data number, Ext. number, Label, Customer group, Comment, Alias, Validity date, Set Manuel inactive, Test customer, Master, Deliver UPOC Target number, Warning limit Master data Address data Customer functions...

  • Variables per template or HTML page

    • HELP_HTML_TEMPLATE_GENERAL

  • Variables that are output per shipment (sender address)

    • HELP_HTML_TEMPLATE_SBB_SENDER

  • Variables that are output per shipment (shipment list)

    • HELP_HTML_TEMPLATE_SBB_GENERAL

  • Vehicle management

    • HELP_CONFIGSERVER_SETUP_VEHICLE

    The vehicles and the vehicle types are managed on this settings page. The vehicle types contain a group of vehicles vehicles, which can be assigned to a type together. A prerequisite for the entry of vehicles is that you first enter vehicle types which are then assigned to a vehicle. Vehicles get a UPOC, for this the UPOC type 6 is used. View The view is divided into 2 parts, the upper part contains the list of vehicle types and the lower part contains the vehicles. On the right side of the list are the corresponding buttons, which make the functions available. The respective detail dialogs for entering or editing a vehicle and/or vehicle type are self-explanatory and contain all the attributes that can be edited. attributes that can be edited. Operation To edit a list entry directly, you can select the vehicle or the vehicle type directly by double-clicking on the corresponding list entry. the vehicle type directly. Optionally, the entry can be selected in the list and edited with the "Edit" button. To make a new entry, select the "Add" button next to the corresponding list. To delete an existing entry, first select it in the list and it in the list first and then click the "Delete" button. A confirmation prompt appears first, then the selected entry is deleted. selected entry is deleted.

  • Virtual scanner settings

    • HELP_DIGITAL_VIRTUALSCANNER_SETUP

    On this dialog you can configure the settings that are available for the Virtual Scanner. Operation Data directory Use the "..." button to select a data path from which the virtual scanner the virtual scanner should read in the images and PDF documents. should read. This can be any local or UNC path. OK Saves the settings permanently and closes the dialog. Cancel Close the dialog without saving the settings. Any changes made will be discarded.

  • WatchDog - Alarm list

    • HELP_CXWATCHDOG_ALARMLIST

    For further information see 'AdminDoc

  • Welcome to the OnlineHelp of CodX PostOffice!

    • Home

    This is the main page of the online help for CodX PostOffice. Context Help The online help is accessed via the help buttons (?) on the individual dialogs of CodX PostOffice can be used. This will take you quickly and easily to the information you need. Index You can get an overview of all entries in the online help via the index...

  • Wildcard

    • HELP_SEARCH

    Here you can enter a new invoice run or edit an existing one. The following settings must be made for this. Designation Enter a unique name here. The name can be chosen freely. An automatic function is however, is not assigned to them. They serve to settle a group of customers at the same time, in ONE pass. A designation such as "End of month", however, does not trigger an automatic automatic invoice run on the last day of the month, but only serves you at the start of the billing run to select the correct one. Customers who are to receive an invoice only 1x per month typically an invoice run called "End of month" (or similar) is assigned. Month" (or similar) is assigned. Customers who are to receive an invoice 2x per month will be either an invoice run called "2x monthly" (or similar) is assigned to them (and then this is also started 2x per month). However, another possibility is to assign these customers an billing run called "Mid month" (or similar) AND the one with the name "End of month" assigned. So in the middle of the month the one invoice run will be started and only invoices are created for these customers. At the end of the month, the invoice run with the same name is executed and invoices are created for these customers only. and invoices are created for customers with a monthly and semi-monthly the invoices are created...

  • Workplace assignment

    • HELP_LOACTION_CTRL

    Here you can make the assignments to the work center for the corresponding person or customer/cost center. (Time and performance dependent) Currently valid workplace It is possible to define several valid defined. For the determination of the current work center the following criteria apply: (and in this order) 1: If an assignment exists for the corresponding service for the current date, it is taken over. for the current date exists for the corresponding service, this is transferred. 2. if this is not the case, the assignment is taken over with the <standard> service for the current date...

  • Workplace assignment

    • HELP_LOACTION_DLG

    Here you can assign a work center. For the selected work center (logistics unit), the following is also displayed whether this is active. No checks are made when allocations are entered. checks are made. If you select <Standard> for the service, the setting applies to all services. The assignments can also be made on a service-specific basis. Warnings: If the validity area of the work center assignment is outside the validity area of the logistics unit, the user is informed of this user is informed of this with a warning (directly under the logistics unit)...

  • Workstation Camera Settings

    • HELP_CAMERA_SETTINGS_WORKSTATION

    The camera settings can basically be made on three levels. If a setting is not defined on one level, the setting on the next lower level is used. Hierarchy: Profile Workplace System Profile Workplace System...

  • Workstation settings

    • HELP_SORTIERPLANEDITOR_SETUP_TAB_WORKSTATION

    Right To make changes here, the rights must be under Production View / Settings / Workstation must be set accordingly. Workstations In the list you can see all workstations. (Computer) Here you can enter new workstations, edit or delete workstations...

  • Workstation: Settings

    • HELP_WORKSTATION_CUSTFIELDS

    In this dialog the Custfields settings for the workstation are for the workstation are made in this dialog. For further help on edit custfields, please refer to the corresponding help. Available options Designation (Custfieldname) Value (table ID: 2709, lID = ID from table Sorter)...

  • XMail

    • HELP_XMAIL

    Now you can find the manual of this module online on our webserver. This has the advantage that we can incorporate additions and changes more quickly and easily. Link to the manual of your version (PDF file)...

  • XMLValidator

    • HELP_XMLVALIDATOR_SETUP_DLG

    Here XML can be validated against XSD. XSD XML Schema is the definition of structures for XML documents. Upload an XMLSchema file or enter the XSD schema in the text field. XML Upload an XML file or enter the XML document in the text field...

  • XTL interface

    • HELP_XTL_INTERFACE

    The XTL Interface software module is used to transfer shipment data to XTL via the API provided by XTL. The user log of the associated job 0017:0001 XTL interface shipment export is provided here. This job can be started manually via the Start button. In order for the job to export shipment data, the appropriate settings must be made. See also: XTL interface settings...

  • XTL interface settings

    • HELP_XTL_INTERFACE_SETUP

    The XTL Interface software module is used to transfer shipment data to XTL via the API provided by XTL. Job and schedules The export is executed by the job 0017:0001 XTL interface shipment export. The frequency of the export is determined via the schedule of the job. General settings 010: This is the URI (Uniform Resource Identifier) for the API call. This is specified by XTL...

  • you have mail' assignments

    • HELP_YHM_SETUP_ASSIGN

    With this dialog, which is used in the modules Person- and Customer/Cost Center Management modules, it is possible to make assignments of 'you have mail' messages for the underlying entity. messages for the underlying entity. That means that if the dialog is in the person administration, the assignment of a message for the selected person, the same if the dialog is on the customer/cost center management, the assignment is made for the selected cost center or customer. The assignments can be limited in time with a Valid from and a Valid to. time limit. View The dialog is filled by a list with the recorded assignments to the entity below. On the right side of the list are the buttons with the available functions. Operation Add A new assignment is created. A new detail dialog is opened for this purpose...

  • you have mail' attachment configuration

    • HELP_YHM_ATTACHMENT

    The configuration of the attachments is done directly with an XML editor. Please make sure that such an is installed on the computer and linked to the .xml file extension file extension on the computer where you want to edit this configuration. When you click the button "..." at the input field Attachments, an XML editor with the file extension an XML editor with the current configuration is called up directly. Adjust this and save the file, this will be automatically automatically added to the message. Specification XML for attachments In the following, the structure of the configuration as a whole and per attachment type is explained below. Please make sure that you enter the XML document correctly and wellformed. The XML structure has a root element, and within the root element for each attachment definition a repeating element. If the special character < or > occurs within an attribute or the data of an element contains the special character < or >, you have to display this character as in HTML, so that it is not interpreted as an XML control character. For the character < use &lt; For the character > use &gt;...

  • you have mail' error status

    • HELP_YHM_SETUP_ERRORSTATE

    In this dialog the user controllable error messages are error messages are displayed, which can be edited directly in the list. directly in the list. The different error statuses are predefined and no entries can be deleted or added. be added. However, entries for which you do not want to send an error message can be deactivated. be deactivated. Please note that this list will be updated continuously. New error statuses that you have not not included in the message will be processed based on the default setting. View The dialog consists only of the list of entries and 2 control buttons for closing the dialog with and without saving. You can change the size of the dialog change. Operation The following columns are included in the list, including the description of which ones can be edited:...

  • 'you have mail' Events

    • HELP_YHM_EVENT_PROCESSED

    The software module 'you have mail' has its own event processing own event processing, similar to the module Mail processing. Events are assigned for each event, which are stored per message. Thus a traceability of data sent with a 'you have mail' message is message is guaranteed. There are also events, which are not data related but only message related. These events are created automatically by the program when an action on a message is is triggered on a message. Event 'Message processed This event is created when the job for 'you have mail' messages is executed and a message is processed. is processed. It is irrelevant whether the message has processed data and messages have been sent, this event only indicates that the the process for processing a message has been executed. The process has been executed, even if a message was processed with errors. was executed incorrectly. See also: Events Broadcast content...

  • 'you have mail' Events

    • HELP_YHM_EVENT_SENDET_FACHANLAGE

    The software module 'you have mail' has its own event processing own event processing, similar to the module Mail processing. Events are assigned for each event, which are stored per message. Thus a traceability of data sent with a 'you have mail' message is message is guaranteed. There are also events, which are not data related but only message related. These events are created automatically by the program when an action on a message is is triggered on a message. Event 'Message sent for compartment system This event is created when a 'you have mail' message or a compartment a 'you have mail' message was sent. The ID of the event contains the ID of the system or the compartment of a compartment system.

  • 'you have mail' Events

    • HELP_YHM_EVENT_SENDET_PERSON

    The software module 'you have mail' has its own event processing own event processing, similar to the module Mail processing. Events are assigned for each event, which are stored per message. Thus a traceability of data sent with a 'you have mail' message is message is guaranteed. There are also events, which are not data related but only message related. These events are created automatically by the program when an action on a message is is triggered on a message. Event 'Message sent for person This event is created when a 'you have mail' message you have mail' message was sent for a person. The ID of the event contains the ID of the person.

  • 'you have mail' Events

    • HELP_YHM_EVENT_SENDET_REKLAMATION

    The software module 'you have mail' has its own event processing own event processing, similar to the module Mail processing. Events are assigned for each event, which are stored per message. Thus a traceability of data sent with a 'you have mail' message is message is guaranteed. There are also events, which are not data related but only message related. These events are created automatically by the program when an action on a message is is triggered on a message. Event 'Message sent for complaint'. This event is created when a 'you have mail' message is sent for a complaint. you have mail' message was sent for a complaint. The ID of the event contains the ID of the complaint.

  • 'you have mail' Events

    • HELP_YHM_EVENT_SENDET_SBB

    The software module 'you have mail' has its own event processing own event processing, similar to the module Mail processing. Events are assigned for each event, which are stored per message. Thus a traceability of data sent with a 'you have mail' message is message is guaranteed. There are also events, which are not data related but only message related. These events are created automatically by the program when an action on a message is is triggered on a message. Event 'Message sent for transmission This event is created when a 'you have mail' message a 'you have mail' message was sent. The ID of the event contains the ID of the shipment.

  • you have mail' Global settings

    • HELP_YHM_SETUP_CFGLOBAL

    Here you will find all available settings for the 'you have mail' messages. These settings can be made globally for all messages or individually for each message. If a setting is made at the message level, this setting always has priority over the global setting. View A list with all available attributes for editing is displayed. The first column contains the name of the attribute, the second column contains the value of the attribute which can be edited. To edit a value, click with the mouse on the corresponding column and change the value. you have mail' settings (Global)...

  • you have mail' Message

    • HELP_YHM_SETUP

    You have mail' is a module of CodX PostOffice for automatic notification of special events to the recipient from different events to the recipient from different entities in CodX PostOffice. These messages can be sent either via EMail or via CxMessage via SMS. A certain number of standard messages are predefined, but the user can create any user-specific messages can be entered. It is possible possible to store any number of language-dependent templates for each message. The configuration, e.g. standard language, SMTP settings, e-mail sender address, and so on, are set using hierarchical CustFields, that is, the same settings are available Global (General) and per Message. The setting which is available on the lowest level wins, the order is the same as in the previous list. The availability of message processing depends on the number of licenses and the available licenses. If too few licenses are available, you can still edit the settings, but no more messages are sent. you have mail' messages are only displayed in this overview if in this overview only if the required license is available. is available. you have mail' messages can require different licenses, which can also be combined. which can also be combined with each other...

  • you have mail' Message Detail

    • HELP_YHM_SETUP_DETAIL

    This detail dialog contains all elements which can be set on a message and which are required to to execute the processing of a message. These data is divided into 3 areas, the detail data, the process data and the templates. the templates. The process of a message is executed as shown below: Please note! In order to correctly capture the process data of a message, you need to have knowledge of the data structure of CodX PostOffice as well as profound knowledge of the database query language SQL and the script language VB script. View...

  • 'you have mail' query

    • HELP_YHM_SETUP_DETAIL_QUERY

    SQL queries are the basis for processing a 'you have mail' message. With queries the data we need in a message is prepared and provided. message is prepared and made available. All elements that we need in these queries, whether they are names of temporary tables tables, values from a message, UPOCs from messages, etc. are by means of replacement variables on the right-hand side of the editor using menu buttons, please see the description below. description below. To make the use of the queries easier to understand, a process diagram is process diagram below, which will help you to understand how to use the queries. how to use the queries...

  • you have mail' query specifications

    • HELP_YHM_QUERY_CONDITION

    To process 'you have mail' messages there are 4 different queries that the user can enter. These queries must comply with certain conditions so that the functionality and the correct flow of the process. These conditions are described here. Please note that in order to create and process a knowledge of databases, SQL and the structure of the CodX PostOffice of the CodX PostOffice database. Important!!! When we talk about query here, we mean SQL-Batch, that means it can or must be not only a single query, but it can be an it can be a SQL batch that executes multiple queries. In the data query, a maximum of 5 successive queries are are possible. Trigger Query With the trigger query all possible objects are stored that can be used as possible data for a message are stored in a temporary table. for a message. This is basic data of a data entity assigned to the message. For example, if the data entity of a message is "shipment content", then shipments are determined as the base data, which must fulfill certain conditions depending on the meaning of the message. must fulfill certain conditions. These conditions are checked with trigger query and the relevant data is stored in a temporary table. temporary table. Use the name of this temporary table with the replacement variable on the menu button "yhm variables". menu button "yhm variables". A trigger query must necessarily determine certain attributes that are used in the further course of the process. It is irrelevant whether these are also used later, if not they must be selected with 0 or empty values. These are are the following database attributes:...

  • you have mail' recipient configuration

    • HELP_YHM_SETUP_RECEIVER

    In this detail dialog, you specify which receivers are to be used for a message and how they are to be are to be used. To do this, you can choose from all the receiver types that have been defined for this data entity, and determine determine whether they are to receive a message as the main address, or as CC or BCC. This configuration only works correctly in conjunction with the receiver query, which must also provide the the correspondingly configured receivers via SQL. provide. View The dialog consists of a list with all receivers that are used for this message. To the right of this list are the function buttons. Operation...

  • you have mail' recipient types

    • HELP_YHM_SETUP_RECEIVERTYPES

    The recipient types are the basis for setting the recipients of a 'you have mail' message. for setting the recipients of a 'you have mail' message. CodX Software AG provides a number of default recipient types, which cannot be changed by the user. The user has the possibility to add new recipient types and to edit or delete own ones. edit or delete them. These recipient types are needed if you want to use a recipient query to select and group additional recipient entities using a recipient query. View The dialog will be filled with an editable list, which displays all existing recipient types. The recipient types predefined by the system are displayed in gray text because since they cannot be edited or deleted. On the right side of the list are the available functions. Operation Recipient types are processed directly in the edited. If you want to change a particular field or checkbox, click directly on the you can click directly on the relevant field with the mouse, and you can enter the values directly in the list or activate or deactivate an Activate or deactivate an activation box. Please note that you can also change the number, although a number is suggested number is suggested for each entry, but it can be overwritten. overwriteable. Duplicate numbers are not allowed and will be automatically changed back to the old entry...

  • 'you have mail' script after ... Query

    • HELP_YHM_SETUP_DETAIL_SCRIPT

    Each process step that is controlled with a query also has a script that is executed after the query. after the query. This is a VB-Script (Visual Basic Script), which can be used to change previously selected data can be changed afterwards. A Postscript, i.e. a script that is executed "afterwards", has the advantage that a query does not have to be changed anymore, i.e. it provides a certain a certain basis of data and can then be adapted individually by means of a programming language. Since one has more possibilities with programming language has more possibilities, data can be programmed after the query, data can still be changed program-controlled. A VBScript is provided with a certain set of variables, which are variables, which enable a database connection to the query data and create a reference to the message. View The screen contains in the first place the script editor, which is a line-oriented editor in which the VBScript is entered. Beside the editor there are a number of predefined variables and replacements, which are made available by means of a menu button. Below the VBScript editor there is a splitter, which can be used to adjust the screen size of the of the editor and the rest of the screen. Below that there is a list with all predefined variables that are passed to the VBScript, some of them are not visible because they contain e.g. the database connection. Below this list is the output window, where the result is displayed. is displayed. The result is the content of the table, which is created by the query associated with the script and modified by the script. by the script. Operation Operate the elements on the screen as follows as follows:...

  • 'you have mail' statistic

    • HELP_YHM_STATISTIC

    This detail dialog shows all available 'you have mail' event entries that are available. Depending on where this dialog was called, a filter is set to display only the will be set to show only the event entries that are relevant for the corresponding relevant for the corresponding module. Sent messages can be be viewed in an HTML preview. A reset of selected events is possible, i.e. the selected message may be sent again, as these selected message is sent again, since this statistic is also used to check used to check whether a message has already been sent. has been sent. View The first part of the dialog contains the filter settings for the events frame contains the filter settings for the events. Depending on where the dialog was called from, the filter settings can be changed or not. filter settings can be changed or not. With each filter change, the list of events is reloaded. Below you will find the list of all events that were found due to the filter settings. On the right side of the dialog contains the available functions. Operation Update This button reloads the events in the list, taking into account the filter settings. taking into account the filter settings...

  • you have mail' substitutions

    • HELP_YHM_SETUP_DETAIL_REPLACEMENTS

    Next to the editor area there are several menu buttons, which are buttons that display a list when pressed. list when pressed. These lists are predefined replacement characters or replacement values that you can use in a query and/or in a VBScript and have a direct reference to the messages and data to the messages and data used in a message. These are specified below. Please note that these are are to be used in the same way in the SQL query and in the VBScript: yhm variables Variable name Description Name of the computer on which the job is running...

  • you have mail' template assignment

    • HELP_YHM_SETUP_ASSIGN_DETAIL

    The actual assignment is made in this detail dialog. To do this, you select the desired messages and then enter the details of the message. are entered. Please note that no duplicates can be entered. assignments that do not differ in any way are not permitted. are not allowed. On the other hand, several assignments can be assignments can be recorded, if they differ due to the validity differ. Please note that this assignment is only is only activated if the option "Assignable to person" and/or "Assignable to message the option "Assignable to person" and/or "Assignable to customer/cost center" is activated. customer/cost center" is activated on the corresponding 'you have mail' message. and cannot be assigned. If the message is activated for assignment, it must be assigned or it will not be otherwise it will not be executed for this person. Currently valid 'you have mail' assignment To determine the current you have mail' assignment the following criteria apply: (and in this order) If a message exists for the current date message exists for the current date, it is copied...

  • you have mail' Template Detail

    • HELP_YHM_SETUP_DETAIL_TEMPLATE

    A 'you have mail' template is a template to present the data of a message and to send it either as an EMail or as an SMS to a defined recipient. There are 2 types of templates, either a standard template, or an an error template. An error template may only occur once per message. it is used if an error occurs during the process or during the sending a message, otherwise when a message is successful message, the corresponding selected template is is used. A template is depending on the message type, which is adjustable, either for SMS a pure text document, or for EMail a HTML document, namely the body part of an entire HTML document. Please refer to the HTML specifications of the World Wide Web Consortium (W3C). A template can be filled with predefined variables and with the data from the data query, either for individual individual or summary data. You can enter any number of templates can be entered for each message; these must be defined in one of the attributes type, language, identifier ID, or identifier name. duplicates are not permitted. A template preview can be displayed directly in the dialog. a template can be sent to a test address in order to check it. test it. Please note that there is no preview of a template with the effective data of a message. View The detail dialog of a template is divided into two tabs tab, namely the"Template Detail" tab, in which the template is defined, and in the tab"Template Preview" tab, where the template can be displayed. can be displayed. If you are editing an error template, the background of the dialog is displayed in red. Template Detail...

CodX Software CodX Software AG
Sinserstrasse 47
6330 Cham
Switzerland		 Support
http://support.codx.ch 		CxSpickel